Engelbert Kaempfer: The History of Japan, London 1727
|
Internet Edition by Wolfgang Michel, Kyushu University, Fukuoka-City, Japan. © 2007
RAW AND INCOMPLETE SCANNER VERSION. NOT EDITED YET
A General Description of the Empire of Japan
Chap. I. Journal of our Voyage from Batavia to Siam, with an account of what happen'd during our Stay there.
AFter I had made some Stay at Batavia, the
Capital of the Dutch East-India Company in the Indies, and Residence of the
Director General, seated upon the great Island Java, an Opportunity offer'd for
sailing to Japan, on board a Dutch Ship, call'd De Waelstroom. bound for that
Country. I was offer'd the Place of Physician to the Embassy, which the Company
sends once a Year to the Japanese Emperor's Court. It is now almost a Century,
since this Empire hath been, as it were, shut up and kept some all Commerce
with foreign Nations, except the Dutch, who being look'd upon as the sincerest
of all Foreigners, are for this Reason admitted among them and tolerated
through under a very strict Inspection, and are allow'd this particular [002] Favour, that their Resident may every Year appear at Court in
order to pay their Respect to the Emperor. This is the only Opportunity at
present, an European can have of going thither, and viewing the Majesty of that
Court and Empire. Our Ship was bound first to Siam, there to dispose of Part of
her Cargo, and to take in Goods of that Country, whereby I had an Opportunity of
seeing also this famous Kingdom and its magnificent Court.
I went on Board on Sunday the Seventh of
May 1690 early in the Morning. We weigh'd Anchor the same Day and set Sail with
a small, but favourable Breeze. About Noon we made the small Island Eidam,
lying a few Leagues off Batavia, along which we coasted till late at night,
when we lost sight of it.
On Monday the Eighth we lost Sight of the
high Land of Java, but not of the neighbouring Islands. We were becalm'd in the
Afternoon and advancing but slowly, cast Anchor in Twenty nine Fathoms, lest
the Currents, which run here very strongly, should carry us too much out of our
Course. About half a League off us we saw a small Portuguese Vessel at Anchor,
with Chinese Sailors on board, which set Sail from Batavia two days before. She
was call'd the St. Paul, and had the Image of this Apostle painted upon her
Stern. She had been in Japan about five Years ago, notwithstanding that by
order of the Japanese Emperor all Portuguese whatever are forbid entring his
Dominions under Pain of Death and Forfeiture of their Ships and Goods. I
flatter myself the Reader will not be displeas'd to be inform'd of the Occasion
and Event of this Voyage, which I particularly enquir'd into at Batavia, the
rather since it bears a near relation to the main Subject of this History.
About six Years ago, a Japanese Vessel was
forc'd away, in a violent Storm, from the Coasts of Japan towards China, and
having suffer'd many incommodities, was at last wreck'd near Macao, a famous
trading Town in China, belonging to the Portuguese. The Portuguese Government
at Macao
thought this an excellent Opportunity, to recommend themselves to the Japanese
Emperor, and perhaps, which they had more at heart, to recover their former
advantageous Trade. For this reason it was resolv'd to relieve the twelve
Japanese, whose Lives had been sav'd, to treat them with kindness and civility,
and generously to send them back to Japan on board one of their own Ships. But
the Event fell far short from answering their Expectation; for when they got
into the Harbour of Nangasaki, all the Japanese without exception were
committed to Prison, and the Portuguese Vessel strictly guarded, without
permitting any Body to set foot on shore, till the Governors of Nangasaki could
give an Account of this nice Affair to the Imperial Court at Jedo and Orders
sent from thence as to their further Conduct. The Portuguese were like to be
put to Death and to have their Ship burnt, pursuant to the standing [003] Imperial Orders on this head; but the Severity of the Court being
somewhat al]ay'd, partly by length of time,
partly by the intercession of Mr. Buteman, then Resident of the Dutch
East-India Company, they at last, in consideration of their good Intention,
obtain'd leave to return to Macao, and Provisions were offer'd them consisting
chiefly in Rice and Water. The unhappy Japanese, after a rude Imprisonment of
two years, were set at Liberty, and under a strict Guard sent to their native
Towns. One of our Residents, upon Piis return from Jedo to Nangasaki, met some
upon the road. Thus this Voyage ended without the least advantage to the City
of Macao. But to proceed on our own Voyage.
We weigh'd anchor after midnight, and on
the Ninth in the Morning made the Thousand Islands, as they are here call'd. We
were in Sight of the high Land Lampon, in Sumatra opposite to Bantam. We saw
likewise the Western Mountains both of Java and Sumatra, and particu]arly one
in Sumatra, remarkable for its height, which to our great Grief we had had so long
in Sight, some Months before in our Voyage from Xtsijn to Batavia.
The Wind was variable, mostly S We were almost becalm'd in the
afternoon, and could not make the Island Norderwachten, that is Northern Guard,
before Evening. After Sunset a fresh favourable Gale sprung up.
It was cloudy all the Tenth. The Wind E. S.
E. We steersd North out of sight of Land or Islands, excepting some few of the
highest Mountains in Sumatra, the tops of which we percelv'd indistinctly
through the Clouds. We cast Anchor late at Night in six Fathoms, to avoid
running against Land in the Night, which was seen from the great Mast the
evening before, and suppos'd to be the Island Lucipara, lying at the mouth of
the Strait of Banca.
On the Eleventh of May we weigh'd anchor
early in the morning, but a Calm ensuing forc'd us to drop it again, and to lie
by for some hours. About two hours after Sun rising, a brisk Gale sprung up at
S. and we steer'd North between Land, which we saw last evening, and found to
be the Island Lucipara, and the Coasts of Sumatra towards the Straits of Banca.
Before I proceed further, I cannot forbear
observing in general that the Voyage from Batavia to Siam is attended with no
small difficulties and dangers, because of the many small low Islands, Rocks, Shoals
and Sands. A careful and prudent Pilot must always keep at a due distance from
Land, that is, neither too near it, nor too far off, that in case of strong
stormy Winds and Turnado's, which frequently and unawares arise in this
Passage, he may have an opportunity of coming to an anchor, and by this means
preserve the Ship from running a-ground, or from being cast away too far out of
her Course. For this Reason Ships commonly lie at anchor over night, the rather
if Land was seen the day before, or some Signs appear'd of its [004] being near. The most dangerous Passage because of its Narrowness,
Shoals and Rocks, are the Straits of Banca form'd by an Island of this name,
and the Coasts of Sumatra. The Coasts of Sumatra all along the Straits are low,
without Hills or Mountains, but well stor'd with Woods. Banca, on the contrary,
is ragged and broken with high Hills and
Mountains in some Parts, and low verdant ground in others. It seems in the main
to be a very fruitful Island. All the Ships bound for the Eastern Coasts of
Malacca, for Siam, Cambodia, Cochinchina, China and Japan, pass these Straits.
The Coasts of Sumatra, opposite to Banca, have two or three remarkable points
running out into the Straits. We got within half . a League of the said Coasts,
because there is a good soft Clay at the bottom and even ground in six Fathoms
Water and more. We made the second Point of the Coasts of Sumatra before Sun
set, and lay by against the next morning.
On the twelfth of May we weigh'd anchor
before Sun rising, and this morning got as far as the third and furthermost
Point of the (:coasts of Sumatra. The St. Paul (of which above) which was
hitherto far astern of us; was now got considerably ahead us. We steer'd along
the Coasts to N. N. W. The Sky was thick and cloudy, the Wind variable, mostly
S. The Coasts of Sumatra and Banca appeared much as yesterday. In the Afternoon
the Wind turn'd contrary, which take us take in part of our Sails, and tack
about for a while.
On the Thirteenth of May in the Evening, we
got safe to the End of the Straits, between the Mouth of the River Pallmbang on
our Larboard, and a very high Rock call'd Monapin, upon the extremity of Banca
to the Starboard. The Mouth of the River Palimbang, which was about Palimbarg
three quarters of a League distant, seem'd to be at least River; half a League
broad. We could see no Land beyond it whither for its extent, or because of the
dusk of the evening. We made the best of our way towards the said Mouth, and
the Coasts of Sumatra in seven fathoms and a half, to avoid a dangerous Rock,
call'd Frederic Henry, which lies hereabouts, and upon which a Dutch Ship
call'd Prince William, bound for Siam, unfortunately stranded some Years ago,
but the Captain and Crew sav'd themselves in the Boat. The Wind proving
favourable, and we being past the Straits of Banca, we sail'd all night.
On
the Fourteenth of May in the morning, we came in sight of the Islands Poele
Tsju, that is the Seven Islands, even otherwise the Seven Brothers. We directed
our Course so as to leave the said Islands to the Starboard. It was clear and
cool, and a good favourable Gale all Day long. We lost sight of the Coasts of
Sumatra, and in the Evening made the Island Puli Saya. [005] We advanc'd considerably all Night, and on
the Puli Saya, Fifteenth in the Morning left Puli Saya so far a-stern that we
could scarce perceive the Top of one of its Mountains, remarkable for its great
height. About Noon we made Puli Lingan,and cross'd safely the AEquinoctial
Line. It now clear'd up, having rain'd pretty hard the Night before. We were
almost becalm'd in the Afternoon advancing but little; about four we had a
strong Turnado, the Wind blew hard out of N. W. We run with incredible
Swiftness in these dangerous Seas for about two Hours, when the Wind ceasing we
came to an Anchor, having been cast pretty much out of our Course.
We set sail again on the Sixteenth in the
Morning with low variable Wind, and clear Weather, after a rainy Night. We
advanc'd but moderately, and could not get -out of sight of Puli Lingan till
Evening, when we cast Anchor.
On the Seventeenth of May we weigh'd Anchor
two Hours before Sun-rise: We steer'd N. W. but saw no ! Land all Day long: The
Currents carried us with great Violence N. and N. N. E. It blowing but little,
we; came to an Anchor towards Evening in Thirty Four Fathoms, and set sail
again about Ten at Night.
The Wind was variable all the Eighteenths,
and sometimes it blew hard. We steer'd to N. W. without Sight of Land, and
resolv'd to pass by Puli Timon, where pursuant to the Company's Instructions
our Ships commonly put in for Wood and Water, and with these favourable
Southerly Winds, to proceed directly North for Siam.
We were under Sail all Night, and on the
Nineteenth the Morning, perceiving the Top of a Mountain on our Larboard Side, we hop'd 'twould be the Island Puli Thingi, and
therefore stood in directly for it. We were not disappointed in our Hopes, and
in the Afternoon got Sight of Puli Aur, or Puli Oor, and soon after of Puli
Pisang.
On the Twentieth of May about Eight in the
Morning, we came to an Anchor before the Island Puli Timon, bearing N. E. to E.
I went on Shore with some others, partly to view the Situation of the said
Island, partly to observe what Plants and other Natural Things it produces, which
hath been in all my Travels one of my chief Cares and Amusements.
Puli Timon is one of the largest Islands
situate near the Eastern Coasts of Malacca. It is subject to the King of Johor,
who resides at Siperka upon the Continent of Malacca. He governs it by Two
Orang Kay's, one on each side of the Island. Orang Kay in the Malayan Language,
signifies a Woodman, or a Man entrusted with the Care and Inspection of Woods
and Forests. The Inhabitants are a sort of Banditto's, who have been possess'd
of this Island a considerable Time, and are of late grown so numerous, that
some Years ago one of their Orang Kay's, who came on board one of our Ships,
boasted they were no less than Two Thousand in Number, tho' perhaps not half. [006] They live separate from each other in poor small Cottages,
consisting only of one single Room, with a small Window and a Door to come in.
These Huts are not above five or six Paces long, and two or three broad. All
the Furniture within, consists in a Bench round the room to sit, or lye upon;
without, there are some few Pinang Trees: For although the Island consists of
scarce any thing but rocky Precipices, yet they choose for their Habitations
such Places, where they can have a little flat ground round their Cottages, on
purpose to plant some Pinang and other Trees. The Inhabitants are lively
enough, and not ill shaped. They are somewhat blacker than the Javans, as they
live also nearer the AEquinoctial Line, some of them seem'd to me to be of a
very unhealthy Complexion. They pluck out the Hairs of their Beards, as do also the Inhabitants of Malacca and Sumatra, which makes them
both look like ugly old Women. They are all Mahomethans, this Religion having
spread almost all over the East. Their Habit consists in a Piece of coarse
Cloath, made of the Bark of a Tree, which they wear about the Waste. They wear
a piece of the same Cloath, twisted in form of a Garland, about their Heads;
some wear Hats of Gabbe Gabbe Leaves. Gabbe Gabbe is a common Tree all over the
East Indies, and not unlike the Palm Tree. The Indians make their Saga of it,
which they eat instead of Bread. The Inhabitants came on board our Ship in
small Boats just big enough to hold each a Man, and withall so light, that one
Man can easily hawl them on Shore. The Man sits in the middle his Goods laid
behind him: The Oars are above a Man's Length and so shap'd that the Man
holding them in the middle rows with both ends on either side of the Boat. They
have also larger Boats, which will hold conveniently four People, and with these
they venture as far as the Coasts of Malacca. They brought us exceeding large
Mango's, bigger than ever I saw them; Pisangs (Indian Figs) likewise of an
uncommon Size, about a Span and a half in Length and a Span in their angular
Circumference, very large Suursacks, Pine Apples, small Lemons, Fowl, and a
very particular sort of Rams, of a redish colour, with long Hairs and a large
Tusk on each side. They brought nothing of their Manufactures on board but Bags
of Pisang neatly enough twisted, and small Mats of the same Substance, as also
of Gabbe Gabbe Leaves, likewise very artfully wrought. They would take no Money
for their Commodities; but Linnen, Shirts, Rice, Iron, and other Bawbles were
very acceptable to them. They seem to have no Knowledge at all in Money, for
having shew'd them some Pieces, they would ask for a small Mat ten times its
Value. On the contrary, for a small Piece of 4 course Linnen, perhaps not worth
three Farthings, they would readily exchange Victuals to the Value of two or
three Shillings. The whole Island, as I have already observ'd is scarce any thing else but a heap of Stones, Rocks, and
steep high Mountains, and yet, what appear'd to me remarkable, their barren
Tops, where [007] perhaps one should be at a Loss to find two or three Inches of
Ground, were cover'd with Trees and Bushes. We climb'd up the rocky Shores to
look for the watering Places, not without some difficulty and danger, by the
Help of the Roots of Trees, which grow up towards the Top, and which running
down to the Ground ten, twenty, or more Fathoms, serv'd us instead of Ropes to
catch hold at. Between the Heaps and Ruins, for so may I well call them, you
meet very frequently with small Lakes, or Ponds of sweet Water, which is in
some Places so cold, that having taken the Diversion of washing my self, I was
very much indispos'd for some Days after. One River we met was large enough to
drive a couple of Mills, and it came down . from the Tops of the Mountains,
running over the Rocks and Stones with so much rapidity and roaring, that
standing by we could scarce hear one another speak. The Water was clear, cool,
and seem'd to me to taste somewhat bitter. I had not leisure enough to make
what Observations I wish I cou'd have made upon the Plants of this Island. I observ'd
in general that there grow many of those, which I found upon the Island Eidam,
some few Leagues distant from Batavia, and have describ'd amongst the plants of
that Island. Along the Shores I took notice of the following Trees and Shrubs.
Terum Lauk, a middle siz'd Shrub, with
oblong leaves, two or three Inches long, an inch and a half broad, almost
opaque, with a strong nerve running irregularly across the middle. The Flower
was Yellow, pentapetalous or consisting of five petala, dispos'd in form of a Star.
The seed was exceedingly beautiful, all green and like a Star of Seven rays.
There were three, four or five of these Starry Seeds grew Close to one another,
which altogether made a very handsom figure.
Prlja-Laut, is a Shrub which bears a berry
somewhat. larger than our Juniper berries, green and of a fleshy substance. The leaves are serrated. I observ'd the very same plant
in Persia about Gamron or Banderabassi, and have figur'd and describ'd it at
large amongst my Persian plants.
Maanbu. A pretty large Tree with several
obtuse tender leaves, soft to the touch, without a nerve in the middle,
sticking together at the end of the branches. I observ'd the same tree at
Eidam, but had not then the good luck to meet with the flowers and fruit, which
I saw here in full perfection. The flower is somewhat particular. It consists
of 5 petala, all on one side dispos'd in form of a Semi Circle, or half moon.
Opposite to the flower leaves is a bent stylus standing upwards with a small
round green head at the top To the flowers succeed five berries of a fleshy
Substance.
Papiniok, hath a white flower not unlike
the flower of beans, which family it comes nearest with regard to the leaves,
there being three set [008] to
each Stalk, the middlemost whereof is longer and larger than the two others,
which stand opposite to one another. Another Tree, whose name I could not
learn, had large tender, roundish leaves, not unlike the leaves of the
Filberd-tree, but twice, or thrice as big with many irregular nerves running lengthways
and transversely. The flower was Compos'd of an uncertain number of petala,
commonly 7 or 9. The fruit was an Apple, not unlike the apples, of which the
old Women at Batavia make a particular Ointment, to anoint and smooth the skins
of Children after the Measles, of which I have elsewhere given some account.
Amongst the Plants there was particularly
remarkable for its uncommon beauty a flesh colour'd Iris with yellow Streakes,
and a thorny fruit much of the bigness and shape of a Nutmeg, and divided into
three Cells, in each of which were lodg'd four round white seeds about as big
as Pease.
All the Ships bound from Batavia to Siam
have instruction from the Company to put in, if possible, at Puli Timon for wood and
water, this Island being very commodiously seated for this purpose, about half
way from Batavia. I was told, and it is not improbable, that there is but
little difference between Puli Timon, and Puli-Oor, as to the situation, nature
of the place and way of life of the Inhabitants. Upon our arrival in the
morning a Gun was fired to invite the Inhabitants to trade with us; In the
evening, after the Ship had taken in a good store of wood and water, the same
signal was given for us, that went on Shore, to return on board.
We set sail after Supper with a brisk
favourable gale. Puli Timon, which in the morning bearing N. E. by E. appear'd
small and narrow, made now a much handsomer and larger appearance bearing E. N.
E. about half a League distant and seem'd to be about four leagues long and two
broad.
On the Twenty first of May in the morning
we lost sight of Puli Timon and discovered the high mountains of Malacca at a
considerable distance a-head. We steer'd to N W. and N. W. by W. to draw
obliquely near Land, which we came in sight of before Sunset, being the main
continent of Malacca and some small neighbouring Islands. We pass'd the said
Islands in the night, and got on the Twenty second of May in the morning within
a good league of the Coast of Malacca, along which we pursued our Course to the
N. with a fine favourable Land Breeze. The Coasts of Malacca seem'd to me to be
not unlike the Coasts of Ceylon very much broken, and rocky near the Sea with
steep high mountains up in the Country, otherwisefgreen and full of Timber, and
to all appearance very fruitful.
The weather continuing fair and the wind
favourable all day long, we made after Sunset the two Islands Puli Capas. [009] We did not advance much on the Twenty third
by t reason of calms, and contrary winds which obliged us to lay by the best
part of the day.
On the Twenty fourth of May we made the
Mouth of a River, and a small village upon the
Continent of Bal. Malacca, in Portuguese Maps call'd Buse. The Inhabitants,
who are all Fishermen, call'd it Terchannu. The village seem'd to consist of
about Fifty Houses or Cottages, built along the Shore. A Portuguese Ship,
which, as we were told by the Inhabitants, came from Macao, lay there at anchor
with-her Colours flying. The Inhabitants speak both Siamish and Malayan. Three
of them came on board in one of their boats to sell us fish; and for a course
Table-cloth we had as much fish as Twenty hungry people could eat, and amongst
others what they call King's Fish, which is a Fish not unlike a Pike, and about
three foot long, Korkuades call'd by the Dutch Horse-heads, because of their
figure, red Steenbrassems, Salammets, and Jacobs Ewertzen. We were becalm'd ih
the afternoon, and cast anchor in sight of some small Rgdatts Islands call'd
the Redans Islands. Some of the Ships Islan~~. Company diverted themselves, as
usual, with fishing, and Cariou~~ one of them catch'd a very fine Starfish with
nine Rays StarJ9Ih The main body held four Inches in Diameter, and each Ray was
near one span and a half long, so that the I)iameter of the whole Creature was
three spans at least. The upper surface was rough to the Touch, as it were full
of small Scales. The thickness of the main body was two Inches representing a
separate Star with nine short Rays rais'd above the substance of the body, in
the Centre of which was a round hole, or mouth, pretty large and edged with two
rows of fibres. The larger Rays were square in circumference, and of the
thickness of a finger, streight, running into a point, of a whiteish, pale
colour, and mark'd on the upper surface with Spots running across like Clouds,
resembling those of a Tyger's skin. Both sides of the upper part were lin'd up
to the point with a row of prickles joyning very close and growing still
closer, as they run on towards the point. The under surface of this Creature
was something softer to the touch or of a white colour, and each Raylin'd on
each side with a row of small feet like an Indian Millepes, or Fortyleg, which in moving
confusedly together afforded an odd and diverting sight. In the main body was a
cavity tolerably deep, from which Issued a channel along each Ray. The inward
substance was white, hard and so brittle that some of the Rays broke in my
hands.
We had tolerable good weather on the twenty
fifth, twenty sixth and Twenty seventh of May, safse, that meeting every day
with Turnado's which frequently arise in this passage, we were obliged to lie
by, till it blew over. The Coasts of Malacca seem'd to be all along well
inhabited.
On the twenty eighth of May, we made Cape
Patan, when the wind turning of a sudden to N. Vit. by W. we tack'd about for a
while [010] advancing but little, and at last cast anchor in sight of the said
Cape. We had several fishermen came on board, and sold us fish for Linnen Among
the rest they brought us some of those Animals, which our Seamen call Sea Cats,
and which are true Ichthyothuria having neither bones nor fibres like other
fish. We catch'd abundance of then in our voyage to Japan, whether I refer the
Reader as to a more particular description. It will not be improper here to
obsenre, that Linnen is, what the Inhabitants of Malacca, as well on these as
on the opposite Coasts, towards the Straits ot Malacca, and the Gulf of
Bengale, as also the Inhabitants of the neighbouring Islands, covet most, and
willingly Z exchange for the product of the Country, victuals, and Siii
manufactures, to the great advantage of seafaring people. They are for the most
part fishermen and admirable Summers, as they also pass the best part of their
life at I was told by several of our Seamen, which had been that way, and were
Eyewitnesses to the fact, that the Inhabitants of the Nicobar Islands, which
lie in the Gulf of Bengale, and are commonly met with in going Malacca to
Bengale, are such good swimmers, that they will follow a ship with all her
Sails crowded, and come upg with her. In swimming they every now and then hZi.
0 out of the water. They tie their goods about ti't neck, and sell them on
board for Fish hooks, small knXi=and such other bawbles, but chiefly for Linnen
if ther get it. They climb up the Ship wherever they ~~ with great swiftness
and dexterity. They are for the mstpart strong, and well built with wide
mouths, and luge teeth; when for diversion's sake a Gun was Pd dwi-~~ would all
jump over board, and a while after cli,mbi ik again. The Portuguese frequently
put in at these XsS; to trade with the Inhabitants. T'hey speak a peculiar
language of their own
[not processed yet]
they besmear'd them with the blood of the
Birds they kill'd [012] upon the Island, having observ'd by chance to their great joy,
that thus daub'd they would hold out longer. In short, little was wanting for
the support of their Lives but fresh water, to supply which defect they dug
holes in the ground, in several places of the Island, to gather the rain water,
which they afterwards put by for use in the abovemention'd large Shells. They
also took particular care, to gather and to lay by what pieces of wood were
from time to time thrown upon the Coasts. After this manner they shifted for
near eight years, having lost in the mean time three of their Companions, and
thought of nothing else but ending their days in this solitude. But at last the
desire of returning to their Wives, Relations and Friends prevail'd with them
so strongly, that they resolv'd unanimously to build of their provision of wood
a boat, or rather a monster of a boat, and to trust themselves once more to the
mercy of the waves, rather than to lead any longer so comfortless and miserable
a Life on a destitute, uninhabited Island. So they all went to work, and having
got their boat ready, embark'd eleven in number, unknown where their fate and
good fortune would carry them. After thirty one whole days driving, and many
hardships endur'd, they at last got into the Bay of Tunquin upon the Coasts of
the Island Haynam, and as good luck would have it, upon that part of the Island
towards Canton, which belongs to the Chinese, the other side towards
Cochinchina, being inhabited by a merciless and savage People. The Chinese
Governor of this Island receiv'd them with all imaginable kindness, clad them,
and sent them to Macao, from whence three of them came on board a Portugueze
Ship to Batavia, one of which stay'd there. Hanjemon, and his Companion
return'd to Siam on board our Ship; and the latter understood to his great
grief, that his Wife, impatient of his long and tedious absence, had laid aside
alf hopes of ever seeing her Husband again, and married a Portugueze, by whom
she had already a Child.
We made very little way on the 30th. On the 3ISt we met with a small
accident, being so suddenly befallen by a strong Turnado, that as we were
taking in our Sails, we lost our foremast, which split to pieces, and fell down
partly upon deck, partly over-board. Two of our Men, which stood at the top, fell
over-board, one of which swam aboard directly, and was sav'd with ropes and
wooden bars, which were held him down. The other miss'd the Ship, but catch'd
hold of the tow, which tied our Boat to the Ship, and held it fast,
notwithstanding the Ship run very swift, till two Men stept into the Boat, and
took him up not without great difficulty: Neither of them seem'd to be hurt or
bruis'd outwardly, but one complain'd of great pains in his side, the other in
his breast. It was happy for us, that the rigging of the forenlast broke,
because otherwise it might have endanger'd the great mast too. We had no sooner
dropt anchor, and taken our sails in, when the Storm blew over; we lay by till
the next day mending our foremast. [013] On the first of June) the Wind turn'd to S.
S. W., S. AV. and S. we crowded all the sails we could, and to keep the Ship in
balance, hoisted both sprit sails.
Having got our foremast mended, and up
again, and the wind continuing favourable, we got pretty much forward in sight
of flat low Land, being the Coasts of Ligor, and made on the fourth of June
three large Islands in ten degrees of Northern Latitude, belonging to the
Kingdom of Ligor, the first, set down in the Maps Puli Cornam, in the morning,
the second Puli Sancorij, which
P2lg Sancort lies just under the tenth
degree of North Latitude, about Pulia Bordia. noon, and the third, Puli Bordia,
soon after. At night; we left them all a-stern, and were extreamly pleas'd with
~~. being now got within the Jurisdiction of Siam, for on the fifth of June we
made the Country of Kui, the Wind ;~~ continuing still favourable by S. W., S.
S. W. and S. Tbe $ Coasts are hereabouts very steep and rocky, and " I TYI
thought not unlike the Coasts of Sweden, with manyiS dangerous Shoals7 Rocks and
small Islands, partly:
inhabited, partly uninhabited, all along, which I was the more
surpriz'd at, as there is not the least hint of any such thing in our Maps, and
indeed I cannot forbear observing in general, that most Sea Maps are so ill
done, that I wonder misfortunes don't happen oftner, there being nothing in the
least to be depended upon their certalnty. Monproncena, a Merchant of Siam,
gave me some information about these Coasts, which he was well acquainted
withal. He was the late King's Factor and in the late revolution of Siam, of
which more in the following Chapter, made Prisoner by the French, who took from
him the goods he was entrusted with by the King, and some of his own, and set
him ashore at Paliakatta, where the Governor receiv'd him kindly, and sent him
with his family to Batavia. He nam'd the largest of the abovemention~~d Rocks
and small Islands Samajotll, and mention'd the following places from thence to
the mouth of the River Meinam. The several Rocks and Islands, which we saw on
our Larboard, in general he call'd Pran, or Pranj. Next, he said, follow'd
Czam, or Ce'am, then going further up, Putprib, then Isan, then Mayaklon, then
Satzyn, then the mouth of the Meinam, which in the Language of Siam is call'd
Pagnam Taufia.
On the sixth of June in the evening we
arrivid safely in the road of Siam, and having notified our arrival by a
dsscharge of five Guns, we cast anchor. The mouth of the Meinam bore directly
N. about three Leagues of.
On the Seventh of June, early in the
morning, I went on shore with Mr. Gudward and van Loohn. From the s anchoring
place to the mouth of the River there is a soft muddy clay at the bottom, where
all sorts of Ships may * safely ride. We took notice, as we went along, that
marks were put up in several places for such ships, as can rsail up the River
to avoid the shallows. We likewise smet several Fisherboats, and the Men busy
about fishing. At the mouth of the River we could scarce [014] discern the tops tof our Masts. Several Chinese and other yonks
lay there at anchor. The Mouth of the Meinam opens itself into the Sea, as it were, between two wings of low marshy Land, which is
nothing but mud gather'd together, and overflow'd in high water. Not far off we
saw some batteries planted with Cannons on both sides of the river, which were
rais'd in the late french troubles. About noon we arriv'd safely at the Dutch
habitation and storehouse call'd Amsterdam, near two Leagues distant from the
mouth of the River, and were civilly receiv'd by the Governor of that place one
Core, a Swede by birth.
On the Eighth of June in the morning I
tried to walk about a simpiing in the adjacent woods, but to very little
purpose. I had done the same the evening before with no better success, a great
part of the woods being at that time overflow'd, and that part, which is dry,
infested with Tygers, and other voracious beasts. Among the Ferns I observ'd
very many I had seen growing wild with us in Europe; I found also several sorts
of Cyperus grasses in marshy places, with a fine Alcea frutescens, and some
other plants, which I have describ'd elsewhere. An old Guide that pretended to
some skill in plants, assur'd me, that the Anacardium Tree is to be found
plentifully about Bankok. We sent our boat back again to fetch four Chests of
Silver from on board.
On the Ninth of June, We saiI'd up the
River in our own boat, and by the way diverted ourselves with shooting of
Monkey's which are seen frequently upon the Banks of the River climbing up the
Trees.
At Bankock we saw the new Fort, which was
rais'd by the French on the right bank, quite demolish'd. The banks above
Bankok are pretty well inhabited, and stock'd with houses and villages. I do
not mention here the names of particular places, because I have set them down
in a Map of this River, which I had the opportunity of making at this time in
going up, and which I corrected afterwards in several places as we fell down
again to return on board. On the tenth in the morning we came to a small Island
washed by two arms of the River where there are several temples and habitations
of the Talapoins. I went on Shore, and took
notice in one of the temples of three sitting, and a standing large Idols,
gilt, with Mandarin's Caps. About Forty smaller Idols kept them Company
standing at their feet. We cast anchor at night a few mlles from the Capital.
On the Eleventh of June We arriv'd, God be
prais'd, in good health at our factory, situated below Judia, a little before
nine in the morning, just as they were a going to perform Divine Service, it
being Sunday. In the aiternoon the Director of our Factory had notice given
him, to keep with his people within doors the next morning because his Majesty
intended to go abroad. When the King of Siam goes abroad, every body must keep
out of the way, as they do in Persia [015] when the King's Women go out. All the windows are shut, and not
the least noise to be heard. If one happens by chance to meet the King, or his
Wives, or the Princess Royal in the open fields, he must prostrate himself with
his face flat to the ground turning his back to the Company, till they are out
of sight.
On the Twelfth of June, at four in the
afternoon, the Berklam's or Chancellor's of Siam, who hath also the direction
of foreign affairs, his Mother was buried with great pomp and solemnity. The
Siamites call also their Nurses mothers, and those brothers and sisters, who
suck'd the same Breasts. This was only the Berklam's Nurse for his Mother died,
and was buried about Fifteen months before. The burials of Siamites of quality
are pompous and magnificent beyond expression. The Corpse is carried to the
burial place by water in a stately Prow, as they are here ca)l'd; which is
sometimes gilt all over, the Drums beating and the Music playing all the while.
The Corpse is either laid on the face in a coffin, or placed in an open chair
expose'd to the view of the Spectators, tho' often it smells intolerably, by
reason of the time and delay the preparations for their burial require. And yet
persons of quality esteem it one of their chief cares, assoon as they are taken
ill of a violent, or lingring sickness, to order the necessary preparations for
their funeral to be got ready betimes. The Coffin is a sort of an oblong-square
Chest, or box, not unlike the German Coffins, gilt, or cover'd with gilt paper.
It is plac'd under a stately herse with a cieling, which is likewise gilt and
curiosly adorn'd with fine columns and cornishes, supporting several arched,
bended roofs in proportion to the deceased's quality. At the side of the boat
which carries the dead corpse is row'd another of equal length, with a
beautiful gilt pyramid, built in form of a steeple. Before and behind are
several other prows, with high poles of Bambous in the middle, hung with eight
or ten gilt crowns made of paper. The annexed figures will give the Reader a
much better Idea, than could be expected from the most accurate description All
these several prows lie along the banks of the River till the tilneral is over.
After this manner the Corpse it brought to the burial place, accompanied by
Talapoins the Music playing all the while, and there burnt together with the
coffin. The remaining bones and ashes are gather'd together, and interr'd, and
a stately Pyramid erected over them, instead of a Monument, the height and
magnificence of which are again proportionable to the deceased's quality. The
place, where the Berklam's mother was interr'd, was seated between two branches
of the River opposite to the City, and enclos'd with a square row of Banners,
FIags and other Ornaments dispos'd in form of pallissado's. Upon the middle of
the place was erected a stately tower of an extraordinary height, curiously
adorn'd and supported with fine piSlars, columns and cornishes under this
tower, which had two gates opposite to one another, the corpse was Iaid in a
magnificent coffin [016] upon a pile of precious wood, to which the King put fire himself,
in honour to the Berklam, for whom he hath a peculiar esteem. At one side of
this Tower was erected a convenient building for the Talapoins, and the door
leading to it was cover'd with several gilt roofs.
Some Days after Mynheer van Hoorn, Director
of our Factory, with Mr. Daniel, and Mr. Moses BroccPhn-z~~
[023] two Persons well skill'd in the Siamish, Malayans and several other
Eastern Languages had a public audience of the Berklam, as Lord High Chancellor
and Director of foreign affairs, in order to deliver the Letters, and Presents,
we had brought over on board our Ship for his Majesty and him. The Captain of
our Ship, and I, were likewise admitted to it. The day of the audience between
seven and nine in the morning there came over to our Factoryb four Operas,- or
Mandarins of tlie second rank
[024] conduct us, of the number whereof were, Opera Tsijat, an Indostan,
now chief of the Moors, or Mahometans, and the King's Siabander, or Receiver of
the Customs for foreign goods, clad after the fashion of his Country, in a gown
embroider'd with gold, with a turbant upon his head, a Chinese Mandarin with
his Hairs tied up, otherwise clad as the Mandarins of Siam are, and two
Siamites, both Mandarins, one of which was about fourscore years of age. We
treated them and their retinues, with Brandy and Sweetmeats, but the Indostan
and one of the Siamites refus'd to drink. Their prows were very sumptuous and
pretty, particularly that which was sent to bring over the Letters for the King
and Berklam, on board which went the Interpreter alone. It was not unlike the
others as to its shape, but somewhat larger, and prow and stern higher'. The
Moor's prow had this particular, that all the watermen were clad- in shirts or
gowns of coarse linnen, with flat yellow and white Caps. His chair was lin'd
with green, yellow and white. On each side of it there was a bench for his
retinue. But the chair stood higher than the two benches, according to the
fashion of the Country, which requires that persons of guality should have
their seats plac'd higher than persons of an inferior rank. On each side of the
chair stood a Scimeter and Pike, gilt and adorn'd with precious Stones, as badges
of their authority which all the Mandarins cause to be carried after them upon
solemn occasions. These state Scimeters havc handles fix'd to them at least a
Man's length, so that one may cut and beat with them as with Scythes. The
chairs are compos'd of several pieces. Right upon the prow lies the first deck,
or layer, rais'd about a span above its borders, three or four paces long, and
as broad as the prow, neatly carv'd and adorn'd with beautifill Cornishes Upon
this first deck is plac'd another less in compass, but higher and adorn'd after
the same manner. Upon this second Deck stands the Mandarins four legg'd gilt
chair, and over it is extended a sort of Canopy, which is fix'd to the chair
with gilt Crampirons, almost round and withal
[025] so wide, that its Diameter [017] exceeds the breadth of the prow. It is made of Leather, lin'd
within with bIack, without either gilt all over, or red with gilt borders.
[026]
Every thing being ready, we went away to
the audience in the following order. First, Opera Sijot the Moor, then the
three other Mandarins, each in his prow. Next follow'd the prow, which carried
the Letters for the King and Berklam, which were writ in Malayan and Dutch, and
kept each in a Purse embroider'd with gold. The purses were laid in.a golden
bason, which was cover'd with an embroider'd cloth, and put into a box of
Pinang, adorn'd with pearls according to the custom of the Country. With these
Ornaments they were plac'd upon a stool right under the middle of the Canopy.
The Interpreter sate before them upon a Carpet. We follow'd next to the prow
with the King's Letters in a particular short prow sitting under a Canopy lin'd
with red. In this order we went up the River, coasting for some time the walls
of the City, and then turning in towards the Berklam's House, where he gives
publick audience, and appears with all his pomp and splendor. We went ashore on
this side of his House and walk'd the remaining part of our way thither. The
Court was dirty and nasty enough, but however in somewhat better a condition,
than that of his other House, where we had had a private audience of him some
Days before. Entring the Court we took notice to the left of an open House, or
Room, almost square, without walls, the floor of which was cover'd with boards
and full of people, some sitting, some walking and conversing together. A large
ELephant compleatly harnass'd stood in the Stable to the right. Opposite to the
entry was a stony staircase, leading to the Berklam's House, where we were to
have our audience. We went up the same and then pull'd oflF our Shoes. This
House hath but one sin le Room, or rather lofty Hall, like a Church. It is
whSte within and full of Dust and Cobwebs. Seven square pillars on each side,
supported the cielLing, which was rais'd under the third roof, and neatly
enough painted with red branch'd work. About the middle of each pillar hung a
large plate of chinese Copper. In the wall between the pillars were long openings with shutters instead of
[027] windows. There were two entries into the Hall, with a window between
them; Poles of Bambous were fix'd to the pillars on each side of the Hall hung
with white Cloth, behind which, between the pillars and the wall, were the
Berklam's servants and domesticks, without any order, some sitting, some lying
on the ground. Before sate the Mandarins, as Oja Tewejaata, a Mahometan, set
over the Querry of the King's Elephants, next to the Berklam on his right, Oja
Pipat, Deputy Berklam to his left, both with golden Boesets before them.
Boesets are cubical boxes made of Pinang, and marks of the King's favour, which
he presents his Mandarins with, when he gives them their names, and raises them
to that dignity, which is never done without having first ask'd advice of his
Astrologers. Below these [018] two
there sate several other Siamish, Chinese, and Mahometan Mandarins. I counted
twenty three to the Berklam's right, and one and twenty to his left. Seven of
the chief on each side sitting uppermost, had golden, and two others which sate
next them silver Boesets standing before them. The Letters, with the purses,
bason and other orna'ments, were plac'd before the Berklam about four or five
paces from him. We sate in the middle between the two rows of Mandarins, a
Pinang bason with Betel and Pinang minc'd, and Jasmin and other flowers laid
round the borders for ornaments sake, was set before each of us. The Berklam,
as representing the person of the King sate in a particular enclos'd apartment,
at the upper end of the Hall, behind an embroider'd Carpet laid over a pole of
Bambous and rais'd about two or three foot above the ground, shewing only the
upper part of his Body. Two gilt Umbrello's were plac'd before him, one at each
side. Behind him were two golden Daggers, laid upon as many cushions, and a state
Scimeter as above describ'd stood at each side. Two European pictures hung
behind him on the wall encompass'd with branch'd work, instead of frames, after
the Country fashion. Having all seated our selves, the BerkIam ask'd Mynheer
van Hoorn by the Interpreter, how the General of our
[028] East India Company did, how long he had been in the Indies, what
Troops we had now at Batavia and at Bantam, which of the two was the better
Country, as also who we, the Captain and I were ? These and some other questions
being severally answer'd, the purses containing the Letters were open'd, and
the Letters having pass'd through the hands of several of the Mandarins then
present, read aloud. The Interpreter not understanding some of the Malayan
expressions, Mr. Moses and Daniel were desir'd to help him out. The audience
having lasted about three quarters of an hour, we were conducted by the
Berklam's Son, who till then had been behind his Father, through his other
House to our prows, and from thence to dinner, which stood prepar'd for us.
Nothing else remarkable happen'd during our
stay at Siam, except, that towards the latter end of this month an order from
the King was made publick, forbidding his Subjects to wash themselves in the
River. I saw afterwards several Siamites washing themselves in their boats
with River-water, it being impossible for this Nation to live without Water.
The reason of this order was, because several people had been bit of late by a
venomous water Snake, or Lizard, and died a few hours after. I was told that
these Snakes do not exceed a finger in length, and a Leech in bigness, that
they are cheker'd with brown and blue, and that they infest the River but once
in eight or ten years. To oblige the people to a strict compliance with this order,
it was order'd at the same time, that the Relations or Heirs of every Person
that should die of the bite of this venomous Creature, should pay a fine of
fifteen Thails. [019]
[030]
Chap. ll. The present State of the Court of Siam, with a description of Juthia, the Capital City and Place of the King's Residence.
THe Kingdom of Siam is the most powerful,
and its Court the most magnificent among all the black Nations of Asia. The
present Tsiaufa, or Sovereign, is Petraatia, who upon the Death of his Predecessor
Pro Narees Naray e pintsiau seiz'd the Scepter by cruelly extirpating all
those, which had a better right to the Succession. He' had the greater power to
effect this, as he was Captain General in the late King's life-time, who
besides had ~entrusted him with the chief administration of the Kingdom during
his long sickness, which at last, tho' he was not without hopes of recovery,
prov'd incurable. The discovery of a Conspiracy form'd by a Minister of State,
w whose name was Constantin Faulcon, against the next; heirs to the Crown, and
their friends, furnish'd him with fair opportunity of compassing his ends. I
will in a few words relate the History of this Conspirator, and the 0
particulars of the Conspiracy it self. 0 Faulcon, (or as he sign'd himself,
Phaulkon,) was a Grecian by birth, a Man of a great understandingj of an -:agreeable aspect, and an eloquent Tongue, notwithstandinS : he was
brought up to no Iearning, and had pass'd hls younger years mostly at Sea among
different nations, particularly the English, whose Languages he had learnt.
Being in the service of the latter in quality of Cockslvain, he came to Siam,
and obtain'd an employment at Court. His natural parts, ready apprehension and
good success in affairs entrusted with him, which were first of small ~;
consequence, but by degrees of more moment, rais'd him; 0 in the space of nine
years to the highest credit and; [31]
authority. For he was put at the head of
the Finances of the Kingdom, and had also the direction of the King's Household:
Almost all publick affairs of the most important concern were determin'd by his
advice, and whoever had any thing to sollicit, was obliS'd to apply to -him.
The better to secure himself in thls authority he thought it necessary to
support it by some foreign power, of which he judg'd the French Nation to be the most cproper for seconding his designs, which even seem'd to f aim at the
Royal dignity. In order to this he made his Sovereign believe, that by the
assistance of the said nation he might polish his subjects, and put his
dominions into a flourishing condition: [020] Accordingly an Embassy was sent from Siam to France, which
occasion'd two in return from thence to Siam. Jesuits, Artists and military
officers were invited from thence. General des Fargues being arriv'd with some
hundred Soldiers was by him put in possession of the Fortress of Bankok, the
Key of the Kingdom situated on the great River Meinam six Leagues from the d . Harbour. The
French Soldiers together with other troops rais d in the Country were there put
in Garrison, and the place made stronger by new fortifications. These
preparations being made, he enter'd into measures with the French General, and
some Mandarins, or officers of the Crown, whom he confided in. Monpi Totso, the
King's Son in Iaw, and by him adopted, a dependant of his and the French, was
to be placed on the throne, assoon as the sick King should be dead, whose
encreasing dropsy threatned him with a sudden dissolution. Petraatia and bis
Sons, the King's two brothers, as presumptive heirs - to the Crown, and whoever
else was like to oppose the 4 iConsplrator's deslgns, were to be dispatch'd out
of the Ni + way. Pursuant to this Scheme Monpi's Father, and ; rclahons, had
already rais'd fourteen thousand Men, who
.i lay dispers'd through the Country and
the better to Sicilitate the execution of this design, Faulcon persuaded tbe
sick King, having found means to introduce himself uto his apartment in
private, that it would be very much 3l
for the Security of his person during the
ill state of his health, to send for the French General, and part of his
Garrison, up to Livo, where the King then was, being a City fifteen Leagues
North of Judia, and the usual place of the King's residence, where he used to
spend most part of his time. General des Fargues being on his way thither, the
Conspiracy was discover'd by Petraatia's own Son, who happening
to be with two of the King's Con cubines in an apartment adjoyning to that
where the Conspirators were, had the curiosity to listen at the door, and
having heard the bloody resolution they had taken, immediateby repair'd to his
Father to tell him of it. Petraatia without loss of time acquainted the King
with this Conspiracy, and then sent for Monpi, Faulcon and the Mandarines of
their party, as also for the Captain of the
Guards to Court, and caused the Criminals forthwith to be put in Irons
notwithstanding the King express'd the greatest displeasure, at his so doing.
Faulcon had for some time absented himself from Court, but now being summon'd
he could no longer excuse himself, though dreading some ill event, 'tis said,
he took his leave from his famlly in a very melancholy manner. Soon after his
Silver Chair, wherein he was usually carried, came back empty, a bad omen to
his friends and domesticks, who could not but prepare themselves to partake in
their master's misfortune. This happened the nineteenth of May in the year
t689. Two days after Petraatia orderad against the King's will Monpi's head to
be struck off, throwing it at Faulcon's feet, then loaded with Irons, with this
reproach, See there is your King. The unfortunate [021] sick King heartily sorry for the untimely end of his dearest
Monpi, earnestly desired, that the deceased's body might not be exposed to any
further shame, but decently buried, which was accordingly complied with.
Monpi's Father was seiz'd by a Stratagem upon his estate between Judia and
Livo, and all their adherents were dispers'd. Faukon, after having been
tortursd and starv'd for fourteen days, and thereby almost reduc'd to a
skeleton, had at last his Irons taken off, and was carried away after Sunset,
in an ordinary chair, unknowing what would be his fate. He was first carried to
his House, which he found rifled: His Wife lay prisoner in the Stable, who far
from taking leave of him spit in his face, and would not so much as suffer him
to kiss his only remaining Son of four years of age another Son being lately
dead and still unburied. From thence he was carried out of Town to the place of
execution, where notwithstanding all his reluctancy he had his head cut off:
His Body was divided into two parts and cover'd with a little earth, which the
Dogs scratch'd away in the night time, and devoured the Corpse to the Bones.
Before he died, he took his Seal, two silver Crosses, a relick set in gold,
which he wore on his breast, being a present from the Pope, as also the order
of St. Michael which was sent him by the King of France, and deliver'd them to
a Mandarin, who stood by, desiring him to give them to his little Son. Presents
indeed, that could be of no great use to the poor Child, who to this day with
his Mother goes begging from door to door, nobody daring to intercede for them.
General des Fargues being in the mean time arriv'd at Livo with a few men, could
not but be
extreamly surpriz'd at this unexpected turn of affairs: j He was indeed
to all appearance well receiv'd, and in the Kinfs name presented, as usual,
with a Golden Boeset or Pinang's box: but before he was permitted to return to
i\0 Bankok, he was obliged to promise to deliver up this !.'s place to the
Siamites, and to leave his two Sons, and j twelve of his Countrymen, as
Hostages at Livo. The General upon his return thither, being enrag'd at this 0
disappointment, acted quite contrary to his promises, clapt the watermen, which
brought him down, in prison, fired ; at the Siamites from the Fortress, and
discharg'd his Guns at their Ships that pass'd by, on which occasion two of his
Garrison, who were natives, appearing not guite so ready as he would have them,
he caused them to be hang'd on : the ramparts in sight of their Countrymen, and
committed 0: all sorts of Hostilities imaginable. This conduct was like s.l 33
c
to provoke the Siamites to act a bloody
Tragedy with himif and his Sons, accordingly they had already begun to
raise<a forts on the banks of the River to cut off his retreat byg water.
But his Fire soon abated, upon which, and hisP laying all the blame of his
conduct upon his people, who would not obey commands, the Dutch Residenv9
persuaded the Court, that it would be more for their7 Honour to take revenge of
him by generously [022] overlookingfl and slighting his bravadoes. This representation had
thei effect, that soon after he obtain'd leave to depart with hisj people. I
cannot forbear mentioning an odd accident which happen'd on this occasion. The
abovesaid Fourteen;; Hostages having endeavour'd to make their escape from Livo
were overtaken again, and carried back on Horse back; Their Guards
according to the custom of tht Country put ropes about every one's necks, which
ceremony put one of the Frenchmen, an Engineer by
hisy profession,
into such a fright, that he fell stone dead to; the Ground. There were still
tsro of the King's Ships out at Sea, with Frenchmen on board, sent to cruise
upon Pirates, and their return was expected much about that time. These the
Siamites endeavour'd to get into their power
before the Captains could have notice of the rupture; between the two nations.
Their attempts succeeded to expectation, for they attack'd the Sloop, which the
French ;? General sent down in the night, to acquaint the Captains with what
had happen'd, just as falling down the River she came out of reach of the
Cannons of the fortress, and after a desperate fight took and burnt her. All
the othe r Trenchmen, who then were in Siam, either in the Servicc of the
Country or otherwise, pay'd very dear for the treasonable practices of Faulcon,
and the ill conduct o f their General by suffering a long and tedious
imprison~~ > ment. Monsieur Louis, the Metropolitan Bishop, who: had liv'd in the
Country for several years, had his nc~~ Cgltody.built palace out of the Town
plunder'd, and was himself in Custody into the Court of the Royal Magazines;
together with the other Jesuits his Collegues, who I thi~~
34
were seven or eight in number. I visited
them there, living chearfully in little Houses built of Bambous and Reed. M.
Louis is a Gentleman of profound learning, and throughly versed in the Religion
of Siam, and the Language of their holy books and priests: As he is also a very pious
man, he had by his Christian doctrine and exemplary Life gained so much upon
the Hearts of ;~~lis Keepers, as another Paul, that they venerated him as a
holy Minister of God Almighty. Three other Jesuits, who had setled at Livo,
near the Temple of Wathniak prani Waan, on pretence of learning the Siamian
Pali, or Language of their Holy Books from the Priests, with whom they had also
conform'd in shaving their head, in their habit, and in their way of living,
disappear'd of a sudden, nor was it ever known what was become of them. During
these Troubles, the Dutch were assur'd by order of Petraatia of his favour and
protection. Orders also were sent down to Bankock to let their ships and boats
pass by unmolested.
Petraatia afterwards seiz'd the King's two
Brothers, on pretence of being in Faulcon's Interest, and caus'd them ~~wo to be carried out
of the City of Livo to a neighbouring Temple, where they were beaten to
death with Clubs made of Sandal-wood, the tespect for the Royal blood
forbidding the shedding of it. And so the King to his great grief liv'd to see
his own Brothers die the same death, to which he on the ninth [023] of
October 656. had put his Uncle Pracitama Ratia, who had succeeded his Fathetj
and was then in the third month of his reign, when his Nephew took posession of
the Throne. What added still to the King's mortification was, that he had
always look'd upon Petraatia, as his most intimate friend, who was his Sisterxs
Son, whose Sisters and Daughters were the Kingxs Wives, and who besides having
on all occasions express'd an abhorrence for the burthen of a Crown had never
given the King room to suspect him of so cruel a design. Under this Grief he
died two days after, being the eleventh Of July or according to the Soncarad
(which is the
3s
Epocha of Siam) 2a3z, in the fifty ffth of
his age, and the thirty second of his peaceable reign..;this manner Petraatia
got possession of the Administration with the Title of King of Siam, Tanassari,
Sucketa 0
and Poiseluke, as also of Protector of
Cambodia, Jehoor, Pattany and Queda. By virtue
of the ancient Laws of Siam upon the demisei of the King, the Crown devolves on his
Brother, and upon the Brother's death, or if there be none, on the eldest on. But
this rule hath been so often broken through, and the right of Succession
brought into such a confusion, that at s present upon the death of the King he
puts up for the~~ Crown, who is the most powerful in the Royal Family, and
so it seldom happens, that the next and lawful Heir:> ascends the Throne, or
is able to maintain the peaceable possession of it.
This uncertaints of Succession even
sometimes gives an opportunity to Strangers, who have no pretensions at all - '
i X to aspire to the Throne, two late Instances of which I will " briefly relate. A
Prince of the family of the Kings of, a t Maccassar,
having some years ago fled for protection ts s
Siam with many of his Countrymen, settled
near the Q i Camp of the Malagans which the Kinz of Siam had assign'd to this
latter Nation for their Habitation. (Itsl i must be observ'd here that the
several spots of ground,>ir on which the Malagans, Chinese, Japanese,
Portuguezc, Dutch and other Nations live at Siam, and which are more
particularly express'd in the annex'd Plan of the KindsX
Residence, are call'd Camps.) The said
Prince form'd 1; 2 design with the assistance of those Malagans, who proCcss
the Mahometan Religion as well as he, to seize on the Capital City and to
possess himself of the Throne. Buı t t his design being discover'd before
it could take effect, t}ac Prince was summon'd to Court to submit and beg
pardav. which he refusing according to the innate obstinacs of those of
Maccassar, he was cut to pieces with all i Countrymen except his Son of eight
years aste, af~~ a bloody fight, in which they made a brave defenct ud kill'd a
great number of the Siamites. The Malagans, who had assisted him, having
submitted in time, escapJd thi s severe punishment, and were pardo n' d and res
tored the King being of a merciful temper. This happen'd in the year 1687 in
the late King's Life time. [024]
In the year 1689 a Priest of Pegu, who had
been formerly in Custody at Juthia, and was acquainted with the affairs of that
Court, made the like attempt. He went @@ about the Country, giving out that he
was the eldest of the late King's brothers (who were kill'd by order of Petraatia) and
consequently was the next Heir to the Crown. This Story found so much credit,
that in a short time he brought over to his Interest about Ten thousand men,
being for the greater part an undisciplined rabble. Having had notice, that the
Prince Royal was to go to a certain place for his diversion attended by his
Court, he went ; thither, and hid himself in the wood, in order to murder the
whole Company, afterwards to surprize the City, and to make away with the King
and all his Servants. But he was disappointed in his Scheme, for the Prince
perceiving so many people, and suspecting some ill design, lef; them his plate
for a prey and fled back to Court. The King having with great speed gather'd an
army of Twelve thousand Men, sent them to meet the undisciplined multitude, as
they were marching towards the City. This unexpected opposition put them under
such a consternation, that they immediately dispers'd and fled with so great a
precipitation, that not above one hundred of them were kill'd, and but three
hundred taken prisoners, whose escape the Victors prevented by burning the
Soles of their feet. Some days after the Priest was found out himself lying a
sleep under a Tree in the Wood, and having only a Boy with him. He was
forthwith carried to Juthia, and being fetter'd with his neck and breast
against a post, expos'd for a publick spectacle for some days; afterwards his
belly was cut open he being alive, and his Intestines 7 given to the Dogs to
tear and devour. The King's Court consists of the following great 037
Officers of the Crown. Peja Surusak
call'd also Peja Wani-a and Faiwani, to whom the King hath committed the Crown
affairs, as for instance the direction of the Criminal Courts and
Confiscations, as being the most odious part of the Regal power. It is
commonly thought the King by laying this trust upon him designs to render him
obnoxious to the People, but others pretend it was rather done to secure the
succession to him. Peja prah' klam, (Foreigners pronounce it Berklam) is High
Chancellor, and hath the direction of foreign affairs. lIe is a more comely
Person, and of better aspect, than I ever met with amongst this black race of mankind who
are generally short siz'd and look almost like Monkeys. He is also of a quick
understanding a/ nd lively action, for which reason he was a few years ago sent
Ambassador to France, of which Country, its Govern ment, Fortresses and
the like, he would often entertain us in his discourses; and the hall of his
House, where we had a private audience of him, was hung with the
pictures of the Royal Family of France, and European Maps, the rest of his furniture
being nothing but Dust and Cobwebs. 3. Pejawam, otherwise call'd Tnau Peja
Taramasa, is [025] great (Chamberlain, and hath the Inspection of the King's
palaces and their apartments. 4. Peja Jummeraad, a learned Chinese, is Chief
Justice. 5. Peja Polethep, Receiver general, hath the administration of the Gown
Lands and their Revenue. 6. Peja Tsakru, great master of the Stables, hath the
Inspection - over the Elephants and Horses, and all that relates to the King's
Train and Equipages. 7. Peja Klahom, Steward of the Household, hath the
command of the King's Servants, pleasure yachts, and the Royal furniture. These
are the chief Mandarins, or officers of State, who make up the great Council of the Kingdom. Mandarin is properly a Chineze word us'd only among foreigners, and is in the Language of the Country express'd by Tsiankrue, or Tsiant Tsiam. Next to them are the State and Court officers of an inferiour rank, and an uncertain number, for instance: Peja Tareman, the chief of
the Malagans; Opera Tsijat, the chief of the Moors, as they are call'd, or
Mahometans: He is also Siabander, or Receiver of the customs for foreign
merchandize. Oja Pipat, under or Deputy Berklam, was formerly a domestick of
Faulcon, of whom he learnt the skill of pinching Strangers; Oja Tewijata,
Querry of the Elephants, is a Mahometan from Indostan, a Man of worth. Oja
Tamam Captain of the Guards. Oja De Tsiu, Captain of the Land forces. The
Siamites have no hereditary family names, but receive their denomination from
the fancy of others, particularly their Superiors. Great Men are call'd after
their employments, and such are the names above related. Court Titles and
Dignities go in this order. I. Peja and Oja is as much as a Prince. 2. Opera,
who are about forty in number both at Court, and in the Country, are like Lords
or Barons. 3. Oluang, or Luang are their Noblemen or Gentry. This Title the
King bestows also on his Interpreters or Truchemans. 4. Okucen, are persons
descended of great famiIies. 5. Omucen, Inferior oicers of distinction. 6.
Majalacks, Pages and young Gentlemen.
The Kingdom of Siam is by the Natives
called Muan Thai, which is as much as to say, the Land Thai. In their books it is
sounded with this Epithet, Krom Thep Pramma haa Ikoon, (Circuitus visitationis
Deorum) the Circuit of the Visitations of the Gods. The Malagans and Peguans
call it Tziam, from whence comes the European name Siam. Its Northern Latitude
about the middle of it, or where the Capital City is situated, is fourteen
degrees eighteen minutes, and its Longitude according to the common Maps 138,
but according to the late Observations of the Jesuits 120 degrees. Eastward it
borders upon the Kingdoms Tunkin, Cosynsina and Cambodia; on the South it is
limited by the Sea, and the Countries of Malacca, of which the King of Siam
possesses Ligoor, Tanasseri, and some other small Provinces. On the West is the
Kingdom of Pegu, and on the North that of Laos. Considering its extent it is but indiferently peopled being best inhabited only along the
banks of the Rivers. The great quantity of Deer and [026] Buffalo-skins, that are yearly exported by Sea are a proof of vast
Woods and Wildernesses, the rather because those Animals are killed only in the
neighbourhood, Tygers and Morasses hindering the hunting of them far into the
forests. This Kingdom contains twelve large provinces, each of which govern'd
by an Oja, or Prince, as the King's Lieutenant, who hath several Opera's, or
subaltern Officers under him. Besides there is an Oja at Court for every
Provinces who manages its Concerns, and keeps a watchful Eye over the
commanding Lieutenant's conduct. The late King had added a thirteenth Province
to the aforesaid twelve, which he conquer'd from the Kingdom of Laos, and in
all probability he would have conquer'd more, if the swelling of a large River
had not put a stop to his progress. But a few years after that Province was
taken from him again, so that all the benefit of an expedition undertaken in so
remote a Country, and with so much expence, was only the creating a Jealousy
between the two Nations, which ruinxd the former trade between them, and
remov'd it to Cambodia.
Since I have mention'd Laos, it will not be improper to ; communicate to
the Reader what account I had of this Kingdom, which is otherwise but little
known, because of its being an Inland Country, and remote from the Sea Laos is
situated under the same Northern Climate with Tunquin, and is a large and powerful
Kingdom separate from the neighbouring States by Forests and Desarts. It lies a month's Journey North of Judia. It is very inconvenient and
troublesome travelling thither by Land, on account of the high mountains, and
on the River, by reason of the rocks and Catarracts, so that the Vessels, or
Prows , as they call them, are built in such a manner, that they; can be taken
to pieces, and carried over the eminences in i: order to pursue the Journey by
water. It is a fruitfill; Country. The Soil is a fat clay, which in summer
grows so hard and firm, that the Inhabitants use to thresh the Rice upon it, in
order to separate it from the husks, for which in other places they make use of
a wooden Trough. It produces Rice of the best kind in abundance, and furnishes
Cambodia with the best Benzoin and Gumm Lacc, though both these commodities
grow also in that Country. It likewise yields the most valuable Musk, some
Gold, and some precious Stones, chiefly Rubies, besides Pearls, which the
Siamites call Muk, which is the more to be admired, since I could not hear,
that there was any Salt Sea in the Country. Their Religion agrees with that of
Siam, nor do they much diflfer in their Language and writing, except only that
the Inhabitants of Laos cannot pronounce the Letters L. and R. They write upon
leaves like the Peguans and Malabarians, and as the Sianutes write their
religious Books; but civil affairs are writ upon a sort of course paper with
earthen pinns. They boast that the Siamites have learnt the art of writing and
the Language of their holy Books from them. They resemble the Chinese in their
shape and mien, but are more t awny and slender, and [027] consequently of a much handsomer appearance than the Siamites.
They have long Earlaps like the Peguans, and the Inhabitants of the
Sea-coast,the Men without any ornament, but the Women, as long as they remain
unmarried, with pieces of gold in them. The Men cause their Legs to be painted from
the ancle up to the knee with flowers and branches, like the Braspintados of
the Siamites, as a mark of their Religion and Manhood. An arm of the River
Ganges runs through the Country, which falls into the River of Cambodia, and
renders it navigable, so that the Inhabitants of Cambodia go thither every
Year in their Prows, or vessels in order to trade with t he Inhabitants. The
two chief Cities are Landjam and Tsiamaja. The whole Country is said to have
been formerly tributary to the King of Siam.
But not to expatiate beyound our subject,
we will return to Juthia, or Judia, the Capital City and place of residence of the
King of Siam, which in some descriptions of Travels ' is wrongly call India,
perhaps by a mistake in print. This City in ancient times stood at the place,
which is now call'd Bankok, on the West bank of the great River Menam, from
whence it was afterwards remov'd to the place, on which it now stands, being a
low Island form'd by the said River. This Island, with the City upon it, is of
the shape of the sole of a man's foot, with the heel turning westward, and hath
about two German Miles in circumference. It is situate in a Country all flat,
as far as the Eye can reach, on a low ground, which is cut through by many
Canals coming from the River, and by them divided into so many Isles and
squares, that one cannot go far without the help of Boats. It is surrounded
with a Brick wall, which on the South and North is four fathoms and a half
high, clean, well condition'd and adorn'd with Battlements, but the rest of it
is lower, neglected and decay'd. This wall is open in many places, where there
are small gates towards the River. On the inside there are ramparts rais'd
against it at diferent distances for placing Cannons upon them. At the lower
end of the City appears a large bastion advancing into the water, besides
several small ones. The first is furnish'd with Cannons against the Ships
coming up. To fence the Citywall against the wasteing of the current, a narrow
bank, or key is left, which is built upon in many places. Divers great Canils
go out of the River quite through the City some from East to West, others from
North to South, and abundance of smaller Canals being derived from the great
ones, Ships may come from the River up into the Town, and put on shore near the
principal Houses and Palaces. The Streets run in a streight line along the
Canals; Some of them are tolerably large, but the greater part very narrow, and
all, generally speaking, foul and dirty: Some also are overGow'd at high water.
Considering the bigness of the City, it is not very populous, and in some parts
but thinly inhabited, particularly on the West side on account of its remoteness,
and towards the [028] South by reason of the morassy ground, over which people make shift to get upon planks, or paltry bridges. This makes that in those parts there are
abundance of empt)spaces and large gardens behindL the streets, wherein they
let nature work, so that they are full of grass, Herbs, Shrubs and Trees, that
grow wild. The first Street upon entring the City is that which' runs Westward
along the turning of the Wall: it hath the best Houses, amongst which are
those, that formerly belonged to the English, Dutch, and French, as also that
in whlch Faulcon resided. The middle Street, which runs North towards the
Court, is best inhabited, and full of shops of Tradesmen, Artificers, and
Handicraftmen. In both these Streets are seen above one hundred Houses
belonging to the Chinese, Hindostanians and Moors, as they call them. They are
all built alike of Stone, very small, being but eight paces in length, four in
breadth and of two Stories, yet not abpvc two Fathoms and a half high. They are
cover'd with flat tiles, and have large doors without any proportion. The rest
of the Streets are less inhabited, and the Houses ot' ordinary Inhabitants are
but mean and poor cottages, built of Bambous (which is a hollow reed, two or
three Spans thick) and boards, and carelesly cover'd with Gabbé Gabbé,
Branches and leaves of Palm Trees growing wild in Morassy places. The
Mandarins or Ministers of State and Courtiers live in separate palaces, with
Courtyards to them, which are very dirty. The Buildings in generd, though
rais'd with Lime and Stone are but indifferent, and the apartments neither
clean, nor well furnish'd. The booth, or Shops of the town are low, and very
ordinary, however they stand in good order, and in a streight line, as
the Streets are. The many Canals occasion a great number of bridges. Those
which are laid over the great Canal are of Stone, with Ballisters of the same, but
as there are no Waggons, nor Carts in this
place, they we t narrow; in the middle they are high and eighty paces long;
but the Bridges over the by Canals are of no Architecture, and for the
greatest part of wood. (Fig. 7=See. Tab.II.)
There are three Royal palaces in this City.
Tbe'1,' first is the new palace built by the late King on the Northside towards the middle of the Town. (Fig. 8 =See. Tab.III Fig. I.) It consists
of a large square, with several subdivisions, and many buildings, which
according to the Chinese Architecture are
adorn'd with many Roofs, and Frontispieces part of which are gilt over. Within
the walls of the Palace as well as without, are to be seen long Stables, in
which some hundred of Elephants stand in a long row magnificently harnass'd.
Since the French troubles, as they are here call'd, there is but one entry left
to go into the palace, through which no person is admitted but on foot, though
it is so dirty, that people sometimes step in the mud up to the calf of their
Legs, if they do not keep an exact ballance in walking over the small planks,
that are laid for them; even an ordinary Mandarin dare not enter but attended
only with one servant. For this same reason no ships [029] or
boats are allow'd to come upon the great river, as far as it runs by the walls
of the palace. The gates, and other avenues of the palace are crowded with
swarms of naked fellows, whose tawny skin is painted with black checquered
figures, pointed in the manner, as they do with the Images at the holy
sepulchre at Jerusalem; some of them are thus mark'd only on the arms, but
others all over the body to the loyns, which are wrapt up in a cloth according
to the general custom of the Natives. They are call'd by a Portu gueze word
Braspintades. These are the King's Guards, Door-keepers, and watermen, who wear
instead of arms short thick clubs, roving and sauntering about the palace like idle
Vagrants.
Palace of the Prince Royal
The second palace, call'd the foremost palace, is situated in the North East
part of the City towards its extremity. It is of a square figure, but not near
so large as the first. It was the ancient place of Residence of the former
King's, but at present, in 1690, it is inhabited by the Prince Royal, who is
twenty years o f age. The third and last Palace is smaller than any of the two,
and situated in the West and least inhabited part of the City. In this lives at
present a Prince of the Roya1 Blood, and it is call'd the Palace of the (Querry of the King's Elephants, the said Prince being the Conductor and Manager of the
Elephant, which carries the King. The Prince doth not ride upon the Elephants
neck as usual, but lies upon its Crupper behind the King, from whence he hath a way
of governing the beast by certain signs, to which it is used.
After the Palaces I shall take notice of
the Temples and Schools of this City. They are in great number, for as
the
whole Country is stock'd with Priests and Monks, this City in particular
abounds in all parts with Temples, the Courts of which keep a regular
proportion with the Streets, and are full of pyramids and columns of divers
shapes and gilt over. They do not equal our churches in bigness, but far exceed
them in outward beauty, by reason of the many bended roofs, gilt frontispieces,
advanced steps, columns, pilIars, and other ornaments Within they are adorn'd
with many images as big as the life and bigger, skilfully formed of a mixture
of pIaister rosin, oyI and hair, the outside of which is first varnish' over
with black then giIt. They are placed in several rows on an eminence, on which
the Altar stands. In some temples also along the walIs in single rows, sitting
with their legs cross'd and naked, except the waste, about which is tied a dark
yelIow cIoth; over the left shouIder down to the navel hangs another piece of
cloth of the same colour twisted cIose together. Their earlaps are cut through
with a slit, and are so Iong, that they reach the shouIders.Their hair iS
curl'd, tied over the crown in two knots, so that it cannot be distinguish'd
whether it is a cap, or some such ornament. The right hand rests upon the right
knee and the left Iies in the lap. The chief place, which is in the middle, is for
an Idol of a size far above human, sittinz in the same posture under a Canopy. It
represents their chief Teacher, and the Founder [030] of
their Religion. The Siamites call him Prah, the Saint, or Prah Pudi Dsiau, the
aint of high descent, or with a particular name, Sammona Khodum, which the
Peguans pronounce Sammona Khutama, a Man without passions. The Japanese
and Chinese call him Siaka, or Saka, the Ceylonese Budhum and Budha. This Prah, or Khodum is represented in a monstrous size in some Temples. In a Peguan
Temple out of the City, call'd in the Peguan
Language Tsianpnun Tsiun, there sits on an eminence such an Idol strongln
gilt, the proportion of which is such, that it would be of 120 foot in length,
if standing, and we shall hereafter meet with another Siaka, or Idol, at Miaco,
the Capital of Japan, and Residence of its Ecclesiastical Hereditary Emperor,
which is not inferior to this at Judia, either in size, or beauty. The posture
of the said Idol is the same with that, in which Budha, and his disciples
placed themselves, when they were enthusiastically meditating upon religious
Subjects. Even to this day the priests hls followers are obliged by their rules
to sit down daily at stated times in the posture of their Master, when they arc
exercising their devotions of meditation and Enthuslasm. They also go about in
the same dress, only with their heads shav'd, covering their face against the
Sun with aw Fan made of palm wood, and leaves.
Next to the Temples are the habitations of the Monks which are but
poor Houses. On one side of them thev have a publick hall, or oratory, call'd
Prahkdi, which commonly is a pretty large timber building much like tl.le
Temples, the edges of the roof gilt, with a few steps leading up to it, and
furnish'd with many Timbersheds instead of windows to give passage to the air,
during their publick assemblies, or lectures. The cieling within is suported by
two rows of columns, and the room divided into divers classes, and benches. In
the midst of it, some steps above the floor, stands a desk, or pulpit,
curiously carv'd and gilt, like those in our churches, on which at certain
hours appears an old priest, who firom large palm leaves ingrav'd with black
Characters, reads with a slow and distinct voice some holy words to his
audience, con sisting chiefly in students of their divinity, or young monks.
Upon the hearing of certain words, and names the audience clap their hands
together above their forehead, but upon the main shew little attention, and
devotion; for I my self saw some cutting Pinang, others grinding powders, or
mixing Mercury with the Juice of Herbs, or employing their Hands with some other pastime. Near the Desk, or in
some other place is to be seen the Idol of Amida standing upright on the flower
Tarate, or Faba Aegyptiaca, or Nymphza magna incarnata, whom they believe to be
the Intercessor of departed Souls. Round about the hall are hung up flowers and
crowns, cut of paper banners, and other gilded ornaments, suspended of Bambou
reeds, which they use to carry in filneral processions.
During their assemblies I have commonly
observ'd a machine [031] standing before the Desk or Pulpit, awkwardly join'd together of
Bambous in the form of a table, and hung with yellow pieces of doth, which
the priests make ' use of for their dress, or rather covering their waste.
There were flowers stuck about it for ornament's sake, and several dishes
plac'd on it fill'd with Rice, Pinang, Pisang, dried Fishes, Lemons,
Mangostanges, and other fruits of the Trees of the Country,which were
offerings and presents made to the Convent. It happen'd once, when I was
going into one of them, that on the steps I met such a machine, when they
were carrying it home, the assembly being finish'd, either the throng of the
people, or the h carelessness of the bearers, were the occasion of their breaking it to pieces, so that the Dishes with the eatables, .; and all the
lrumpery together, fell upon the ground, which made me speedily get out of
the way, for Fear the Mob might fall upon me as the cause of all the
mischief.
Round the City lie many Suburbs and
Villages, some of which consist of inhabited Ships, or Vessels, rather than
Houses, containing two, three, or more Families each; they remove them from time
to time, and float them particuIarly when the waters are high, where Fairs
are kept, to sell their Goods there and get their Livelyhood by it. N
(Figs. 9, 10) I I .=See. Tab. III. Fig. 4,5,6) The Houses in the common Villages, that , stand upon firm
Ground, are generally built of Bambous, reed, planks, and other ordinary
stulT; some of the Houses in the Viliages along the banks of the river
stand on pales !fl1 a fathom high, that the waters, which overflow the
Country for some months, may freely pass under the Houses. Each Housei is furnish'd with stairs, or a Ladder, to come down in dry weather and with a boat, to go about it at
high water. (Fig. 12.=See. Tab. III. Fig. 7) Other villages stand on higher and dry ground, and consequently not being subject to those Inundations their Houses
want neither such stairs nor boats. On those eminences also stand Temples,
Convents, burying Places, where they bury their dead, and Yards where they burn
their bones and ashes, and erect costly Pyramids over them. On the South-side,
at a small distance down the River, the Dutch have their Fwactory and Magazines very
splendidly and conveniently built on dry ground. Lower down on the same bank are
other villages inhabited by Colonies of Japonese, (the best Soldiers of former
Kings) Peguans and Malaccans. On the opposite side of the
River stands a village inhabited by a Portuguese race begot on black Women, and
filrther down stands a Church, dedicated to St. Domingo, to which belong the
Fathers of the Dominican Order. Behind it stands another small Church, which is
kept by two Fathers of the Order of St. Austin, who with the foresaid three
Dominicans live peaceably [032]
[044] makes that in those parts there are abundance of empty spaces and
large gardens behindL the streets, wherein they let nature work, so that they
are full of grass, Herbs, Shrubs and Trees, that grow wild. The first Street
upon entring the City is that which' runs Westward along the turning of the
Wall: it hath the best Houses, amongst which are those, that formerly belonged
to the English, Dutch, and French, as also that in whlch Faulcon resided. The
middle Street, which runs North towards the Court, is best inhabited, and full
of shops of Tradesmen, Artificers, and Handicraftmen. In both these Streets are
seen above one hundred Houses belonging to the Chinese, Hindostanians and
Moors, as they call them. They are all built alike of Stone, very small, being
but eight paces in length, four in breadth and of two Stories, yet not abpvc
two Fathoms and a half high. They are cover'd with flat tiles, and have large
doors without any proportion. The rest of the Streets are less inhabited, and
the Houses ot' ordinary Inhabitants are but mean and poor cottages, built of
Bambous (which is a hollow reed, two or three Spans vjlN thick) and boards, and
carelesly cover'd with GabbE ' Gabbe, Branches and leaves of Palm Trees growing
wild "' in Morassy places. The Mandarins or Ministers of State and
Courtiers live in separate palaces, with Courtyards to them, which are
very dirty. The Buildings in generd,'!$'@ though rais'd with Lime and Stone are
but indlSerent,fg and the apartments neither clean, nor well furnish'd. The 1
booth, or Shops of the town are low, and very ordinary, ''i however they stand
in good order, and in a streight line, '' as the Streets are. The many Canals
occasion a great number of bridges. Those which are laid over the great
Canal are of Stone, with Ballisters of the same, but as there are no Waggons, nor Carts in this place, they we re narrow; in the
middle they are high and eighty paces long; but the Bridges over the by Canals
are of no great Architecture, and for the greatest part of wood. (Fig. 7.)
There are three Royal palaces in this City.
Tbe'1,' first is the new palace built by the late King oe
[045] the Northside towards the middle of the Town. (Fig. 8 ) It consists
of a large square, with several subdlvisions, and many buildings, which
according to the plan of the royal palace of Siam, wherein A is the late Kings
palace, together with the hall of audience. B, The old royal palace. C, The
dining hall. Several temples. t c e, etc. Several centry-boxes about and within
the enclosure of the palace walls. J; The house where they keep the King's
plate, with the royal ornaments, and the furniture of the royal palace. g, The
Kings wardrobe. h, Stables for the elephants. ii, Two houses where the Mandarin5
meet to consult about the affairs of the Kingdom. k, The apartment of the
King's physicians. A, The Secretary's office. m, The royal armory. n n, Two
ponds for the horses and elephants. o, The royal treasury. P, A large place for
running of races. Q, The Seraglio, or apartment of the women. R, The court of
the white elephant. S, Gardens. These points show what way the French
ambassadors were conducted to audience.
[046] the Chinese Architecture are adorn'd with many Roofs, and
Frontispieces part of which are gilt over. Within the walls of the Palace as
well as without, are to be seen long Stables, in which some hundred of
Elephants stand in a long row magnificently harnass'd. Since the French
troubles, as they are here call'd, there is but one entry left to go into the
palace, through which no person is admitted but on foot, though it is so dirty,
that people sometimes step in the mud up to the calf of their Legs, if they do
not keep an exact ballance in walking over the small planks, that are laid for
them; even an ordinary Mandarin dare not enter but attended only with one
servant. For this same reason no ships or boats are allow'd to come upon the
great river, as far as it runs by the walls of the palace. The gates, and other
avenues of the palace are crowded with swarms of naked fellows, whose tawny
skin is painted with black checquered figures, pointed in the manner, as they
do with the Images at the holy sepulchre at Jerusalem; some of them are thus
mark'd only on the arms, but others all over the body to the loyns, which are
wrapt up in a cloth according to the general custom of the Natives. They are
call'd by a Portu gueze word Braspintades. These are the King's Guards,
Door-keepers, and watermen, who wear instead of arms short thick clubs, roving
and sauntering about the palace like idle Vagrants. The second palace, call'd the foremost palace, is
situated in the North East part of the City towards its extremity. It is of a
square figure, but not near so large as the first. It was the ancient place of
Residence of the former King's, but at present, in 1690, it is inhabited by the
Prince Royal, who is twenty years o f age. The third and last Palace is smaller
than any of the two, and situated in the West and least inhabited part of the
City. In this lives at present a Prince of the Ro~~-a1 Blood, and it is
call'd the Palace of the (Querry of the King's Elephants, the said Prince
being the Conductor and Manager of the Elephant, which carries the King. The Prince doth not
ride upon the Elephants neck as usu3I,
[047] but lies upon its Crupper behind the King, from whence he hath a way
of governing the beast by certain signs, to which it is used.
After the Palaces I shall take notice of
the Temples and Te8Zpgel Schools of this City. They are in great number, for as
the
whole Country is stock'd with Priests and Monks, this City in particular
abounds in all parts with Temples, the Courts of which keep a regular
proportion with the Streets, and are full of pyramids and columns of divers
shapes and gilt over. They do not equal our churches in bigness, but far exceed
them in outward beauty, by reason of the many bended roofs, gilt frontispieces,
advanced steps, columns, pilIars, and other ornaments Within they are adorn'd
with many images as big as the life and bigger, skilfully formed of a mixture
of pIaister rosin, oyI and hair, the outside of which is first varnish' over
with black then giIt. They are placed in several rows on an eminence, on which
the Altar stands. In some temples also along the walIs in single rows, sitting
with their legs cross'd and naked, except the waste, about which iS tied a dark
yelIow cIoth; over the left shouIder down to the navel hangs another piece of
cloth of the same colour twisted cIose together. Their earlaps are cut through
with a slit, and are so Iong, that they reach the shouIders. Their hair iS curl'd,
tied over the crown in two knots, so that it cannot be distinguish'd whether it
is a cap, or some such ornament. The right hand rests upon the right knee and
the left Iies in the lap. The chief place, which is in the middle, is
for an Idol of a size far above human, sittinz in the same posture under a Canopy. It
represents their c ie eacher, and the Founder of their Religion. The Siamites
call him Prah, the Saint, or Prah Pudi Dsiau, the aint of high descent, or with
a particular name, Sammona Khodum, which the Peguans pronounce Sammona Khutama,
a l\~~lan without passions.' The Japanese and Chinese call him Siaka, or Saka,
the Ceylonese Budhum and Budha. Thls Prah, or Khodum is represented in a
monstrous size sn some Temples. In a Peguan Temple
together in a House built of Reed. Not far
from hence, on the same plain, stands a Jesuit Church nam'd St. Paul, after the
chief Church at Goa, belonging to the Fathers of this Order, who through all
Asia are better pleas'd to be call'd Paulins from that Church than Jesuits.
South West of the City, opposite to that side of [032] the
River, where it lets out the branch Klang Nam Ja the Metropolitan Bishop Mr.
Louis had caus'd a stone Palace to be built, together with a fine Church, which
is now lock'd up since his Imprisonment. The Roman Catholick Ecclesiasticks in
Siam have assur'd me, that there live above three thousand six hundred
Christians in the neighbourhood of Judia, who are past seven years of age, and
have been admitted to the Sacrament.
Pyramid@Pkah Thon. See Tab. IV.
I cannot forbear taking notice
in a few words of two TJ2ots. remarkable curiosities near Judia. The first is
the famous Pyramid Pkah Thon or Puka' thon, which stands on a,, plain one
League North West of the City. It was built by the Siamites in remembrance of a
great victory obtaind in that place over the King of Pegu, whom they kill'd,
and defeated his numerous Army, thereby freeing them- selves of the subjection
they were under to the Peguans, and restoring their ancient Liberty. It is a
bulky, but magnificent structure, forty odd fathoms high, standing ina square
taken in with a low neat walL It consists of two structures which are built one
upon the other. The lowermost structure is square, each side being one hundred
and fifteen paces long, and rises to the height of twelvc fathoms and upwards.
Three corners jet out some few paces on each side, which are continu'd up
to the top, and altering its square figure make it appear, as it were,
multangular. It consists of four Stories, built one upon the other, the
uppermost of which growing narrower leaves at the top of that below it an empty
space, or walk to to iiiM round. Every Story hath its Cornishes curiously
diversify'd, and all the walks, the lowermost only excepted, are taken in
with low neat walls adorn'd in each corner with fine columns. The middlemost
corner of each Story represents the frontispiece of the
Building. lt exceeds the others in beauty and ornaments, especially in a
magnificent gable it ends into. The Stair-case is in the middle of it, which
leads up to the upper area on which is built the second structure, and consists
of seventy four steps, each nine Inches high, and four paces long. The second
structure is built on the upper surface of the first, which is square, each
side being thirty six paces long.. It stands out in the middle for ornament's
sake, and is taken in like the rest, with a low neat wall. It hath a walk five
paces broad to go about the second structure. The Staitcase ends into this
walk, each side of its entry being adorn'd with columns. The basis, or pedestal
of the second structure is octangular, consisting of eight sides of dierent
length, those facing South, East, West and North, being eLeven, but the North
East, South East, South West, and North West sides, each twelve paces long. It
hath its Cornishes much after the manner of the lowermost structure to the
height of some fathoms. It then becomes not unlike a Steeple, on whose top
stand several short columns at some distances from each other, the spaces
between being left empty. These columns support a pile of globes, which run up
tapering, their [033] diameters decreasing in proportion to the height. The whole ends
into a very long Spire, and withal so sharp, that it is very surprizing, how it
could hold out for so considerable a space of time against all the Injuries of
wind and weather. (Fig. 13 .) Next to this Pyramid are some Temples and
Colleges of the Talapoin3, which are taken in with particular neat brick walls.
The Temples are of a very curious Structure, cover'd with several roofs,
supported by columns. As to the whole, I must refer the Reader to the annex'd
figures, which will give him a much better Idea) than could be expected of the
most accurate description.
Berklam's
The other remarkable Curiosity is
a double square P7ramidl. joining together, and situate not far from the City
towards the East; each square contains several Temples, Convents, Chapels, Columns, Pyramids and other
Buildings of diferent forms. They are separated by a Canal, and are each
enclos'd with a fine wall. To avoid entring into tedious particulars, I have
given the Plan of those'Squares, together with some of the chief buildings, at
Iarge. (Figs. I4-23.) In the first Square occurs the Temple of Berklam, as it
is call'd, mark'd with Lit. A. from which the whole place hath taken its name,
and is become particularly Samous. Its Structure in general is exquisitely fine, but particuIarly the Gate at the great Entry is a piece of
admirable workmanship compos'd of carven Images and branched work, or foliage.
The Architecture resembles that of the TempIe near Pka'thon, the above describ'd famous Pyramid, both which are represented in Figs. I 5, I 6. The middle of the Temple is for ornament's sake
cover'd with four roofs, that are bent, and lie one over another. The lowermost
of those roofs jets out on each side of the Temple like a wing which is sum ported by
eight columns. The inside is like all other Temples pretty dark, there being no
windows, so that all the light can come in only through the door and some holes
in the wall. The Porch is rais'd above the ground, and cover'd with several
roofs, which are supported b) eight Columns with gilt Capitals standing in two rolvs.
The outer row of Columns is join'd together by a red Lettice or Grate, before
the frontispiece of the Temple, to preserve the precious doors in it. There are
three folding pair of doors in this frontispiece, each pair consisting of two
valves, which are very nicely and skilfillly carv'd into three Layers of
branches twisted together, and adorn'd with leaves and flowers, among which
appear several small Images of their Idols of diSerent forms and postures, some
of them having four arms and hands holding divers Weapons and Instruments, the
whole well proportion'd and adorn'd with gold and different colours. Next to
the Temple stands a small open house mark'd with 8 Lit. a, in the midst of
which hangs a bell gilt over; of two yards diameter, which they strlke with a
hammer in the mornings and evenings to call the Monks to their prayers and
devotions which they perform singing in choirs with a trembling voice, as the
Monks in Europe sing Psalms. (Fig. 17.) [034]
Lit. B. is another temple like the former,
only without so many ornaments. The porch of it consists of two open rooms
adorn'd with Plaister-work and gilt smalLl Idols. The Floor was cover'd with
heaps of large palm-leaves, being the remains of their Pali, or religious
Books, which when they grow old and worn out, are here laid aside in this
manner, as in a sacred place. In viewing these Temples I took notice, as of
something particular, that I met with no images of beasts, and Idols of a
monstrous figure, as the Brahmines and Chinese have in theirs, for all their
idols within the Temples are represented in human shape, either sitting, or
standing, tho' without them, as for instance on the gates, entries, pyramids,
particularly in these two squares, we are now speaking of, appear as by way of ornament
many monstrous images, with hideous frightful faces.
Lit. C. is a Pyramid in the form of a
steepIe, gilt over from the top to half its height, and standing on a pedestal
rais'd above the ground, and taken in with a square walk. The uppermost point is
surrounded with a Crown of larze extent turn'd upside down, on which hang small
gilt BelSs or Cymbals, which being mov'd by the wind give a sound.
Lit. D, is a small wooden House, in which
is kept a very heavy Sedan, painted with divers colours.
Lit. E is a vaulted Chapel with a buIky
Idol like that of Bacchus, call'd by the Brahmans Viccaswara. It is much beyond
the ordinary size of a man, strongly gilt all over turning with his Face
smiling towards the Temple last mention'd. Under and above it and on the sides
stood several other smaller Idols, as is represented in Fi . I4 Before it were
rails, on which appear'd the marks o: wax Candles, that had been burnt there.
Lit. F. is another building vaulted and
Iike the former Within on the middle of the wall was engraven a Figure partly
colour'd and partly gilt, in some measure resemblLing a foot with four Toes,
three Spans long, and one and a half broad, which they hold as something very
sacred. (See Fig. I4.) Under it were plac'd divers small Idols.
The Pyramids standing in those Squares are built in honour of certain Gods, to whom they are
dedicated alI(i named after them. They are commonly provided with shelves on
which the Devotees place their offerings for the benefit of the priests.
In the other Square (See Fig. I4) within
its walls were rang'd Flower-pots and Boxes for plants. There stood Topoo
Trtel. also within it several Topoo Trees, in the East Indies call'd Rawasith, and Bipel. This is a sort
of a Millc afl; Fig Tree, of the size of a beach, with extended branchi X a
smooth grey bark, and round but long pointed leaS bearing a round fruit, which
is insipid, and nounshmcu y only .for Bats. All the Pagans of these parts hold
it to bc holy, and pleasing to the (:ods, for as much as their great Saint
Sammana Khodum always [035] chose to sit under it, ad for this reason they love to plant it
near their templcS if the Soil and Climate will allow it. The like holin
iıı Remarkabk ascrib'd to another Milk or Fig Tree, whose brii
FigTree- bending towards the ground take root in it, aftcr ~ touch it, and form
as many new Stems by which meg extends it self far round about: It hath leaves
not unlike those of the Lauro-Cerasus, but larger and
bears a fruit like the other, which bats love to eat. The Ceylonese call it
also Budhum Gas, that is Budhum's Tree. But it is difficult to plant and not
proper to stand near the temples by reason of its spreading so far. This second
square contain'd two remarkable Temples, the first of which represented on each
door in the porch two Savages with heads of Devils, (See Fig. I4) and at the
back door were painted two Portugueze as big as the Life. A great festival is
yearly celebrated in this Temple. There stood besides in this second square
some other Chapels with Idols in them, as also divers fine pyramids, some of
which are gilt over, and others full of monstrous figures. It would be too
tedious to describe each of them in particular, and I think it sufficient to
have given the figures of the most remarkable ones in Figs. 17-23.
Before I leave this Subject, I
must take notice of a Tree of a strange nature,
which one meets with going out of the City towards these two squares, over the
Dyke made not long ago for shutting up the Southern arm'of the great River. It
is of the size of an Apple tree, has narrow leaves, and long spreading
branches, at the extremities and smallest Twigs of which hang BirdZs nests,
ingeniously twisted together of dry grass and other stufF in the form of a
Purse with a long and narrow neck. The openings of these Nests look to the
North-west, so that no South wind, nor rain can come in. I told upwards of
fifty of them only on this tree, and never met with the like on any other. The
Birds were of a dark yellowish colour, not unlike Canary Birds, and chirping
almost like Sparrows, of which otherwise there is a great plenty in this
Country. Another extraordinary thing in this Tree is, that the trunk and larger
branches of it are filll of crabbed excrescencies, or warts of dilTerent
figures, which the Inhabitants make use of as a Medicine against certain
distempers.
Religion of the Siamites.
The Religion of these
People is the Pagan Doctrine of the Brahmans, which ever since many
Centuries hath been profess'd amongst all the Nations from the
River Indus to the extremity of the East, except that at the Court of the Grand
Mogul, and in his great Cities, as also in Summatra, Java, Celebes, and other neighbouring
Islandls the Mahometism has gain'd so much ground, that it seems to prevail
above it. This general Paganism, (which is to be distinguish'd from the
Religion of the old Persians worshlpping the Sun, now almost extinct) tho'
branch'd out into several Sects and Opinions,
according to the various Customs, Languages and Interpretations, yet is of one
and the same [036] Orlgine. The Siamites represent the first Teacher of their
Paganism in their Temples, in the figure of a Negro sitting, of a prodigious
size, his hair curl'd, the skin black, but as it were out of respect gilt over,
accompanied on each side by one of his chief Comtpanions, as also before and
round about him by the rest ofhis Apostles and Disciples, all of the same
colour and most in the same posture. They believe according to the >
Brahmans, that the Deity dwelt in him, which he prov'd - by his Doctrine, Way
of Life, and Revelation. For Wistnu, by which they mean the Deity, having
already many hundred thousands of years before assum'd diferent fiorms, and
visited the World eight different times, appear'd the ninth in the person of
tEis Negro, whom for this reason they stile Prahpuditsau, that is to say, the
Saint of high descent; Sammana Khutama, the Man without Passions: Prah bin
Tsjau, the Saint who is the Lord; or plainly Prah, the Saint, or Budha' (or
Phutha} in one syllable, according to their guttural pronunciation, like that
of the Hottentots). TEe Ceylanese call him Siaka. Budhum, the Chinese and
Japanese Sacka, or Siaka, or plainly Fotoge, that is, the Idol, and with an
honourable Epithet Si Tsun, the great Saint.
Where born.
About his origine and native
Country, I find the account of those Heathens do not agree. The Siamites call
the Country of his nativity Lanca, which is the Island r of Ceylon, from whence
they say, their Religion s .9 first brought over to them, and afterwards
further propagated through the neighbouring Countries as far as China and
Japan. Accordingly there are still to be so ij some foot steps of their
Religion, as well of that thich il; they exercis'd before, as of the other
sprung up in the. room of it, on the top of a high mountain in the Islmd;' of
Ceylon, by the Europeans call'd Pico d'Adam, which they look upon as
holy, and in their Maps place it in the Centre of the World. The Ceylonese
themselves alI!the Country of his nativity Macca desia, meaning by t~ the
Kingdom of Siam, for they make use of the Pali,, ai' Bible of the Siamites,
which the Peguans caLl M tapasa, in their Khom, or Language of the Khom<-:
owning that they had it from the Siamites. The ChiDati X and Japanese pretend
that this Saint, and the Doctrine i reveal'd, had their origine in the Country
of Mate;Lt, w as the Japanese call it, Tensik Magatta Kokf, that is dl
Heavenlandish Magatta, which according to their de tion and opinion is the
Continent of India, including Pegu and Siam, adding withal, that Siaka was
the Son of.~ King of those Countries, the Inhabitants of which to each other
the origin of their Teacher, a Prophet, as it seems, being always the greater for being of a foreign Country. The Benjans and learned Brahmans believe that Budha hat neither Father nor Mother, and consequently own, they knwo nothing of his birth and native Country. They represent him in the figure af a birth and native Country. They represent him in the figure of a man with four arms, and as for the rest have no other Legends concerning his miracles and actions, besides a tradition of his adorabIe [037] piety having now for 26430 years been sitting on a Tarate flower,
and praising the supreme God ever since 21639 years (reckoning from the present
1690 year of Christ,) when he first appear'd and reveal'd himself to the
world. But the Siamites, and other Nations lying further East, have whole Books
full of the birth, Life and miracles of this God Prah, or Siaka ];am at a loss
how to reconcile these various and opposite pcounts, which I have gather'd in
the abovesaid Countes, unless by supposlng, what I really think to be the true opinion, viz. that the Siamites and otner 1o allons lying more
Easterly have confounded a younger Teacher with Budha' and mistaken the former
for the latter, which confusion of the Gods and their names is very frequent in
the Histories of the Greeks and Egyptians; so that Prah or Siaka, is not the
same with Budha, much less with Ram, or Rama, as he is call'd by Father Kircher
in his Sins Illustrata, the latter having appear'd many hundred thousand years
before, but that he was some new Impostor who set up but about five hundred
years before Christ's nativity. Besides this, many circumstances make it Q
probable, that the Prah, or Siaka, was no Asiatick, or Indian, but some
Egyptian Priest of note, probably of Memphis, and a Moor, who with his Brethren
being expell'd their native Country, brought the Egyptian Religion into the
Indies, and propagated it there, and this for the following Reasons. I. There
appears in several material Points a conformity between this Eastern, and the
Ancient Egyptian Paganism; for the Egyptians represented their Gods, as ese
Heathens now do, in the form of diferent sorts Of i; t Animals and human
Monsters; whereas their Neighbour5 't" in Asia, as for example, the
Persians, Chaldeans, and other t: Nations professing the same Religion,
worship'd rather c:j;X Luminaries of the Heavens, particularly the Sun, and the
Fire, as being its Image; and it is probable, that before, the introduction
of the present Paganism among the Indians, they had the same sort of
worship with the> neighbouring Chaldeans and Persians. For as it cannot; be
suppos'd, that these sensible Nations liv'd without any Religion at all, like
the brutal Hottentots, it is ig!au probable, that they rever'd the divine
Omnipotencc by. worshiping, according to the Custom of the Chaldans, the Sun,
and other Luminaries of the Firmament, as sudi. parts of the Creation, which
most strike the outrd senses, and fill the understanding with the
admiration of their unconceivable proprieties. And there are still to this
day among those Heathens some remains of the Chaldeam Religion, consisting in a worship paid to the Sun and the Stars,
which however is not taught by their Priests, but only tolerated like some
supererogatory worship, just as remain even in Christian Governments, certain
antient pagan customs and superstitions, especially the Bachanals. Two Articles
in the Egyptian Reli ion, which were most religiousIy maintain'd, were, the
lSransmigra tion of Souls, [038] and
a Veneration for Cows, particularly for the holy Cow at Memphis, call'd Apis,
or Serapis, which had divine honours paid her, and was serv'd by Priests. Both
these Articles are still observ'd among the Asiatick Heathens, particularly
those that inhabit the West-side of the Ganges; for no body there dares to kill
the least and most noxlous Insects, as being animated by some trans migrated
human Soul; and the Cows, whose Souls they think are by frequent
transmigrations, as it were, deified are serv'd and attended with great
veneration, their Dung being burnt to ashes is turn'd into holy Salve, their
Urine serves for holy Water, the Image of a Cow possesses a peculiar Chapel
before their Temples, is every day honour'd .j with fresh flowers, and hath
sweet-scented oyl poured ,4t upon her. It is also remarkable, that the nearer
those Heathens are to Egypt, the greater Zeal appears among them with relation
to these two Articles, and the more remote they are from it, the more-they
abate in it, so that t; in Siam and the more Eastern Kingdoms, even the Priests
themselves make no scruple of eating Cows Flesh, pro vided they have not given
occasion, nor consented to | their killing; nor doth the opinion of the transmigration
' of the Souis prevail there so much, as it does among the ,1 BenJans in
Hindostan, for the Inhabitants of the East-side of the Ganges grant no quarters
to Fleas or Flies, that {t;; attack their Skin. I shall barely mention, that
among these Asiatick Heathens we meet not only with the greater >. Deltles
of the Egyptians, but also with the lesser, tho' - they are disguisee by other
names, and fabulous circumstances, which however might be easily clear'd up and
reconcil'd.
2. It is observable, that twenty three
Centuries ago, or according to the most exact computation in the five hundred
and thirty sixth year before Christ's nativitv, Cambyses, the Persian Tyrant,
subverted the Religion of the Egyptians, kill'd their Apis, or holy Cow, the
Palladium of their Worship, and murder'd, or exil'd their Priests. Now if one
considers that the Siamites, reckon ing their Soncarad, or Ecclesiastical
Epocha from the death of their great Saint, their 2233-4th year falls in with
our present 16goth year after Christ's nativity, it will appear, that the said
Epocha agreed with that time, and that it may be concluded from thence, that
then a notable Priest of Memphis, to whom they gave the name of Budha, Siaka,
or the great Saint, fled with his Brethren into India, where he publish'd his
Doctrine, which was so well receiv'd, that it spread to the extremity of the
Orient.
3. This Saint being represented with curled
Hairs, like a Negro, there is room to conclude, that he was no native of India,
but was born under the hot Climate of Africa, considering that the Air in India
produces on its blLC.k Inhabitants none of that curl'd Wool, but long and black
Hair, quite lank, and very little curl'd: And tho' the Siamites crop theirs, so
as to leave it only of the length of a Finger; yet as it stands on end like
bristles, it is easily distinguish'd from the woolly [039] Curls of a Negro, and conseguently it is more probable, that Budha
was of African, than of Siamite extraction.
The Siamites in general are a plain and good
natured of Siam. people. Their Ecclesiasticks lead a sedate and austere life;
for they aim at a state of perfection in this World, acceptable to Heaven and
attended with eternal rewards, by subduing their passions, and mortifying their
desires, pursuant to the doctrine and example of their great Master. They never
marry, as long as they continue in an Ecclesiastical state, but live together
in Convents near the Temples. They go almost naked, having only a cloth, or
apron, of a dark yellow colour tied about their waste, and another piece of
cloth hanging down from the left shoulder in narrow pleats, which in bad rainy weather they open and
spread over their shoulders, and the upper part of the body. Their heads are
never cover'd but are shav'd close; in their hands they carry a Fan made of
Palmleaves, or shavings of wood. There are diferent ranks and degrees among
them. (I) The youngest call themselves Dsiaunces, or Friars and students of
divinity, who after having attain'd the twentieth year of their age, and
undergone a rigorous Examen, are advanced to the dignity of Dsiaukus, or
Fathers, on which occasion there is a great entertainment given. The Peguans
call them Talapoi, which name becoming first known to foreigners, they now
bestow it indifferently on all the Priests and Ecclesiasticks of the Symbolic
Religion in Pegu, Siam, Cambodia, Aracau, Parma, Laos, Tunkin, and Cochintsina.
(2) Dsiauku are the common Priests or Fathers, who live together in Societies
inhabiting one, or more, buildings like Convents near certain Temples. Each
such Convent is governed by (3) a Prior, whom they call Luangwad that is to
say, the Head of the Temple, or Sompan, the Noble. A11 the Convents in each
province depend on one (4) Prahkhru, like a Bishop, or Metropolitan. These
again as well as all the rest of the Clergy in the Kingdom are under the (5)
Prah Sankara, as it were the Primate and High Priest. He lives in the Capital,
and the King's residence Judia, and his authority is such, that even the King
himself is obliged to bow to him. These Ecclesiasticks are not of a particular
race, like the Brahmans, but every body, who hath a mind for it, and can obtain
it, may turn Monk, and even married men may leave their Wives, and go to live
in the Convent. The Ecclesiasticks as such, and as long as they continue in
orders, cannot be punish'd by the secular arm for any oSence whatsoever. For
this reason they are first degraded, andL stript of their Ecclesiastical habit,
before they are deliver'd up to Justice However out of respect to the Character
they bore, they are treated with much less Severity, than secular persons. And
even sometimes for capital crimes the King will only banish them to an uninhabited Island, call'd Coccatsian, where he
also confines his Mandarines and Ministers of state, if they fall in disgrace.
There are also Nuns among [040] them, whom they call Nanktsij, or Bagins, who wear such pieces of
cloth like the Monks, but of a white colour instead of yellow. These Nuns in
former times liv'd among the Priests near the Temples, but it having happen'd
at a place a league above Judia, where the religious of both sexes liv'd
promiscuously together in the same village, that several of the Nuns prov'd
with Child, they have since been remov'd from the Temples to particular Houses,
the better to keep their Vow of Chastity. The Temple of that Place still bears
the Name of Wad Nantsij, or the Temple of Nuns.
The Siamites begin their Soncarad, or
Epocha, from the death of their great God Sammona Khutama, otherwise call'd
Prah, and Budha'. In the year 1690, when I~was in Siam, they told 2234. They
have like the Chinese a Cyclus of sixty years, tho' there be but twelve years
that bear particular Names, which being five times repeated make up the whole
Cyclus. For the satisfaction of the curious Reader, I will insert the Names of
the twelve Years, as also the Names of their Months, and of the Days of the
Week, as they were communicated to me in the Country. The Years are, s
I Pije Tsoelat, The Mouse-year.
2. Pije Tsaloe, or Tslu, or Tsialou, The
Cow-year.
3. Pije Kaen, The Tyger-year.
4. Pije To, or Tao, The Hare's-year.
5. Pije Marong, or Maroni, The Year of the
great Serpent.
6. Pije Maceng, or Maseeng, The Year of the
stnall Serpent.
7. Pije Mamia, The Horse-year. :
8. Pije Mame, or Mamij, The Ram's-year.
9. Pije Wock, or Wook, or Woak, The
Monkey's year.
10. Pije-erka, The Chicken's-year 1690.
11. PiJe Tso, or Tsjoo, or Tgio, The
Dog-year.
12. PiJe koen, The Swine-year.
It appears by this List of the twelve
Years, that Pije signifies a Year in general. The Year is divided into twelve
lMonths, which are Lunar, of twenty nine, and thirty Days, alternatively. Every
third Year they tell thirteen Months, one of the twelve being repeated twice.
The general name of the Month is Duan, to which word is added the number, as
they follow one another, for the names of particular Months as for instance,
I)suan Aey, the first Month, Dsuan Gie, or Dzi, the second Month, and so on,
Saem, for the third, Sie, for the fourth, Ha, for the fifth Hook? for the
sixth, Tset, or Tsiet for the seventh, Pet, or PelJt, for the eighth, which is
told twice every third Year, Cau, or Knau for the ninth, Sieb, or Sib, for the
tenth, Siebeet, for the eleventh, and Sieb Song for the twelfth. The first
Month is of nine and twenty Days, the second of thirty, the third again of
twenty nine, and so they go [041] on
alternatively, so that the whole year is of 354 days, and every third year of
384. They tell the days of the month from the new-moon to the full moon
fifiteen days, then they begin again at one, and so go on to the next new-moon.
This is the reason, why some of their months are of thirty, others of twenty
nine days. Their week consists of seven days, which put in paralIel with ours are as follows.
Sunday, is by
them call'd, Wan Alit, the I)ay of the Sun
.
Monday@@@@@@@@@@@ Wan Tsan, the Day of the Moon.
Tuesday@@@@@@@@@@@ Wan Angkaen, theDayofworking
Wednesday@@@@@@@@@ Wan Poeth, the Day of meeting
Thursday@@@@@@@@@@ Wan Prahat, the Hand day.
Friday@@@@@@@@@@@@ Wan Sock, the day of rest.
Saturday@@@@@@@@@@@ Wan
Sauw, the attracting day, or day of attraction, because it attracts a new week.
The Siamites celebrate the first and fifteenth day of . every month,
being the days of the new and full moon. Some also go to the Pagods every first
day of the quarter, which in some measure answers to our Sunday. They have
besides several yearly solemn festivals, as for instance, one at the beginning
of the year, call'd Sonkraen, another call'd Kitimbac, or Ktimbac, that is to
say, the procession by Land, on which, as I have been inform'd, the King goes
to make his offering at a famous Temple at Napathat, in a Siamish Coach, drawn
by men; another call'd Ktinam when the King attended with a magnificent train
goes by water to make his devotions and offerings at a stately temple call'd
Banihin, situated belLow Judia, and according to the opinion of the common
people to cut the waters, which about the time of this solemnity are highest,
alld to . command them to withdraw. Two others of the yearly festivals of the
Siamites are known by the name of Sahut sioian, which is as much as to say, the
festival of the washing of the Elephants, the Heads of these animais being on
these two days wash'd with great Ceremonies.The beginning of the festival days
in general is byoche Siamites call'd Kaupasa, and the end thereof Oppasa.
It remains that I should say something of
the current money of the Kingdom of Siam. Tsiani, by foreigners w call'd Katti,
is understood of Silver, being two pound and a a half, or twenty Thails, or
fifty Rixdollars, that is, double the value of a Katti, as it is current at
Batavia and in Japan. The Thail is by the Siamites call'd Tamluni - though
there are none coin'd in the Kingdom. It is worth four Tikals. A Tikal by the
Siamites call'd Baat is worth four Maas, or thirty Dutch Stievers. Every Maas,
or as the Siamites call it Slini, or Sling, hath two Fuangs. Every Fuang, (the
Siamites pronounce it Phuani, or Pujang? hath two Siampais. A Siampai, or
Sapai, hath two Pulninis. A [042] Pynini contains an uncertain number of Bijas, by us call'd Cowers,
being a small white, or yellowish Shell of the Concht Veneris kind, which I
have describ'd in its proper place. The Cowers difer very much in value; One may buy for a Phuang from 500 to 800. They are imported
in great quantities from the Maldive Islands. All the Silver money of Siam is
coin'd of D utch Crowns, which are for this purpose coin'd in Holland, and
imported by the D utch East India Company at seven shillings the Crown.
[73]
Chap. lll. The Author's departure from Judia, down the River Meitlam
to the harbour, and from thence to Japan.
ON the fourth of July 1690 towards Evening,
I went with the Captain of the Ship and others of the Company in a boat, in order to fall
down the River Meinam to the Ship, which lay at anchor two days Journey from
hence, and four Leagues from the mouth of the River. Having made two Leagues we
arriv'd at the famous temple BanihiJn, by Foreigners caU'd the Golden Pagod.
Every BanihiCn a year, when the water is highest, the King goes thither with
Pagod great pomp and a numerous attendance to perform his devotion, and to make
his oSerings to the Priests. The common people call this Solemnity Ktinam, that
is to say, the Cutting of the water, from an erroneous tradition they have,
that the King on that occasion cuts the Water with a knife in order to make it
fall. It may be, that this custom obtain'd in ancient times, but at present
there is nothing extraordinary in this Ceremony, besides the magnitlcence of
the procession, which is made by water.
On the fifth of July we proceeded but
slowly by reason of the contrary wind, which gave me frequent opportunitles of
going on shore and gathering simples r found there.
On the sixth of July we arriv'd at Bankok
in the Bankok morning, having advanced but little all night, by reason of the
difficulties we had to struggle with. We found the old Fort, which lies on an Island, in good condition; but the new
Fort, that had been built by the French on the East shore, was quite
demolish'd. lSefore evening we reach'd the Dutch Habitation and Store-house
called Amsterdam, which is but two Leagues distant from the Sea. It is
built according to the fashion of the
Countrey on piles of Bambous. Stores of Deer and Buffle skins, were kept in
lofts, but tlle red Wood for dying, call'd Faang, or as the Japonese name it
Tsiampan, lies in an open place, till Ships come to take it in, which happens
every year, and the greater part of it is [043] carried to Japan. It comes from the Land of Coy, or Kui, belonging
to the fq King of Siam, and some also from Bambilisoi, situate on the Coasts of
Cambodia, and from Bimen, as the Dutch + X call it, which lies between Bali and
Timor. This ~rood rubb'd with some lime and water yields the finest violet
colour, one could wish to see. This mixture is said to 0 cure some eruptions on
the skin. The Governor of this; place was a Corporal, a Swede by Birth, and
Core lDy namcb I found him under some grief, for having lost a tame Sun ~' Cat,
which he found again to day, but in the belly of a; snake he had kill'd, and
which, as he complain'd had robb'd X him before of many of his Hens, having
l~een alwa~st lurking in Corners, under the Houses. We had 3n , accident with
another sort of a thief, who at night had G under the House, where seven of us
Fellow TravellersEy together. He had laid hold of the Corner of a wastecoat,
hanging through a crevice of the Floor, which was made of split Bamboous, and
was pulling it through with such a force, that one of us awaked, who suspecting
a thief seiz'd it, and called to his sleeping Companions for help. While ] they
were thus pulling and hawling, who should havc it, Core, who from former
experience immediately suspectod;^: Tyger, fired a Gun, and frightened him
away.
MeNam, or Meinam in the Siamite Language signiScs
Mother of humidities, which name hath been
given to is River by reason of the abundance of its water, which renders the
whole Country fruitful. For it is the only River in it, very deep, rapid, fuH of water, and broader than the
Elbe; but below Judia, down to the Sea, it divides it self into several
branches. The account, which the Natives give of its source, differs from what
is represented in our maps; for they say, that it takes its rise like the Ganges
of Bengale in the high mountains of Imaas, where it spreads it self into
several arms, which run through Cambodia, Siam, and Pegu into the Sea; and they
pretend, that these arms are again joyn'd by several smaller branches, not only
with each other, but also with the Ganges it self, if they are not rather to be
look'd upon altogether, as so many branches deriving from that very River. If
it was not fior the vast pains it would require to trace out its several
Channels, through the Forests and Desarts, and to open a navigation, it might
perhaps be made possible for Vessels to go from hence into Bengale. I will not
stand to the truth of this account; but as for what relates to the description
of the River from Judia to the Sea, and the draught I have given of it, this
wants no support; forasmuch as I have had sufficient opportunity, and leisure,
to observe it myself in sailing up and down. In the Draught, which I here
present to the Reader, (Fig. 24) I have mark'd the natural course of it, with
its several turnings measured with a large Compass its several branches, both
where they separate and joyn again, the situation of its banks, and adjoyning
forests, vlllages, [044] temples, and the new Forts lately rais'd in order to prevent the
escape of the French General and his Soldiers.
Several remarkable particulars are to be
observ'd in this River. I. It overflows its branches like the Nile in Egypt, tho' at
contrary times, and by setting the Country under water, renders it fruitful.
This overflowing begins with the Month of September or sooner, when the Sun
entring the Tropick of Cancer, by its approach dissolves the Snow on the high
Mountains to the North. To this also contributes not a little the rainy Season,
which faLls in with that time, and is observ'd in all Coulltries situate between the two Tropicks, when the Sun passes over the Heads of
their Inhabitants. A most remarkable Instance of the Wisdom and Goodness of the
Omnipotent Creator. In December the Waters begin to fall by degrees, and at last
confine themselves to their former Channel.
2. Tho' the Water in the Earth appears upon
digging the Ground to be regularly level with the River-water, yet it is
observ'd to rise sooner, and to flow over the Surface of the Land, even before
the River begins to swell, or can let any Water run over the Banks into the
flat Country.
3. All the Water that appears upon digging
the Ground hath a nitrous, not a salt, taste all over the Country, and is
consequently not fit for drinking, whereas the Riverwater, tho' muddy, yet is
always sweet, fit for drinking and i wholesome.
4. Whereas all Waters naturally run towards
the Sea, as lying lowest, with respect to the Land, yet it is observ'd, that
this Inundation does not so much aSect the Country near the Sea-shore, as it
does the upper and middle Partse of the Kingdom. .;
5. The Waters by overflowing the Fields
that are sozvn, make the Rice grow so quickly, that the Stalks grow as ist as
the Water rlses, and the Ears keep above the SurfnxJ 2 which when ripe, are cut
off by the Reapers in BoatsX X and gather'd, but the Straw, which often is of
an incredibIe length, is left in the Water. S
6. When the Waters fall and return to their
former: Channel, which happens about the beginning of the North Season, as it
is call'd, when the Northerly Winds drive •be; Water down, and forward
its running of, they are appre~~ hensive, that a great mortality will ensue
among Men and- i Cattle, to avert which Calamity a solemn Festival is kept F
throughout the whole Country, in order to appease tSc destroying Spirits,
which remain after the Water is run i of. The Ceremonies are lighting paper
Lanthorns near ,0 the chief Temples, in the King's Palace, and the Houscs of
Persons of Distinction and the Priests singing ~~;jl!
Offices or Prayers in their Convents. Our
Europeans have observed, that if the Northerly Winds, which commonly blow very
strong at that time, are not high enough to push the Water forward, and that
consequentl) it goes off but slowly, there appears a slime left on [045] the
ground, the putrefaction and ill smell of which is not unlike to be the
occasion of the said mortality.
The banks of this river are low, and for the
greater part marshy, yet reckoning from Judia to
Bankok, which makes at least three parts in four of the way to the Seashore,
they are pretty well inhabited. Along them appear many villages, the houses of
which are rais'd on piles, but buill of poor slight stuS, and sometimes fine
Temples and Habitations of the priests, with abundance of Trees some bearing
fruit, some not. But from Bankok to the Harboul there is nothing but Forests,
Desarts and Morasses; anc every where there is plenty of Bambous, and Gabbe
Gabbe (a Shrub with leaves like those of the Palm Tree' furnishing the
Inhabitants with materials to make Houses Hedges and Roofs.
Three sorts of animals afford much
diversion to Travellers sailing on this River. First are to incredible numbers
of Monkey's of a blackish Colour some of which are of a very large size, and
some less oi the common sort, and a grey colour, which walk abou tame, and as
it were for pleasure sake along the shore, ol climb up the Trees, but towards
evening perch themselve upon the highest Trees on the shore in great numbers
lilct Crows. The she ones hold their young so fast on theu breasts, that they
would not let them go, even when theJ were shot down. They are fond of this
part of thl Country on accounttof finding their food there on large Milk Trees,
call'd Tjaak, growing there in great plenq with light green leaves of an oval
shape, and a fruit no unlike our AppIes as to their bigness and form, excepl
that they seem compress'd, and are of a very harsh taste.
The Glowworms (Cicindel~~) represent
another shew, which settle on some Trees, like a fiery cloud, with this
surprizing circumstance, that a whole swarm of these Insects, having1690. taken
possession of one Tree, and spread themselves over its branches, sometimes hide
their Light aM at once, and a moment after make it appear again with the utmost
reguIarity and exactness, as if they were in a perpetual Systole and Diastole.
What is remarkable in the third place, are the common Gnats, or Flies, which in
the day Gnat ~~ry time appear but sparingly upon the water, but at night in
troublelome to such swarms like Bees, that it is diflicult to guard against
Trnatllorf. them. There is a sort like these in Russia, with which Travellors
are pester'd, but they are smaller, have a less sting, and consequently do not
hurt so much. This Vermin renders this Journey by water, which would be
otherwise pleasant enough, very troublesome and disagreeable.
On the Seventh of JuIy, being Friday, at
break of day we left the River and the Land, and with a favourable North-wind
arriv'd at eight of the clock on board our Ship, which Iay at anchor four
Leagues from the mouth of the River in six fathom of water. This harbour, or
road is the end of a bay between the Countries of Cambodia and Siam: [046] It
hath a soft c}ay at the bottom, and its depth iS about five or Six fathoms more
or less. Yonks and Ships unladen may by the help of the tide come up as far as
Bankok. There lay several Yonks, or Chinese Merchantships near the mouth of the
River, where several marks were set up to avoid the shallows. Besides these
there were several Fisher-boats, the Fisher-men catching thereabouts great
numbers of Fish, particularIy Rays, of whose skin the Japonese make the finest
sort of work. The Fisher-men use also to fix pales in shallow grounds, where
the fresh water mixes with the salt, or Sea-water, which they take away again
the next day, when it ebbs, with so many shelJs sticking to it, as fifty peopIe
are abIe to eat. Being come on board we found the Ships Company, Ofiicers as
well as common Sailors, very much divided with mutual jealousies, which
disorder increas'd by their excessive drinking of Lau, a sort of Brandy made in the Country. The Captain, a civil and good natur'd Man, (a
Character, which is very rare amonc the Dutch Seamen,) forthwith took care to
set them to rights, by laying some of them in irons, and prepar'd to set~ saiJ
the next day.
On the 8th of July, when we were busy with
lading the last part of our Cargo of Hides, there came tlso Officers of the
Dutch Factory at Judia on board to review our Ships Company according to
Custom. The wind blowing at South West from Shore, they left us on the I Ith,
and return'd to the Shore in their boat, being saluted by us, with a treble
discharge of five Guns. With the said Wind we steer'd South East, in order to
get upon the Main, and to make use there of the Southern Tradewind, with which
we were to steer North North-Esst along the Coasts of Cambodia, Cotsijnsina,
and China towards the Harbours of Japan. The Reader will obsers e that in these
Eastern Parts from Malacca to Tapan, therc are Winds constantly blowing South
and South West for four months together, which time is call'd the South or West
Season, or Monsoon, then again North and North East for four other months,
which is call'd the North or 0 East Season, or Monsoon. Between these two
Seasons there are two months, during which the wind is alwayS variable,
shifting from one of the said quarters, till atr; Iength it settles in that,
which is opposite. It happens 0 however in some years, that, to the great
disappointment of sea-faring people, these trade-winds fix sooner or later t
than ordinary, by some weeks. These Seasons obtainl} t also in other parts of
the Indies, with this diference only, that according to the situation of the
Countries, the Shores and the Seas, the winds blow more or less constant from i
East or West, for which reason those months are calI'd the East or West
Monsoons. By these Monsoons alI f navigation in the Indies and Asia must be
directed. At this time the South West Season held on, under favour f of which
we reckon'd to steer our course, as soon as we F should have got out of this
Gulf or- Bay. And so we weigh'd both our [047] anchors full of good hopes, in which however we soon found
ourselves disappointed, the vFind coming about South, and contrary to our
course, so that wlth tacking about, lying still, weighing and casting anchor,
the weather being variable, and sometimes very rough, we lost many days, advancing
but little all the while. I shall avoid tiring the Reader with a tedious
account of the diferent winds and weather, and other minute particulars of our
navigation, as I set them down in my Journal and Map; and therefore I wiLI give
only the main substance in as few words as possible
On the 23rd of July, being Sunday, we left
the coasts DrSatttgrt of Siam, and the mountains of Kui, and sail'd over this
from SiamGulf, steering South East. Qn the 26th we saw a lon and Iow Island
Pulipanjang, bearing E. N. E. at some few Pulipaninng. leagues distance, along
which we steer'd our course. Qn the 27th we made the IsIand Puli ubi, which
appear'd to Pgli #bi. be compos'd of high mountains, and several small Islands.
We lett it on our Larboard-side about four Leagues of. On the 28th of July we
saw the large IsIand Puli Condor Pali-~~orMor. a-head. It belongs, as welI as
the former, to the King of Cambodia, and is uninhabited, but provided with a
good harbour and fresh water. We sail'd by it, leaving it on our Starboard-side,
about three Leagues ofF, and soon after discover'd a-head us to the Larboard
two Rocks, between which we steer'd North East, the wind continuing till then
at South West. The 2gth in the morning we perceiv'd that the current from the
River of Cambodia had carried us too far out of sight of Land, which
endeavouring to regain, by keeping to the North, we found to be Tsiampa. We
bore away so violently with Tliampa the current towards N. N. E. that
considering the uncertainty of depths in those parts, tho' it brought us very
much forward, we resolv'd to drop, and accordingIy came to an anchor, as soon
as we found ground, and lay there that night. On the 3ISt~~ we had at two or
three Leagues on one side, a very high and formidabIe wall, which on the first
and second of August became a little lower, [082-084] and at noon near a famous Sandbank, along which the Ships coming
from China and Japan sail towards Batavia. We met here a great number of
Chinese fisher-boats and the men fishing, and at a farther distance I counted
thirt) four sail of them. A little before we were boarded by a Prawe, sent from
a Chinese Yonk, which ofFer'd us a parcel of Tobacco to sell. This evening we
alter'd our
course to avoid South Lamos, which we
guess'd to be near, being two or three low Rocks mark'd in the Maps at 23o.
IOt. On the 13th of August, being Sunday we discover'd the said Rocks, at a
small Leagues distance from us to the lar-board, and steer'd by with the help
of the current, Sea and Air being calm. In the evening we saw other such Rocks
on the same side, which xve weather'd in the like manner, and then steer'd N.
E. by E. r mention those Islands and Rocks, in order to make the Reader
sensible of the danger of our Voyage, particuldy in the night time, and in storms,
and that our slow progress, and the changing of our course so often proceeded
only from caution. On the I4th of August, four fishermen came contrary to what
they use to do, with Hayes and Beggers on board of us: The goods they had
tonSer us, being of no value, we bought none but dismiss'd them, after having
given each a glass of Brandy for their trouble. This civility invited others to
us, of whom we took some of their Fish, for which they refils'd to take Rice,
or Linnen, and rather took Brandy and Pepper, which made us conclude, that they
are not necessitous. They carried Watermelons with them against thirst. Their
dress was, Straw-hats, and dark brown Gowns coming down to the knees, and tied
with a sash. They play'd strange gambols, and made a noisy chattering Iike the
Malabarians. The altitude was this day 23o. 58'. in a place marked in the Maps
at 24o. IOt. We steer'd N. E. and N. by E. under favour of the current, the
weather being almost calm. The Coasts were Iow with a few Hills. This evening
we found our selves over against the River Ksiansio. On the 15th of August
things continu'dL the same, and the Coasts a pear'd like the daybefore. Before Sun-set a Chinese Istand appear'd in view, which the
following morning being the 16th of August we had left behind us, and so we
bicl farewell to the Coasts of China, and steer'd with the same weather and
course through the main towards Japan. About sloon we were at the height of
25o. 56'. on the 17th at 27o. 131. On the 18th, 28o. 15/. This Day after
morning prayers the wind ceas'd entirely, but a little after we had a small
breeze from N. by E. and N. N. E. The following days to the 25th of August, the
weather varied continually, there being sometimes high, sometimes but little
wind, sometimes it was calm, and all for the greatest part .~on trary to our
Voyage, so that it seem'd the North East Monsoon was setting in earIier than
usual. So we were oblig'd to tack about with great trouble, and such loss of
time, that what we gain'd one day, we almost Iost again another, as wi11 appear
by the diferent heights we took then, which were on the Igth of August 28o. 2'.
on the 20th 28o. 42'. on the alst 28o. 52'. on the 22d 29o. It. On the 23d.
29o. a3t. on the 24th none, on the 2sth, ago. 34'. During those days nothing
remarkabIe occurred, except that about the 27th degree I observ'd a yellowish
green substance floating on the surface of the Greea Sub Sea, which appear'd
for two days, the depth being fifty ItanrcJqoating fathoms, and the ground
being a sandy clay with Sea- on thtSea. weed. There came also for several days
some Birds of a StrargcSirdl. black colour, which perch'd on divers parts of
the Ship, and suffer'd themselves to be taken with the hand. One day a Woodcock
was found among them. This day we had a dead calm and excessive hot weather.
Towards evening a violent contrary Wind rose out of E. N. E. which oblig'd us
to steer Southward, and pass a very troublesome night. On the 26th of August
the storm RtmarkabSe increas'd with thunder and lightning. Having met with
StoZm. shallows at thirty two fathom, we took to the other side to S. E. and S.
E. by E. On the a7th of August being Sunday, the storm continu'd out of N. E.
by E. We [086-082] representing a bare,
unfruitfill and rough aspect, which drew off sometimes to the N. E. sometimes
to the N. We pursu'd our course adong it, having no soundinfJ, with a gentle
wind and fair weather, in the evening lse Cambir found our selves a little
beyond the Islands Puli Cambir Xrra-de Terrs, at the end of the Country of
Tsiampa, and at the side of the Kingdom of Cotsin Tsina, which we coasted
along. On the fourth of August we came in taon.sight of the Island Cantaon,
which we left behind us in the afternoon. On the fifth we steer'd N. N. E. with
a S. and E. S. E. wind, to cross the Bay of Tunquin. On the sixth of August,
the weather being calm, our Ships Company took that opportunity of fishing, in
which they met with good success. One with his hook, on which there was Sut a
glittering piece of tin instead of a bait, 1tt observa- catch'd two Sharks,
(Hayes, or Tuberones) of a midling i s madc ott size, and soon after one
another, which by the help of z: 4,tl.line [048] tied about their bodies were pull'd into the Ship. This sort of
Fish is very frequent in all the Seas of the; Indies: Its full length is ten or
twelve foot, and its flesh hard, and unpleasant of taste. It is reckon'd the
fiercest of all Sea animals, and a great enemy to mankind,"against which
sailors are oblig'd to be very much upon thei r guard, when they go a bathing.
This is the reason, why; Athenzus calls it Anthropophagos, or the Man-eater. He
hath a wide mouth, not in the foremost part of the head, but a little lower,
for which reason he is obliged; to turn upon the back, when he takes in food Som
above. Three things appear'd to me remarkable in them.
I. A strange small Fish sticking to one's
side, and hold-: ing the desh so fast with its mouth, that it required sorne
strength to pull it off; this little Fish the Seamen calI Sucker. 2. There was in
one's belly six young ones alive, each one span and half long. It is said, that
thesc young ones creep in andL out of the old one's belly, before they grow
bigger. I was not able to examine into the possibility and truth of this
assertion, the sailors cutting and mangling it too s3uickly, and hurrying it to
the kitchen. 3. In the back part of the head of those two Fishes next to
the head there lay a good quantity of a white substance Iike Crabs-eyes wrapt
up in a thin membrane, which they carefillly preserv'd, as an approv'd remedy
against the stone and hard labour in women.
Soon after was catch'd by another, a very
fine Sea-star with nine rays, which being not unlike that we catch' upon the
coasts of Malacca, in our voyage from Batavia to Siam, and which I have given
an account of in my Journal of that voyage, I need not repeat the description
here.
But I must not forget to take notice in
this place, that this and the preceeding days we met with great numbers of
certain Sea-animals, which we might justly calI Icthyo thuria, or fishy Quaims,
because they are something like fish, and also serve for food for men. The
Dutch call them Sea Cats, after the name which is given them in the Sta {atl.
Country Language, which implies as much The fore part resembles a Polypus
marinus, provided as it were with snouts, about nine in number of diferent
Iength. The belly 1S quite empty, open above, and may be blown up; the flesh is
transparent without bones or nerves. If I remember right, Bontius gives the
figure and descrip t on of them, to which I refer, adding only, that between
the jaws the mouth is cover'd with a membrane, under which are two black, thick
and crooked teeth, one above the other, strong enough to break the hardest
object.
August 7th, Having hitherto sail'd to the
North East with a South, and South West gale, without seeing any Land, we began
to take the height of the pole, as often as we were not hinder'd by the cIouds,
which on the eighth of August we found to be Igo, 2rt, on the tenth 2I X 4. On the
rIth, 22o, 131. When we had taken this latter height we discovered a-head of us
some of the mountalns of Fokien, a [049] Province of China. On the 12th Fokitn of August in the morning we
found our selves two leagues of the coasts of China, where the said mountains
end, [084-86]
found thirty six fathom depth, and steer'd
to the other side to E. S. E. We took the height of the Sun at noon and by it
found our selves at 29o. 50'. This evening at nine of the clock, a Chinese
Jonk, with all her sails crowded and fuH before the wind, rush'd by our board
to put into some harbour. The Seamen on this coast have certain marks, by which
they foresee an impending storm, and retire in time to the nearest harbour they
can make. On the 28th of August the storm increas'd with such vehemence that
before evening we were necessitated to tie our rudder fast, to bring to the
main sheet and mizzen, and to let the ship drive. Some Caian, (Indian Vetches)
and Rice boil'd in Water were set down upon deck for our dinner, but the
tossings of the Ship were so violent, that only two of the Sailors, who held
the porringer, were able to snatch and swallow some of it, but the rest had
enough to do, to creep of on all four to save our bodies. This evening we found
fifty six fathom depth. On the 2gth; of August, the wind having turn'd that
night to a perfec t and filrious storm, the tossing became intolerable, so that
there was no standing any more upon one's legs. ~~YVc endeavour'd to make use
of the rudder, but night 0 approaching soon oblig'd us to tie it fast again;
but we were not much the better for it, the bulky waves beating with such force
against the Ship, that even before day break we were fain to take our sails in
again, which began~~ to be tore in pieces, to keep the rudder tied up, and to
leave our Ship to the mercy of the two raging Elementsw:; The sails were
contrary to expectation brought in, taking a Iucky opportunity for it. But the
storm and impetuosity of the waves still increas'd more and more, so tbat every
thing was like to be broke to [051] pieces. The Cramp~~ Irons, and ropes with which the Chests were
fastensd, breaking, the goods were thrown from one side of the Ship to the
other. It was resolved to bring to the mizzen,^> but when the sailors were
about it, the wind laid hold of t it, and tore it to pieces. What made our
condition the more lamentable was the darkness of the air, which besides
[087]
was fuIl of water, which to me seem'd to
proceed from some other cause, than only the rain, and the breaking of the
waves, which the wind mix'd with the air. Bre could not see each other at half
the Ships length, and the confused noise of the wind, the Sea, and the Ship
made it impossibIe to understand one another. The waves cover'd us like so many
mountains, they beat the Doors open without intermission, and the water run
over Decl; into the Cabin in such quantity, that all was fill'd with it;
besides the Ship began to be leaky, so that we were obliged to throw the water
out with pails, and to add to the pump, which was continually playing, a second
one. Durmg this noise we heard a continual thumping at the stern of the Ship,
as if aL was to be stav'd to pieces: We had no opportunity to find out the
cause of it till in the afternoon, when the storm shifted to the East, and then
we saw, that the hinges of the Rudder were broke) the Cramp Iron pull'd out,
and the Rudder draggling after. This misfortune augmented the danger we were
in, and though we endeavour'd, as well as we were able, to fasten the Rudder to
its Chains, yet the thumping continued with such force, that we had reason to
apprehend, that in a few hours the Ship would be broke to pieces and sunk. All
the while we were driving back to the S. W. and W. S. W. towards the fatal
Islands of China, a new formidabIe appearance of danger, which was still
heigthen'd by the great confusion of our Men, who would not hearken to the
command of their Officers, who were as much disorder'd by strong Liquors as
they themselves; For as no drinking water could be got out of the hold, and all
their food was but some boil'd rice, they were obliged to keep up their spirits
with Arrack and Brandy, which at last so disorder'd them, that any sober man
would tremble at the complication of so many dangers. To compleat all, dreadfuz
night came on, which however seem'd to be so far more comfortable than the
day-light, as it was to hide from our Eyes the Horrours of our impending
destruction. The most important point
[088] was to save the Ship from the terrible blows she receiv'cl by the Rudder,
every time it was lifted up by a swelling wave, in order to which either the
Rudder was to be disengaged and taken in> or some other method to be tried;
accordingly the Ship's Carpenter with his assistants went into the Cabin,
provided with leavers, hatches, ropes, and other tools. They loosen'd tables
and seats, broke through the hatches in the floor into the room under it, and
being-tied with ropes were let out through the Cabin windows. But all their
pains for mending the Rudder were in vain, it was [052] impossible for them to resist the force : of the many raging
waves, and they were necessitated to desist, and to save themselves, being
throughly soak'd.; Upon deck they were in the mean time busy with hoisting <
another mizzen which they had been mending and preparing all day long, and this
they were obliged to venture, or to lose all their masts in the night time by
the encreasing shocks. The Captain, having watch'd a proper opportunity, gave a
Signal, and it was hoisted with good success almost in a moment. It was already
three hours t, after Sunset, and all that could be done that nigli., was to
pump on and hope the best. On the 30th of August : early in the morning the
storm began to abate and the ; waves to subside, whereupon immediately the sprit-sail
: 0 was brought to serve instead of a Rudder, with the help of which we sail'd
Southward before the wind, and consequently without being much toss'd, which
put our Carpenters in a condition of repairing the Rudder, the 0 master
Carpenter being let down on a Rope fix'd a new beam to the Rudder, and in short
the whole business was 0 finish'd about noon, when the sky clearing up, the
Cook was able to make a fire, and the sailors took the height and found it 28o
3Ir so we hoisted sail again, and with a fair wind steer'd N. E.
On the thirty first of August, having thus
escap'd this danger, we were comforted at break of day, by the bright
appearance of the Sun, though the wind still continued to blow very hard, and
being after five days fasting ver~~r; hungry, and quite dispirited by the great
fatigue, we were in expectation of refreshing ourselves with a hearty meal and
good drink, but our sottish steward, who seldom was sober when on shore, and
always drunk when on board, had drank all our wine to the last drop, a fat Hog
and all our poultry had died of the bad weather, and the Cook had nothing to
give us, but boil'd rice, Cajan, or Pigeon pease, and old Bacon, on which we
feasted for want of better dainties in expectation of catching some fresh fish
in the next c;alm. The first and most laborious of this days work was to strain
the shrewds, which were so slacken'd by the continual tossing in the late
storm, that they were not able to hold up the masts; mean time others were busy
to find out the leaks of the ship, though without discovering any as yet. Some
Bales of silk, and hides, that had been wetted, were brought upon Deck to dry,
as were also our cloaths and bedding, which business took up the two following
days. Our Course was to the N. E. and N. N. E. the wind being East, and East by
North. The height at 29o 20' and the depth in the evening 43 fathom. On the
first of September a leak was discover'd under the kitchen, to stop which the
Ship was for some hours leaned on one side. There were still more leaks, which
obliged us still to pump every Hour, but we could not find them out and judged
that they were above water. I W1~~ not detain the Reader with a long account of
the winds, but only tell in general, that they continued all along [053] varsable, for the greater part contrary, sometimes a little
favourable, which oblig'd us to sail very much by the wind, (as the Sea term
is) and tack about. At noon we found 30o. 9'. of altitude, and in the evening
a3 fathom depth. On the second of September we had 30o. aot. of altitude, depth
go fathom. On the third of September being Sunday, the altitude was 3 10. I 6'.
depth 26 fathom. On the fourth of September, the weather being stormy, no
altitude could be taken. We had from 25 to 32 fathom depth, the ground yielding
all day long a white sand. On the fifth of September at noon, the
[090] altitude was 3I. 15/. the depth in the evening 26 fathom. This
evening several Sea-devils, or Rays, pass'd by our Ship, being flat Fishes two
or three fathom long of an ugly figure.
On the sixth of September, the altitude was
310. 30t. This afternoon we unexpectedly met with the most eminent danger of a
nature quite different from what we m. had experienc'd in the late storm. We
were steering Southward with a gentle gale blowing from E. S. E. when behind us
in the North we observ'd some lightning, and soon after huge hollow waves
tumbling over each other, like so many clouds, and with great rapidity rolling
towards our Ship, which thereby was brought into so disorderly and confilsed a
motion, that we almost lost our senses, not knowing what to do or resolve on.
For the waves of the Southerly Monsoon standing against our course, and not
permitting the Ship to run swiftly, the wind being besides but gentle, and
coming so obliquely, the immense force of the opposite huge waves must
necessarily fall upon the stern of the Ship. Two hours after Sun-set two of
those waves almost at the~~aame moment, came from behind like mountains, and
overwhelm'd the whole Ship with such force, that they bore her down deep under
water, with all the persons standing upon quarter deck, of whom I was one, all
thinking we were going down to the bottom of the Sea. This shock was attended
with such a terrible cracking and noise, that it seem'd as if the whole stern
was tore ofF and broke to pieces. Our Captain and his Mate, who were both above
sixty years of age, as well as others, who from their first youth had serv'd at
Sea, own'd that they never met with the like all their life-time. They look'd immediately
after the Rudder, which they found entire on its hinges, except a few planks
and other things broke ofF. lhe pump was also set to work, but no leak
appear'd. But in the Cabin almost every thing was destroy'd and soak'd with
salt water, and our drunken Steward almost drown'd in his bed, tho' he lay
under deck in one of the safest places. The deck was cover'd with water knee deep, and the tackling
floated about. And tho' the holes were immediately open'd to let the salt water
run out, yet it had already penetrated into the inmost parts of several things,
as I found to my great grief it had done into my Papers and written Memoirs. We
had stood the shock of some more waves, when a [054] brisk Gale arising out of the North, attended with Rain and Storm,
quicken'd the course of our Ship towards South and East, and thereby shelter'd
her against the fury of those monstrous waves, tho' with terrYlble tossing,
which continu'd the whole night following, and all the next day, being the
seventh of September, tho' without storm, and by tolerable weather, so that
this danger was also over. It was remarkable, that this day the wind shifted
round all the points of the Compass, and contrary to the course of the Sun. We
found no altitude this day, but had from 30 to 40 fathom decpth. On the eighth
of September at noon we had 3I . II/. of altitude, and in the evening 42 fathom
depth. The Sea was still very rough, and occasion d great tossing, and a
troublesome night. On the ninth of September, the altitude was 310. 5', depth
from 42o to 48 . fathom.
On the tenth of September being Sunday the
altitude was 30o. 20'. but no bottom to be found. This afternoon we were again
toss'd by a violent storm out of the Thirdltors. North. We were oblig'd to turn
about, to bring to the lower sails, to tie up the Rudder, and so let the Ship
drive where she could, trusting for the rest upon providence. On the eleventh
of September towards evening, the storm after having lasted twenty four hours
abated, so we hoisted the main sheet again, and made use of the Rudder. At noon
we found 29o. 55'. of altitude, and in the evening 60 fathom depth; and so we
had met with three diferent storms between China and Japan, during which many
of the goods had been damag'd by the tossing and tumbling about. There appear'd
an unwillingness and discontent among the Ship's Company) on account of this troublesome Voyage, the rather because there was but little
hopes of reaching Japan, the North Season, which is contrary to our course,
seeming now to be full} settled and fixed; for this reason it was resolv'd on
the twelfth of September to let the Ship drive more before the wind,
consequently with more ease back to S. W. b} W. This day at noon we had 29o.
3o'. of altitude, and in the evening 6a fathom depth. On the 13th of September
early in the morning, when they were careening the Ship, it was observ'd, that
the clamps which are like the ribs and braces of this floating Body, were grown
loose in the accident that befel us on the sixth of September. This put both
Officers and common Sailors out of heart, and made them quite tired with
tacking about any longer. It was thought most adviseable to make for some
harbour in China, in order to take in fresh water, of which we had not enough
for one month more, and then to return to Batavia. Some Passengers, and whoever
else had any credit with the Ship's council, endeavouring to make them come
into the proposal, the same would in all probability have been approv'd of, had
not the Mate oSer'd some objections against it. As for my self, having in my
custody a Journal of a Voyage to Japan, which I had receiv'd from a very good
hand, I look'd into it, and found, that some years [055] before a Dutch Ship was safely arriv'd in Japan the latter end of
September. So I went privately to the Captain, and first left to his
consideration~~ that the wet hides would hardly keep in the hot air of Batavia,
without being spoiled, and he afterwards be made accountable for that damage,
as occasion'd by his Faintheartedness and precipitate return I afterwards
shew'd him the said passage in the Journal at which he was startled, and having
read it thrice over immediately, alteKd his resolution without making any
further objection. On the fourteenth of September the Elevation was 29o 36',
and in the evening we had from 4I to 46. fathom of depth. On the fifteenth of
September we found the altitude 29o 57', depth 36 fathom. On the sixteenth of September the altitude was 30o 13/, depth q8 fathom. On
the 17th of September being Sunday we found no elevation, the depth was 47
fathom. On the eighteenth of September, the weather being stormy, we could take
no elevation, the depth was 34 fathom. On the nineteenth of September the
altitude was 30o 3It, the depth in the evening 45 fathom On the twentieth of
September the altitude was 30o 36', the depth in the evening 58, at night 70
fathom. This morning we kill'd a Dolphin, or Dorado, with a Javelin. Its colour
was of a yellowish blue, and its length six spans, the flesh of it was very
delicious and acceptable to our sick stomachs. On the twenty first of September
we attained 310 30' of elevation, which according to the common maps is the
Latitude of the rocky Island Matsima situate in the Japonese Ocean, which like a
Hermes is Iook'd out for by sea-faring peopIe sailing to or from Japan. We saw
it two Hours after we had taken the elevation at nine or ten leagues distance,
bearing N. E. whence we concIuded, that it lies in effect a little more
Northerly and near 32o degrees of latitude. A little before Sunset this so long
wished for Hermes appeared at five leagues distance to the Northward. Six hours
after, the Moon shining very bright, and the IsIand lying before us a league
ofF on our larboard, we observed that it consisted of about seven pointed
Rocks, being rough and bare, lying near each other, daubed over in most places
with the dung of birds, so that they appear only inhabited by Sea-mews, which
we saw there in great numbers. We made the same observation two years after,
when we sailed by it in our return fFom Japan. We had the good luck to catch
another Dorado, and in the evening we found 78 fathom depth, the ground being a
sandy Mud. On the twenty second of September early in the morning we saw
Matsima lying W. S. W. at a great distance, so that we could hardly distinguish
it. Some time after we observ'd a Chinese Jonk fFom Nankin, and next two more,
which by the building we judged Iikewise to be Chinese, all coming from Japan. On our larboard we saw the Japonese Islands Gotho
inhabited by husband-men, and' before it was noon came into our view the high
moun-W tainous Country before Nagasaki, the long expected Har bour, which at
Sunset we had at six or seven leagues distance before us, [056] bearing N. E. by N. We sail'd with# a North West breeze and a few
sails towards it, and on0; the twenty third of September at midnight arriv'd at
the^; entry of the Bay in 50 fathom water. But the said entry being fulI of
rocks and Islands, which we were unac quainted withal, and which it is
impossible to sail through at night, we tack'd about till morning came on, when
we found 43 fathom of water on a sandy ground, and steer'd towards the
Harbour. But being all of a sudden becalmed, we could not proceed, and therefore notified our arrival
with firing five Guns, which were heard in the Dutch place of residence two
leagues off. Accordingly in the afternoon four vessels came out to us, with the
. factors sent by our Superiors there, and accompanied by 0 swarms of Japonese
officers, clerks, soldiers, and a chief interprefer, who came to receive us,
and to demand the writings, and letters, we had on board. After a short stay
they left us, being saluted by us with seven Guns, and we follow'd them, though
very slowly, the wind being vari able, as far as the mountain call'd Papenberg,
from: whence we tow'd our Ship off by the help of casting '! anchor, till we
brought her within half a league of the City of Nagasaki, and so after having
return'd thanks to the Almighty for his protection in our Voyage, we cast
anchor at ten at night.
We had had neither sick, nor dead; during
our whole Voyage, excepting only the abovementioned steward, who >6eing
denied any more Arrack, or Brandy, was the day before seiz'd with an
Apoplectick fit, which soon t i render'd him senseless and speechless, and
threw him into '! convulsions, which a few hours after made an end of his life.
He was otherwise an able man, the son of a noted ; divine at the Hague, but by
indulgence early fell into debauches and a dissolute life. We were no sooner come to an anchor,
but we had two iaponese Guardships put on both sides of us, which all night
long went the round with great diligence. All the Chinese Jonks that put to Sea
this day, were each of them attended with a Guardship, till they got out of the
Harbour into the open Sea. Not far from our Ship we saw a fleet of 40 pleasure
boats coming to an anchor, being the
usual pompous train Of a great Man, who had been on a voyage. They were built much after
the manner of the Strubes in Russia, which are a sort of boats used on the
Wolga in going from Mosco to Casan. This little fleet made a fine shew with its
many lights at night, and in the morning, when it sailed, with its sails, half
of which were white, and the other half black, which they hoisted all at once.
On the twenty fourth of September in the
morning we mov'd with a small breeze half of our way, and afterwards twenty
Japonese rowing boats fasten'd to a rope towed us the other half as far as 200
paces within the City and our habitation. This Harbour is enclos'd with high
moun- tains, Islands, and rocks, and guarded by nature against the rage of the
Sea, and the fury of stormy winds. On the tops of [057] the
neighbouring Mountains stand Guardhouses with Guards in them,who with their
spying Glasses are observing whatever happens at Sea, of which they give
immediate Information to the Government at Nagasaki, and by this method they
had notice of our arrival already two days before, being the 22d in the
morning. A:long the shore, which is form'd by the foot of those Mountains,
which encompass the Harbour, there stand divers round Bastions, on which I
observ'd only Rails, or Palisadoes, painted red, as it were for Ornament's
sake, but saw no Cannon. Besides these, there are on both sides of the City,
not far from the shore, on two Eminences, as many imperial head Guards, which
are hung about with cloth for Ornament, as well as to hinder people from seeing
the number of Cannon and Men, that are in them. When we pass'd by them, we
saluted every Guard with twelve great Guns, and after being arriv'd at the place assign'd to us, we dropt
anchor at about three hundred paces from the City, and as far from Desima,
which is the habitation of the Dutch on a separate Island form'd purposely near
the shore without the City. Then came to us, two Buggioses, or Gentlemen of the
Governors, sent by them with their Commission, with many subordinate Clerks,
Interpreters and Soldiers, who called all those that were newly arriv'd, and made
them pass in review before them one after the other, according to the List
given them, viewing every one from top to toe, and writing his name, age and
business, with a pencil on paper. Besides this, about six persons more were
examin'd every one in particular, concerning our Voyage, viz. from whence we
came, when we set out, how long we had been on the way, whether we did not land
somewhere, &c. and the several answers were carefully written down. Many
questions were ask'd upon the deceased Steward's account, and the answers also
taken down, his Breast and the rest of his Skin were narrowly viewed, whether
there was any cross, or other mark d the Popish Religion upon it. We obtain'd
so much by our repeated Instances, that the Corpse was fetch'd away the same
day, but none of us could get leave to attend it, and to see where it was
interrsd. This review being over, Soldiers and Clerks were put into every
corner, and the whole Ship with al1 her cargo taken, as it were, in possession
by the Japonese. The boat and skiS was left to our Men, only for this day, in
order to look to their anchors. But pistols, cutlasses, and other arms were by
them demanded, and taken into custody, which were follow'd the next morning by
the gun-powder packt in barrels. In short, had I not been before hand
acquainted wlth their usual proceedings,IcouId not have help'd thinking we were
got into a hostile Country, or had been taken for Spies. I must also remember
here, that in our Voyage, as soon as we discover'd this Land, every one was
oblig~~d pursuant to an order from above, and ancient custom, to give his
Prayer-book, and other Books of Divinity, as also atl [058] European Money he had about him, to the Cap tain, who, after
having taken a memorandum of every one's name for it, pack'd all up in an old
cask, and hid it from the Japonese tiII our return. This evening they sent us
from the Dutch Factory divers sorts of Refreshments, viz. Fowls, Eggs,
Shell-fish, and other Fish, Radishes with their Leaves, Turneps, Onions, fresh
Ginger, Pompkins, Water-melons, white Bread, and a barrel of Sacki, or Japonese
Rice-beer.
On the 25th of September, early in the
morning, came from Desima on board our Ship both Residents, or Directors of the
Dutch Trade, one M. Sweras, who was to be reliev'd by the other M. Butenheim
his Successor but newly arriv'd from Batavia, with three Ships laden with
Merchandize. AIt the Ships's Company having been call'd together, they read to
us the orders both of the Dutch East-India Company, and of the Governors of
Nangasaki, chiefly to this purpose, that every one of us, ought to behave
soberly and discreetly with respect to the Natives, and the Laws and Customs of
the Country. A Paper containing these Orders, having been read publickly, was
according to the Custom of5Japan, put up on board the Ship for every Body to
read. In the afternoon I went on shore to Desima, on which occasion one is
oblig'd to take out a Passport from the Japonese Shiw Guard to those on shore,
and on the return another from the Land-Guard to that on board. Finding that
the use of the raw Garden Fruit, that was sent us yesterday, had occasion'd to
me great pain, r was oblig'd to hasten back to our Ship, from whence I went on
the 26th of September with my things, to live in the Habitation assign'd to me
at Desima.
[098]
Chap. IV. Of the Empire of Japan in general, as to its situation,
and the largeness of its several Istands.
This Empire is by the Europeans call'd
Japan. The Natives give it several names and characters. The most common, and
most frequently us'd in their writings and conversation,is Nipon,which is
sometimes in a more elegant manner, and particular to this Nation, pronounc'd
Nifon, and by the Inhabitants of Nankin, and the southern parts of China,
Sijppon. It signifies, the foundation of the Sun, being deriv'd from fi, Fire,
and in a more sublime Sense, the Sun, and Pon, the ground, or foundation of a
thing. [059]
There are still some other names and
epithets, which are seldom mention'd in conversation, but occur more frequently
in their writings. Such‑are for instance. I. +i Tenka, that is, the
Subcelestial Empire, as if it were the only one existing under Heaven. Hence
the Emperorq is call'd Tenkasama, the Subcelestial Monarch. In former times
this Name was peculiar to the Empire of Japan; alone, but since commerce hath
made known to them several other Countries, they now condescend to honour
~~them also with the same epithet, particularly such, whosc Inhabitants are
admitted and tolerated among thems Thus they call the Empire of China, To Sin
Tenka, the united Provinces of the Netherlands, known to them by the name of
Holland, Hollanda Tenka. 2. Fino Motto, is much the same with Nipon, and
signifies, pro~~ perly speaking, the Root of the Sun, Fi being the Sun, and
Motto, a Root; No, is only a particle, by whicb these two words are combin'd
together. 3. Awadsissima, | is the original name of this Country, and is as
much as to 0 say, a Terrestrial Scum Island, Awa, signifying Sc~~; 098
Dsi, the Earth, and Ssima an Island. This
Name is grounded upon the following fabulous tradition, recorded ln their
Histories, of the origin and first creation of the several Islands, which
compose this mighty EmpireX which in former times, for want of communication
with other Countries, was looked upon by the Natives, as the only inhabited
part of the Globe. In the beginning of the Creation, the supreme of the seven
first celestiaW Spirits, (of which more in the seventh Chapter of this Book)
stirr'd the then Chaos, or confuse Mass of the Earth with a StaS, which as he
took out, there dropt from it a muddy Scum, which running together form'd the
Japonese IsIands, one of which, of the fourth magnitude, still retains this
Name, being particuIarly calI'd Awadsissima. 4. d Sin Kokf, or CaMino Kuni, the
Country, or Habitation of the Gods. For by Sin, and Cami, are denoted the Gods,
which were particularly and originally worship'd in Japan ; and both Kokf and
Kuni signify a Country. 5 Akitsima, or according to the common pronounciation;
AkiTsussima, is another name given to this Country of old, and frequently to be
met with in their Chronicles and Legends. 6. Tontsio, the true Morning. 7. Sio,
all viz. all the several Islands subject to the Emperor of Japan. 8. Tamatto,
which name is also given to one of iltS Provinces. Several others, as Asijwara,
Asijwara Kokf, Qua, or Wa, and some more, I forbear mentioning to avoid being
too tedious on so trifling a Subject
The Empire of Japan lieth between 3 I and
42 degrees lts vitvation of Northern Latitude. The Jesuits in a late Map of Ch
i na, made and corrected by th ei r Astronom ical Ob servations, place it
between 1570. and 1750. 30t of Longitude. It extends to N. E. and E. N. E.
being irreguIarly broad, tho' in the main, pretty narrow in comparison to its
length, which from one end of the Province Fisen, to the extremity of the
Province Osiu, is suppos'd to be two hundred German [060] Miles in a streight Line, all the filrther distant Coasts and
Islands, tho' subiect to the Japonese Emperor, not reckon'd.
Dsi, the Earth, and Ssima an Island. This
Name is grounded upon the following fabulous tradition, recorded in their
Histories, of the origin and first creation of the several Islands, which
compose this mighty Empire, which in former times, for want of communication
with other Countries, was looked upon by the Natives, as the only inhabited
part of the Globe. In the beginning of the Creation, the supreme of the seven
first celestiaX Spirits, (of which more in the seventh Chapter of this Book)
stirr'd the then Chaos, or confuse Mass of the Earth with a Staff, which as he
took out, there dropt from it a muddy Scum, which running together form'd the
Japonese Islands, one of which, of the fourth magnitude, still retains this
Name, being particularly call'd Awadsissima. 4. d Sin Kokf, or CaMino Kuni, the
Country, or Habitation of the Gods. For by Sin, and Cami, are denoted the
Gods, which were particularly and originally worship'd in Japan; and both Kokf
and Kuni signify a Country. 5. Akitsima, or according to the common
pronounciation, AkiTsussima, another name given to this Country of old, and
frequently to be met with in their Chronicles and Legends. 6. Tontsio, the true
Morning. 7. Sio, all viz. all the several IsIands subject to the Emperor of
Japan. 8. Jamatto, which name is also given to one of its Provinces. Several
others, as Asijwara, Asijwara Kokf, Qua, or Wa, and some more, I forbear
mentioning to avoid being too tedious on so trifling a Subject.
The Empire of Japan lieth between 31 and 42
degrees Its ritttatiett. Of Northern Latitude. The Jesuits in a late Map of
China, made and corrected by their Astronomical Observations, place it
between t570. and 1750. 30t of Longitude. It extends to N. E. and E. N. E.
being irregularly broad, tho' in the main, pretty narrow in comparison to its
length, which from one end of the Province Fisen, to the extremity of the
Province Osiu, is suppos'd to be two hundred German Miles in a streight Line,
all the further distant Coasts and Islands, tho' subject to the Japonese
Emperor, not reckon'd.
[100]
unlike It may in different respects be
compar'd to the K;ngrttvin- doms of Great Britain and Ireland, being much after
the same manner, tho' in a more eminent degree, divided and broke through by
corners and forelands, arms of the Sea, great bays and inlets running deep into
the Country, and gorming several Islands, Peninsula' s, Gulphs and Harbours.
Besides, as the King of Great Britain is Sovereign of three Kingdoms, England,
Scotiand and Ireland, so isiom. likewise the Japonese Emperor hath the supreme
Jurisdiction of three separate large Islands. The first and largest, is call'd
Nipon, from the name of the whole Empire. It runs length ways from East to West
in the form of a Jaw-bone, whose crooked part is turn'd to the North. A narrow
Channel or Streight, full of Rocks and Islands, some inhabited, some
uninhabited, parts it from the second, which is next to it in largeness, and
which from its situation, lJnng to the South-west of Nipon, is 6call'd SaiKokf,
that is, the Western Country. It is also caSl'd Kiusiu, or the Country of Nine,
being divided into nine large Provinces. It hath t48-German Miles in
circumference, and according to the Japonese it hath I40 of their own Miles in
length, and between 40 and 50 in breadth. The third Island lies between the
first and second. It is near of a square figure, and being divided xsinto four
Provinces, the Japonese call it SiKokf, that is the Country of four, viz.
Provinces. These three large ; Islands are encompass'd with an almost
unconceivable number of others, some of which are small, rocky and barren,
others large, rich and fruitful enough to be govern'd by petty Princes, as will
appear more fully by the next Chapter, wherein I propose to lay down a more
accurate geographical description of this Empire.
vsltdAl1 these several Islands and
Dominions composing the t Tratt mighty Empire of Japan, have been by the
ecclesiastical ndhereditary Monarch, Siusiun, divided into Gokisitzido, as they
are call'd by the Japanese, or seven large Tracts of Land in the year of Christ
590. Many years after in the year of Christ 681. Ten Mu, divided the seven
chief Tracts into 66 Provinces, appointing so
many Lords of his Court to command and govern them, as Princes, or his Lieutenants.
Two more Islands Iki and Tsussima formerly belonging to the Kingdom of Corea,
having been conquer'd in the last Century, and added to the Empire of Japan,
there are now in all 68 Provinces. Both these sixey eight divisions of the
Japanese Empire, tho' they subsist till Provinres. now, yet through the misery
of time its 68 Provinces have been since their first constitution torn into 604
lesser six hundred districts. In the first and happiest Ages of the Japanese
ardfoer Monarchy, every Prince enjoy'd the Government of the distri~~tl.
Province, which he was entrusted with by the Emperor, in peace and tranquiIity.
The miseries of ensuing times, the frequent quarrels and contentions, which
arose among the chief branches of the Imperial Family about [061] the
succession to the throne, by degrees involv'd the whole LEmpire into blood and
confusion. Its Princes espous'd diSerent parties, and no sooner were arms
introduced among them, as the most powerfill and surest means to make up their
dissensions, but every one endeavour'd thereby to magintain himself in the
possession of those lands, whose government he was owing entirely to the
Imperial bounty: Such as had not been provided for by the Emperor, took care to
provide for themselves. The Princes divided their Hereditary dominions among
their Sons, who, though possess'd of but one portion of their Father's estate,
would not be behind them in grandeur and magnificence. What wonder then if the
number of princedoms and dominions went on perpetually increasing. The Emperors
of the now reigning Family, usurpers themselves of the throne, of which they
are possess'd, think this great division of the Provinces of the Empire no ways
detrimental to their Government, but rather conducive, to make them the better
acquainted with the true state of their riches, and revenues; therefore far
from reducing them to the former standard, they still tear and divide them more
and more, as they please, or as their Interest requtres, of which there are
some late instances.
The Province of Tsikusen was not long ago
divided into two Governments Janagawa and Kurume and the Prince of Tsikungo had
orders from Court to surrender part of his dominions to the Prince of the two
Islands above mention'd Iki and Tsussima, who till then had nothing in
possession upon the continent of Japan.
The borders of this Empire are its
rocky, mountainous Coasts, and a tempestuous Sea, which by reason of its
shallowness admits none, but smalLl vessels, and even those not without eminent
danger, the depth of most of its Gulfs and Harbours being not yet known, and
others, which the pilots of the Country are better acquainted withal, unfit for
harbouring of Ships of any considerable bulk. Indeed it seems Nature purposely
design'd these Islands to be a sort of a little world, separate and inde
pendent of the rest, by making them of so difficuIt an access, and by endowing
them plentifully, with whatever is requisite to make the lives of their
Inhabitants both delightfiul and pleasant, and to enable them to subsist
without a commerce with foreign Nations.
Besides the several Islands and
Provinces already mention'd, there are some further distant Countries,
which do not properly speaking belong to the Empire of Japan, but either acknowledge
the supremacy of the Emperor; or lisc under his protection. Of these I think it
necessary to give some preliminary account, before I proceed to a more
particular description of the Japanese Empire it self. They are I. The Islands
of Riuku, or Liquejo, the 1: Inhabitants of which stile themselves subjects,
not of the Emperor of Japan, but of the Prince of Satsuma, by whom they were
subdued and conquer'd. 2. Tsiosin, is the third [062] and
lowest part of the Peninsula of Corea, which is; govern'd, in the name of his
Imperial Majesty, by the Prince of Iki and Tsussima. 3. The Island Jeso, which
is govern'd for the Emperor by the Prince of Matsumai, whose own dominions make
part of the great Prourince Osju.
I. The Liquejo Islands, as they are set
down in our Maps, or the Islands of Riuku, as they are call'd by the
Inhabitants, must not be contounded with the Insult Leuconi;e or the Philippine
Islands. They lie to the Southwest of the Province Satzuma, which is situate
upon the continent of SaiKokf, and the neighbouring Island Tana or Tanagasima,
and according to our Maps reach down almost to the 26o. of Northern latitude.
If we believe the Japanese, they are so fruitful, as to yield the iEtice
harvest twice a year. The Inhabitants, which are for the most part either
husbandmen or fishermen, are a good natured merry sort of people, leading an
agreeable contented life, diverting themselves, after their work is done, with
a glass of rlce beer, and playing upon their musical Instruments, which they for
this purpose carry out with them into the fields. They appear by their language
to be of Chinese extraction. In the late great revolution in China, when the
Tartars invaded and possess'd themselves of that mighty Empire, the Natives
retired in great numbers, and were dispers'd all over the East-Indies. Not a
few fled to these Islands, where they applied themselves chiefly to trade,
being well skill'd in navigation, and well acquainted with those Seas.
Accordingly they still carry on a commerce with Satzuma, and go there once a
year. Some centuries ago these Islands were invaded and conquer'd by the Prince
of Satzuma, whose successors still keep them in awe by their Bugios, or
Lieutenants and strong Garrisons, though otherwise by reason of their remoteness
from Satzuma the Inhabitants are treated with much regard and kindness; for
they are oblig'd to give their Sovereign only one fifth part of the produce of
their Country, whilst his own natural Subjects, the Satzumese are tax'd at tWQ
thirds. But besides what they pay to the Prince of Satsuma, they raise a
contribution among themselves, to be sent by way of a present, once a year, to
the Tartarian Monarch of China in token of loyalty and submission. They have
like the Tunquinese and Japanese a Dairi of their own, or an Ecclesiastical
Hereditary Monarch, to whom they pay great respect, supposing him to be lineally descended from the Gods of
their Country. He resides at JaXama, one of the chief of these Islands, situate
not far from the Island Osima, which is of the second magnitude.
t. II. Corey, or Cor:ea, is a Peninsula,
which stands out from Tartary, runing towards Japan, opposite to the coasts of
China. It hath been, as the Japanese relate, divided of old into three
Provinces. That which is lowest, and nearest to Japan, is by the Japanese
call'd Tsiosijn, the [063] second, which makes up the middle part of the whole Peninsula,
Corey, and the third and uppermost, which confines upon Tartary, Fakkusai.
Sometimes the name of either of these Provinces is given to the whole
Peninsula. The natives according to the account of the Japanese are of Chinese
extraction. They served often and under different Masters. Their neighbours the
Tartars sometimes enter'd into alliances with them, at other times they invaded
and subdued them. Mikaddo Tsiuu Ai, Emperor of Japan, prosecuted them with war,
but he dying before he could put an end to this enterprize, Dsin Gu his Relict,
a Princess of great parts and personal bravery, pursued it with the utmost
vigour, wearing the arms of the deceas'd Emperor her Husband, till at last she
made them tributary to Japan about the year of Christ t 201. Sometime after
they enter'd into fresh alliances with their neighbours the Tartars, and so
continued unmolested by the Japanese, till Taiko possess'd himsclf of the
Secular throne of Japan. This valiant Princc, reading the histories of his
Empire, found it recorded, that the Coreans had been subdued by one of his prv
decessors and made tributary to Japan: As in the mem time he was but lately
come to the throne, he doubted not, but that he shouId get time fuSly to settle
and to; secure himself in the possession thereof, if he couId send some of the
most powerful Princes of the Empirc ! abroad upon some such military
expedition, and by X means remove them from Court and Country. He thero fore
gladly seiz'd this opportunity, and resolv'd to renew and support his pretensions to the Kingdom of Corea, and through
this kingdom, as he gave out his main design was, to open to himself a way to
the conquest of the great Empire of China it self. Accordingly he sent over
some Ambassador's to Corey, to desire the Natives to acknow ledge the supremacy
of the Japanese Emperor, and to give tokens of their loyalty and submission.
But the Coreans, instead of an answer, killing the Emperor's Ambassador, by
this hostile act gave him just reasons to prosecute them with war. Accordingly
a numerous army was sent over, without further delay, under the command of such
of the Princes of the Empire, whose presence he had the most reason to be
apprehensive of. This war lasted seven years, during which time his Generals
with much a do broke at last through the strong opposition made by the natives,
and their allies the Tartars, and after a brave defence made the Country again
tributary to Japan. Taiko dying about that time, and the army returnings Ijejas
his successor order'd, that they should once in three years send an embassy to
Court, to acknowledge his sovereignty. Since that time they relapsed by degrees
under the domination of the Tartars, and drove the Garrisons Ieft by the
Japanese, down to the very coasts of the Province Tsiosijn, the only thing they
have now remaining of all their conquests in Corea. As things now stand, the
Emperor of Japan seems to be satisfied, for the security of his own dominions,
to be master of the Coasts, [064] the
care and Government whereof he committed to the Prince of the Islands Iki and
Tsusim-a, who keeps there a Garrison only of fifty Men under the command of a
Cap tain, or Bugjo, as they are here call'd. And the Inhabi tants are order'd
to send an embassy to Court, and to take the oath of allegiance and supremacy
only once at the begInning of every new Emperor's Reign. The Coasts of Corea
are about forty eight Japanese Water Leagues, or sixteen German MiIes, distant
from the IsIand of Tsussima, and this as much from the continent of Japan.
Numbers of Rocks and small Islands lie between them, which tho' they be for the most part uninhabited, yet the Tapanese keep
strong Garrisons in some of the chief, to watch what Ships sail by, and to
oblige them to shew what commodities they have on board, as claiming the
sovereignty of those Seas. The Commodities brought from Tsiosijn are the best
Cod, and other Fish, pickled, Wallnuts, sarce medicinal Plants, Flowers and
Roots, particularly the Ninseng, so famous for its exce)lent Virtues, which
grows in great plenty in the Provinces of Corea and Fakusai, as also in
Siamsai, a Province of the neighbouring Tartary; this Plant, tho' it be found
elsewhere, yet that growing in the Provinces abovesaid, is believ'd far to
excel others in Goodness and Virtues. The Natives have also some few
Manufactures. Among the rest, a certain sort of earthen Pots, made in Japij and
Niuke, two Tartarian Provinces, were brought over from thence by the Coreans,
which were much esteem'd by the Japanese, and bought very dear. But of late it
was order'd by the Emperor, that there should be noj more imported for the
future. The Boats made use of 12y the Tsioneese are very bad indiferent
Structures, which one scarce would venture further then Tsussima.
III. Jeso, or Jesogasima, that is the
IsIand of teso, is the most Northern Island, the Jawpanese have in posseF sion
out of their own Empire. It was invaded and conquer'd, as I was inform'd in
Japan, by Joritomo, the first Cubo, or Secular Monarch, who left it to the
Prince of Matsumai, (a neighbouring Island belonging to the great Province
Osiu) to be by him govern'd and taken care of. Same time after, the Inhabitants
weary of a foreign Government, fell upon the Garrison, the Prince of Matsumai
left there, and kill'd them all to a Man. This act of hostility no sooner
reach'd that Prince's ears, but he sent over a good Army with three hundred
Horse, to demand, and ln case of refusal, to take ample satisEactiona and to
chastise the Rebels. But the Prince of Jeso, to prevent further mischievous
consequences, sent over an Embassy to Matsumai, and to take off alLl suspicion
of his having had any intelligence or hand in
the asair, he deliver'd up twenty of the ring-leaders, which were executed, and
their heads impaled, upon the coasts of Jeso. this act of submission entirely
reconcil'd him to his superiors, but the natives being ever since look'd upon as
a stubborn and tumultuous people, strong garrisons are constantly kept upon the
[065] Southern coasts of this Island, to put it out of their power ever
to attempt the like; and the Prince is oblig'd to send once a year, an Embassy
to Matsumai, with presents to the value of one Mangokf. This IsIand lies in 42o
degrees of Northern Latitude, to the N. N. E. right opposite to the great
Province OOsiu, where its two promontories Sugaar and Taajasaki running out
very far into the Sea, form a large Gulph, which directly faces it. The passage
over to this Island is said to be of one day, and it is not to be made at all
times, by reason of the currents, which run strongly, sometimes to the East and
sometimes to the West, tho' otherwise it be but forty Japanese water Leagues,
and in some places not above five or six German Miles distant from the Coasts
of Japan. It is said to be as large as the Island Kiusiu, but so thoroughly
filll of Woods and Forests, that it pro duces nothing, which might be of use to
the Japanese, besides some pelts and furs, which even the Inhabitants of the
Southern parts of Japan have no occasion for. Nor do the Jesoans bring over any
thing else but that, and the famous Fish Karasaki, which is catch'd in great
plenty about the Island, and which the Japanese reckon a great dainty, boiling
and eating it like Cod. As to its figure, I could not gather any thing
positive, neither from the accounts I had from the Japanese, nor from the Maps,
I met with in the Country, they difering much from each other. Some represent
it very near round, others make it of a very irregular figure, with large
Promontories, Gulphs and Bays, the Sea running in several places so far up into
the Country, that one might be easily induc'd to believe it compos'd of several
diferent Islands. I am apt to believe) that the Country discover'd by de Vries,
to the North of Japan, was part of this
IsIand. I took notice that in some of the Japanese Maps, the South west and
larger part is call'd Matsuki, but it was generally speaking so indiferently
drawn, that I should be at a loss to determine, whether it be an Island by it
self, or join'd to the rest. According to the account the Japanese give of the
Inhabitants, they are a strong, but savage, People, wearing long Hair and Beards,
well skill'd in the management of Bows and Arrows, as also in fishing, the
greatest part living almost wholly on Fish. They descrlbe them filrther, as
very dirty and nasty, but the truth of this accusation is not so strictly to be
relied on, since they, the Japanese themselves, are so extreamly nice and
superstitious in frequently washing and cleaning their Bodies, as to have found
the very same fault with the Dutch. The Language of Jedso is said to have some
thing of that, which is spoke in Corea.
renz ofBehind this Island, to the North,
lies the Continent of JClo.OkuJeso, as it is call'd by the Japanese, that is,
upper or high Jeso. That there 1S such a Country is not in the least question'd
among Geographers, but they have not as yet been able to determine, whether it
confines on Tartary, or America, consequently, where they are to place the [066] streight of Anian, or the so long wish'd for passage out of the
North Sea into the great Indian Ocean, suw pos'd that there be such a one, or
whether it is closely join'd either to Tartary, or America, without any inter
mediate streight, or passage at all. I made it my business, both in my travels
through Muscovy and Persia, tgthor'l and during my stay in Japan, to enquire
with all the 1Yta irJto diligence, I was capable of, into the true State of
those *,,fiefNorthern Countries, tho' in the main to very little gt1purpose,
having hardly met with any thing worth the notice of the publick. At Moscow,
and at Astrakan, I spoke to several people, which either in their travels
through Siberia and Kataya into China, or during their stay in Siberia, whither
they had been banish'd by the Czar, and liv'd many years, pick'd up what few
and uncertain informations they could, but
couId learn nothing farther, but that the great Tartary is by an Isthmus, or
Neck of Land, join'd to a neighbouring Continent, which they suppos'd to be
America, and from thence concluded that in aX probability there is no such
thing as a communication between the icy Sea and the Indian Ocean. In a Map of
Siberia, which was made and cut upon wood, by one who was banish'd thither, and
the names of the places mark'd in Sclavonian Characters, there were several
considerable promontories, which from the eastern Coasts stood out into the Sea,
one of which, too great to be brought upon the table, was cut ofF at the edge.
He that shew'd me this Map, told me at the same time, that according to the
accounts which could be procur'd from the Tartars living in those parts, this
very promontory is nothing but an Isthmus, which runs towards a neighbouring
large Continent on which it confines, but that it is compos'd of high, rough,
and almost inaccessible mountains, and that in his opinion, if ever there hath
been a passage there, for the first Inhabitants of the World to get over into
America, and to people that Continent, such another undertaking would be at
present utterly impossible. This Map of Siberia, such as it was, that is
extream ill done, and without any scale of distances, or degrees of Longitude
or Latitude, was yet the first, which could give the Czar of Muscovy, some,
tho' very imperfect, notions of the great extent of his Tartarian Dominions to
the North. And 'tis from the same, my particular Friend, the ingenious Mr.
Winius, who was by the Czar appointed Inspector General over the Apothecaries
and Druggists Shops in Muscovy, made the first rude sketch of his Map of Russia
and Tartary, which he afterwards considerably corrected and augmented by
several accounts procur'd from diferent parts, and withal reduc'd to the
necessary degrees of Longitude and Latitude. He was not a little assisted in
this undertaking by Mr. Spitshary, Greek and Latin Interpreter at the Court at
Muscovy. This tearned and industrious Man was, by the then reigning Monarch of Russia, sent
his Ambassador to the Emperor of China, with secret Orders and Instructions to
spare neither trouble nor expences, to get [067] himself acquainted with the true State, Situation and Extent of
the Czar's Dominions. Accordingly he went to Pekin through the Northern parts
of Russia and Tartary, and having dispatch'd his business at the Court of
China, return'd through the Southern provinces, and came back to Moscow about
the year 1680. During my stay at the Court of Moscow it so happen'd, that he
was to be our Interpreter, which brought me much acquainted with him, and fed
me with no small hopes of learning somewhat new and more particular, than was
hitherto known, about the state of those Countries, but I found him too
distrustful and secret, and very unwilling to communicate, what observations he
made upon his Jourrivolas ney. The late Illustrious Nicolaus Witsen L.L.D. 2nd
Burghermaster at Amsterdam, a person to whom the publick is
greatly indebted, met with much better success in his own Enquiries, for in his
last Embassy to the Court of Muscovy he did, by his extraordinary good conduct,
great learning and aSability, insinuate himself so far into the favour ot the
Czar, and the Grandees of his Court, that whatever accounts they had procured
from all p~~ of Russia, were without reserve communicated to him, > which
enabled him to compose that excellent and accurate map of all the Russian
Empire, and the great Tartary with its Mountains, Rivers, Lakes, Cities and
Provinc", for the most part till then unknown, a work which by reason of
its great usefulness could not but highly obligc: the curious. But however
accurate this map of Doctor Witsen's was which afterwards prov'd very useful
to Mr*; Isbrand Ides, in his Journey by land to China, where hc went
Ambassador, yet the full extent of the Eastern Coasts of Siberia, and the great
Tartary, remains as yet undetermined, and we are still in the dark, as to
what relation they bear to the neighbouring Continent, whidh; is probably that
of Oku Jeso. The Japanese on their side are as IittIe
acquainted with Stroxatl the state and extent of that Country, which lies
behind fthith tht . the Island Jeso Gasima, and which is by them call'd
Oku Jeso. They say only that lt lS 300 Japanese miles long. But
what authority they have to support this assertion, I cannot tell. A Ship
having some years ago been accidentally cast upon the Coasts of that Continent,
they met among the rude and savage Inhabitants some persons clad in fine
Chinese Silk, by which may be very probably conjectured some communication the
Natives have with the neighbouring Daats, or Tartary, at least that these
Countries are not very remote from each other. A Jonk, which was sent thither
on purpose upon discovery, about the year 1684~~ returned after having been
three months upon her voyage, and brought the very same account. An experienc'd
Japanese Pilot, who was well acquainted with the Seas about Japan, as having
been every where round this Empire, upon my enquiry couId give me no other
satisfactory answer, but that between Japan and Jesogasima the Currents run
aRternatively, sometimes East, sometimes West, and that behind Jesogasima, [068] there is only one, which runs constantly, and directly, North,
whence he concluded, that near Daats, so they call Tartary, there must be some
communication with another Sea to the North. A few years ago another Imperial
Jonk was sent out in quest of those Countries. They sail'd from the Eastern
Coasts of Japan, and after many troubles and incommodities enduPd between 4o
and 50 degrees of Northern Latitude, they discover'd a very large Continent,
suppos'd to be America, where having met with a good harbour, they staid there
durinZ the Winter, and so return'd the next year, without any the Ieast account
of that Country, or its Inhabitants, excepting only, that it run filrther to
the North-west. Since that time it was resolv'd at the Court of Japan to be at
no further pain, or expence, about the discovery of those Countries. I was
littIe the better for consulting the-Japanese M3ps of those Seas, tho' r saw
several of them in different places, as at Jedo, in
the palace of Tsussima no Cami, Governor of Nagasaki, in the Temple of Symmios
near Osacca, and in several other Temples. They all represent a large
Continent, which stands out from the great Tartary, and extends it self behind
the Island Jeso gasima, reaching about 15 degrees of Longitude further East,
than the Eastern Coasts of Japan. A large space is left empty between it, and
the neighbouring America. The Country itself is divided into the follow ing
Provinces, mark'd with their common writing Characters, Kabersari, Orankai,
Sitsij, Ferosan and Amarisi. Between the two last Provinces is mark7d a considerable
River, which loses it self into the Sea, behind the Island Jeso to the
South-east. But as all their Maps ; are very indifferently done, without any
scale of distances or degrees, and as besides the Names of the Provinces ab
ovementio n' d are only in their Canna, or common Writing, and not, as
other more authentick Records, in their Slsi, or significant Characters, I
shall leave to the Reader's own Judgment to determine, how much there is to be
depended upon them. And this is all I could learn in Japan about the State of
those Countries, which lie to the North of this Empire.|
Before I leave off this general
Geographical Descriw tion of the Japanese Empire, I must not forget to mention
rdtwo other Islands, which lie filrther of to the East, or rlan~~. E. N. E. of
the Coasts of Osiu, at least at 150 Miles distance, but as the Japanese
pretend, belong to their Empire. They have given them very high sounded Names,
the smaller, more Northern, and more remote from Japan, being call'd Ginsima,
the Silver Island, the larger, and nearer Kinsima, the Gold Island. They keep their state and situation very secret from all Foreigners, chiefly the
Europeans, for as much as their rich Names have already tempted them to go in
quest thereof. The King of Spain having been inform'd that they lie West
wards of America, in that part of the World, which by the Pope's division was
assign'd to him, as all those Lands, which should be discover'd from the
East, were to the King of Portugal, sent [069] out
a very expert Pilot to look for them about the year 1620. But this voyage
prov'd unsuccessful. The Dutch attempted the same at diferent times with no
better success. They fitted out one ship for that purpose at Batavia in 1639,
and two others in 1643) which had orders to go further, and to attempt the
discovery of the Coasts of Tartary and America. The voyage of these two ships,
one of which was call'd Bresken, the other the Castrecoom, prov'd very unfortunate. For besides that they suSePd much by Storms, the Captain of the Bresken
having hazarded himself on shore, with some of his ship's company, in a port of
Japan lying under the 40 Degree of Northern Latitude, they were all seiz'd
upon, put in Irons, carried Prisoners to Jedo, and so barbarously treated, as
if their intention had been to betray or to invade the Empire.
About the year 1675, the Japanese
accidentally discover'd a very large Island, one of their Barks having NcwI
lagd been forc'd there ln a Storm from the Island Fatsisio, from which they
computed it to be 300 Miles distant towards the East. They met with no
Inhabitants, but found it to be a very pleasant and fruitful Country, well
supplied wsth fresh water, and furnished with plenty of plants and trees,
particularly the ArrackTree, which however might give room to conjecture, that
the Island laZ rather to the South of Japan, than to the East, these trees
growing only in hot Countries. They call'd it Bunesima, or the Island Bune, and
because they found no Inhabitants upon it, they mark'd it with the character of
an uninhabited Island. On the shores they found an incredible quantity of Fish
and Crabs, some of which were from tour to six foot long.
Fatsisio, I just now had occasion to
mention, or Fatsisio Isza;nd Gasima, which is as much as to say, the Eighty
Fathom Fatli io. Island, lS the most remote Isiand the Japanese have in
possession Southward. It lies under the same Meridian with Jedo, and is
re>*on'd to be about So Japanese Water- leagues distant from the Continent of
Japan, being the furthermost of a long row of small Islands, almost contiguous
to each other. It is the chief Ishnd, where the great Men of the Emperor's
Court, when out of favour, are usually confined, pursuant to a very ancient
custom, and kept prisoners on a rocky Coast, from the extraordinary height of
which the whole Island hath borrosvid its name. As long as they continue on
this Island, they must work for their livelyhood. Their chief amusement is
weavings and some of the silk stuffs wrought by them, as they are generallxv
Men of ingenuity and good understanding, are so inimitably fine, that the
Emperor hath forbid under severe penalties, to export, or to sell them to
foreigners. This Island, besides it being wash'd by a rough tempestuous Sea,
is so well guarded by nature itself, that when there is some provision of the
common necessaries of life, or some new Prisoners to be brought in, or the
guard to be reliev'd, the whole Boat, with all the lading, must [070] be
drawn up, and again Iet down by a crane, the coasts being so steep and rocky,
as to admit of no other access.
Chap. V. The Division and Subdivision of the Empire of Japan into
its several Provinces; as also of; its Revenue and Government.
FN the general Geographical Description of
Japan, which I have laid down in the preceding Chapter, I took notice that this
Empire hath been divided into seven great Tracts of Land, which were again
sub-divided into 68 considerable Provinces, and these into 604 smaller
Districts, or Counties, as one might caH them. I pro ceed now more particularly
to consider the largeness, L extent? fertility, produce, and revenues of each
Province, as I found them in a Japanese description
of this Empire, publish'd in Japan, by the title of Sitzi Jossu.
But before I proceed to a particular
consideration of the seven large Tracts of Land, which the Empire of Japan hath
been divided into, and of their several Provinces, I shall take notice of the
Gokinai, or Gokinai goka Kokf, that is the five Provinces of the Imperial revenues,
so call'd, because all the revenue, of these five provinces is particularly
appropriated for the support and maintenance of the Imperial Court. They amount
to 148 Man, and 1200 Kokf of Rice. The Reader is desir'd to observe in general,
that all the revenues in this Country are reduc'd to these two measures in
Rice. A Man contains 10000 Kokf, and a Kokf 3000 bales or bags of Rice. These
five Imperial Provinces are I. Jamasijro, otherwise Jamasijro: It is a large and
fruitlil Country. Its Iength from South to North is a hundred Japanese Miles;
and there are several good towns and other places of note within its compass.
It is divided into 8 districts, Otokuni, Kadono Okongi, Kij, Udsi, Kusse,
Sakanaka, and Tsukugi. 2. Jamatto, or WOsju, is likewise a very good Country,
and much of the same length with the former going from South to North. It had
formerly several places of note within its compass, which are at present
reduced to a very small number. It is divided into 15 districts, Soono Cami,
Soonosimo, Feguri, Firole, Katzu-Dsiau, Katsunge, Okuno Umi, Utz, Josino, Uda,
SIki no Simo, SIki no Cami, Takaiidz, Tooidz and Jammanobe. 3. Kawatzij, Or
Kasiu, a tolerable good Country, about two days Journeys in length, and divided
into 15 districts. Nistori Isikawa, Fukaitz, Jaskabe, Ookake, Tukajatz, Kawatz,
Sarara, Umbarada, Katanno, Wakaje, Sibukaja, Sick, [071] Tanbokf, and Tannan. 4. Idsumi, or Sensju, is a very large
Country, but indiferently fruitful. Its length is an hundred Japanese miles
from South to West. It is border'd on one side by the Sea, on the other by a
ridge of high Mountains. It is plentifillly supplied with Fish by the
neighbouring Sea: It produces also some buck-wheat, rice, pease and beans, though but
few, and not of the best sort. It hath but 3 smaller districts, Ootori, Idsume,
and Fine. 5. Sitzu, otherwise Tsinokuni, and Sisju. It hath two days Journey
and a half in circum ference. It is the furthermost Country Brestwards on a
large GuIph. The Southern parts of it are very warm, but the Northern colder,
and abound more in what they call GoKokf, which are the five chief sorts of
pease eat in this Country. It aSords also some fish, and salt, and is in the
main a very good Country. It is divided into 13 districts, Sij Jos, or Symmios,
Kutatz, Fingassinai, Nisijnari, Jatsan, Simasimo, Simakami, Tesijma, Kawa nobe,
Muko, Awara, Arima, and Nosje.
I proceed now to the Vll. Iarge tracts of
Land, which tofLand. the Japanese Empire hath been divided into by the Emperor
Siusiun.
I. The first
is Tookaido, that is, the South Eastern Tract. I have observed above, that the
said seven large tracts have been by the Emperor Tenmu further divided into 68
Provinces, the five Provinces above mention'd in cluded, to which some hundred
years after two more were added. The Tookaido consists of 15 of these 68
Provinces, which are I. Iga, otherwise Isju, which is limited on the South and
East by the Sea. To the North it is separated from the neighbouring Provinces
by a ridge of high mountains. It is a hot Country, but indifferently fruitful,
producing some PIants, Trees and Bambous. It is divided into four districts,
Aije, Namanda, Iga and Nabari. 2. Isie, otherwise Sesju, is three day's
Journeys long, going from South to North. It is almost wholly q encompass'd by
the Sea, but extreamly fruitful, with an | agreeable variety of hills and
plains. It is divided into 15 districts, 'Quana, Asaki, Susuka, Itsisi,
Aanki, Taato, NisIkissima, Gosasuma, Inabe, Mije, Ano, Itaka,Watakei, Ino, and
Taki. 3. Ssima or, Sisio, is but a small Pro-V vince, which one may travel
a-cross in half a day's time. It is a very barren Country, but the neighbouring
Sea : supplies it pIentifully with fish, oysters, shells and the like. It hath but three districts, Toosij, Ako, and Kamesima. 4.
Owari, otherwise Bisiu, is an inland Countra, entirely separate from the Sea,
but one of the most fruitful Provinces of the whole Empire, and richly stock'd
with Inhabitants. It is three day's Journeys long, going from South to North,
and divided into nine districts Amabe, Nakassima, Kaquuri, Nirva, Kassungale,
Jamada, Aitsi, Tsitta, and toosijnossima. 5. Mikawa, Otherwise Misiu, is a very
barren and poor Country, with too many shallow Rivers and Ponds, which are very
prejudicial to the growth of the GoKokf. It is one day's Journey and a haS
long, going from East to West, and [072] divided into eight districts, Awoumi, Kamo, Nukada, Batz, Fori,
Jana, Tsitarra, and Akumi. 6. Tootomi, otherwise Jensju, a very good and
fruitful Country, and one of the pleasantest Provinces for a curious variety of
Hills, Rivers, fertile Plains, Towns and Villages. Its length is suppos'd to be
two days Journey and a half, going fFom East to West, and it is divided into I4
distrlcts, Fammana, Futz, Fuusa, Aratama, Nangakami, Nagassimo, Sutz, Jammana,
Kikoo, Faifara, Tojota, Jamaka, Sanno, and Jwata. 7. Surunga, or Siusju,
deserves likewise to be commended for the variety of its Towns, Vilfages, HitIs
and fruitful Plains. It is of the same length with Tootomi, going from East to
West, and divided into seven districts, Tsta, Masiasu, Udo, Itabe, Rofarra,
Fusij and Suringa. 8. Kai, otherwise Kaisiu, and Ksjoohu. is a flat Country,
and abounds in Rice, Fields and Pasturage, Plants and Trees. It breeds also
some Cattle, chiefly Horses. It is two days Journeys long from South to North,
and divided into four districts, Jamanassiro, Jaatzsiro, Coma and Tsur. 9.
Idsu, or ToOsju, a long Peninsula, being almost surrounded by the Sea It
affords a Iarge quantity of salt, and all sorts of fish, and is reckon'd in the
main a tolerable good Country. It is pretty mountainous, with some flat ground,
and some few rice fields. It hath but 3 districts upon the Continent of Nipon,
Takato, Naka, and Camo, whereto are added two neighbouring Islands, OOsima, and Firaka- sima. 10.
Sangami or SOOsiu, is three days Journe>-s long, a flat and barren Country,
which affords hardly any thing for the sustenance of human life, but Tortesses,
Fish and Crabs from the Sea, besides a good quantity of timber out of its large
woods. It is divided into 8 districts Asikaranno Cami, Asikaranno Simu, Oosimi,
Juringi, Ajikoo Takangi, Camakura, Mijura, and gesima. 11 Musasi, or Busiu, a
very large Province having five days Journeys, and a half, in circumference. It
is a flat Country, without woods and mountains, but very fruitful, abounding in
Rice, GoKokf, Garden fruits, and Plants. It is divided into 21 districts, which
are Kuraggi, Tsukuki, Tama, Tatsinbana, Kaikura, Iruma, Tosma, Fijki, Jokomi,
Saitama, Kodama, Tsibu Sima, Fabara, Fasisawa, Naka, Kami, Adats, Tsitsubu,
Jebara, Totesima, and Oosato. 12. Awa, otherwise FOOsiu, a middling good
Country with mountains, hills, rivers, and plains, affording both rice and
corn; It is tolerably well inhabited and plentifully supplied by the
neighbouring Sea with fish and oysters, whose shells the inhabitants make use
of to manure their ground. It is one day's Journey and a half long from South
to North and divided into four districts, Fekuri, Awa, Asaima, and Nakaba. 13.
Kadsusa, otherwise KoOsju is 3 days Xourneys long, going from South to North, a
tolerable good Countr~~r, t-hough not without high rough mountains, great
numbers of the Inhabitants get their livelyhood by weaving of Cannib, or
Hempstuffs, which they understand very well. It is divided into ll districts,
Ssussu, Amafa, Itsuwara, Umingami, Foiko, Mooki, Issimi, Farinib, Nagawa,
Jammanobe, and [073] Mussa. 14. Simoosa, otherwise SeOsju, is said to be three day's
journeys long going from South to North, a mountainous Country, indiferently
fruitfill, but abounding in Fowis and Cattle. It is divided into 12 districts,
Kaddosilmaw Tsibba, Imba, Sooma, Sasjuma, Iuuki Tooda, Koosa, Unagami, Katori,
Fannibu, and Okanda. 15. Fitats, or Sjoo, a very large Province; my Author makes it almost square, and says that it is three day's
Journeys long on each side. It is but a middling Country, as to its
fruitfulness, but produces a great qualltity of Silkworms and Silk, of which
there are several Manufactures establish'd there, as there are also of some
other Things, the inhabitants being a very industrious people. They likewise
carry on a trade with Cattle. It hath I I districts, Nijbari, Makaije,
Tsukkumba, Kawaats, Ssida, Umbaraki, Namingata, Naka, Kussi, Taka, and Iengoko.
Iengoko signifies a distant Country, by which is probably meant some
neighbouring Island. The revenues of these 15 Provinces of the first large
Tract call'd Tookaido, amount in all to 494 ManKokf.
ll .
Toosando, that is, the Eastern mountainous Tract, hath 8 large Provinces within
its compass, which are I . Oomi, an extraordinary
good and fruitful Country, with variety of mountains, hills, rivers and
fruitfill fields, producing both rice and corn, and affording to the Labourer a
thousand-fold reward, (according to my Japanese Author's way of expressing the
fruitfillness of; this Country). It hath three day's Journeys and a half in
circumference, and is divided into 13 districts, Singa, Karimotto, Ius, Cammoo,
Kansaki, Inungami, Sakatta, Jetz, the upper and lower Assai, Imito, Takassima,
Kooka and Joositzumi. 2. Mino, or DiOsiu, is not
inferior to the former, neither in an agreeable variety of hills and plains,
nor in fertility, producing plenty of Rice, Corn, and GoKokf, and other
necessaries of Iife. It is three day's Journeys long from South to North, and
divided into 18 districts, Isijntsu, Fufa, Awadsi, Ikenda, Oono, Mottos,
Mussijroda, Katakata, Atsumi, Kakumi, Iamangata, Muggi, Guundsjo, Camo, Cako,
Tokki, Jenna, and Taki. 3. Fida, otherwise Fisju, falls far short of the two
former, both in largeness, and fertility. Its utmost extent from South to North
doth not exceed two days travelling. It abounds in woods and forests, and
yields a great quantity of Firewood, and Timber for buildings. It hath but four
districts, Ofarra, Masijnda, Ammano, and Araki.
4. Sinano,
otherwise Sinsju, a very cold Country. ~~1t and fish are very scarce here,
because of its great remote ness from the Sea; and it is not well provided with
Cattle, by reason of its few pastures It is otherwise tolerably fruitful, and
produces a good quantity of Mulberry trees, Silk, and Cannib, of which there
are several good manufactures establish'd there. It is said to be five day's
Journeys long from South to North, and is divided into I I districts, Midsutz,
Takaij, Fannissina, Tsisagatta, Sacku, Ina, Ssuwa, Tsikumma, Atsumi, Sara and
Sijna. 5. Koodsuke, otherwise DsiOsju, is [074] four day's Journeys long, going from East to West, a warm and
tolerable good Country, producing plenty of Mulberry-trees, though the Silk,
they yield, is not of the best sort, and the Stuffs brought from thence but
coarse. It is divided into I4 districts, Ussui,Aassa, Ssikanne, Ssetta,Sai,
Nitta, Kattaoka, Soora, Gumma, Kanva, Tago, Midorino, Naba, and Jammada. 6. Simoodsuke, or Jasiu, is three day's Journeys and a half, long,
going from East to West, a tolerable good Country, not very mountainous, but
rather flat, with abundance of Pasture-ground and Rice-fields, which
plentifully supply it with Grass, Rice, Corn, and the GoKokf. It hath g
districts, Askara, Janada, Aso, Tsuga, Taka, Sawingawa, Suwooja, Nasu, and
Mukabe. 7. Mutsu, or OOsju, is by much the Iargest Province in Japan, being
full 16 day's Journeys long from South to North. It is an extraordinary good
and Eruitful Country, and wants nothing for the support of human life. This
whole Province was formerIy subject to one Prince, together with the
neighbouring Province Dewa, of which more hereafter. It is divided into 54 (and
according to others 55) districts, Sijrakawa, Kurokawa, Juwasi, Mijaki, Aitz,
Nama, Oda, ASaka, Adatz, Sibatta, Karida, Tooda, Natori, Sinnobu, Kikkunda,
Sibanne, Assonusa, Namin gata~~ Iwadewaga, Kawatz, Fitzungi, Takano, Wattari,
Tamadsukuri, Oonat-o, Kami, Ssida, Kuriwara, Jesan, Jeki, Misawa, Nagaooka,
Tojone, Monowara, Oosika, Gunki, Kaddono, Fasikani, Tsungaru, Uda, Iku, Motojes, Isbara, Taidsi, Sikamma, Inaga,
Siwa, Ivasaki, Kimbara, Kadsinda, Datte, Socka, Fei, and Kisen. 8 Dewa,
otherwise Usju, is five day's Xourneys long, a very good Country, abounding in
good pasture-ground, plants, and trees. It is said to have the Spring 15 days
earlier than other Provinces. It belong'd fHormerly to Osju, but lS now a
separate Province, divided into I 2 districts Akumi, Kawanobe, Murajama,
Oitama, Ookatz, Firaka, Tangaira, Diwa, Akinda tauri, Senboku, Mogumi, and
Jamamottu. Ale the revenues of these 8 Provinces amount to 563 Mangokf,
according to the old Rentals, but at present they are considerably improv'd
lll. Foku Rokkudo, that is, the Northern
Tract, hath 7 Provinces within its compass. I. Wackasa otherwise SiakusJu, is
one day's Journey, and a half, long, going from South to North. It is limited
to the North by the Sea, which pIentifully supplies it with Fish, Crabs,
Tortoises and the like. It hath some Iron-mines, and is divided into three
districts, Oonibu, Ooi, and Micatta. 2* Jetsissen, otherwise Jeetsju. Its
Iength from South to North is of three days travelling. It is very mountainous
towards the South, but more flat and fruitfill to the North, with abundance of
good Pasture-ground, where the Inhabitants breed plenty of Cattle. It produces
also Cannib, Mulberry-trees, and Silk, and the GoKokf very pRentifully. It is
divided into 12 districts, Tsuruga, Nibu, Imadats, Asijba, Oono, Sakai, Kuroda,
Ikingami, Takakida, Joosdsida, Sakagita, and Naandsjo. 3. Kaga, otherwise [075] Kasju, is two day's Journeys, and a half, long, going from East to
West, a tolerabIe good Country, yielding as much of the GoKokf as is necessary
for the sustenance of the Inhabitants. Some Silk manufactures are carried on
here, and it aSords the best vinegar Sacki, and Soja, which are exported into
other Provinces. It hath 4 districts, Jenne, Nomi, Isikawa, and Kanga, to which
some add Kaboku. 4. Noto, otherwise SeOsju, is a sort of a Peninsula, almost
wholly encompass'd by the Sea, and on this account plentifitlly supplied with
fish and [122-124]
warm, Tract, is compos'd of eight
Provinces, which are. I. Farima, otherwise Bansju, hath three days Journey's
and a half in circumference, a very fruitful Country, producing in plenty all
manner of necessaries. It hath several manufactures of Silk-stuSs, Paper and
Cloth. It is divided into fourteen districts, Akas, Kata, Kamo, Inami, Sikama,
Iwo, Akato, Saijo, Sitz, Kansaki, Taka, Mitzubo, Issai, and Itto. 2. MimaSaka,
otherwise Sakusju, is three day's Xourneys long, going from East to West, a
middling good Country,afording as much Fruits, Plants, Victuals, and Cloth as
is necessary for the support of its Inhabitants. It is observ'd, as somewhat
remarkable, that this Province is less subject to Winds, than any other in the
Empire. It is divided into seven districts, Aida, Katzunda, Tomanisi,
Tomafigasi, Khume, Ooba, and Masuma. 3. Bidsen, or Bisju, hath three day's
Journeys in circumference, a middling good Country, producing plenty of Silk.
Its Soil is pretty warm, and the produce of the fields and gardens are observ'd
to ripen earlier, than in other Provinces. It is divided into ll districts Kosuma,
Waki, Iwanasi, Ooku, AkoSaka, Kandatz, Minne, Ooas, Tsitaka, TsingOsima, and
KamOsima 4. Bitsju, otherwise Fisin, is one day's Journey, and a half, long,
going from East to West, a very good Coun -try, plentifulRy supply'd with all
the necessaries of life. The GoKokf and Cannib in particular are extreamly
cheap here. It is divided into 9 districts, Utz, Kaboja, Kaija, Simomitz,
Assanguts, [077] Oda, Sitzuki, Teta and Fanga, to which are added two Islands
SaburOsima, and Jorisima. 5. Bingo, otherwise Fisju, is somewhat more than two
day's Journeys long, going from South to North, a middling good Country,
plentifully supplied with Rice and GoKokf, which are likewise observ'd to ripen
here: much earlier, than they do elsewhere. It is divided into I4 districts,
Abe, Futsitz, Kamijsi, Asuka, Numasinıi, Bonitz, Asijda, Kooni, Mikami,
Camidami, Mitsuki, Jesso, Sirra, and Mijwara. 6. Aki, otherwise Gesju, is two
day's lourneys, and a half, long, going from South to North, a mountainous and barren Country.
Upon thel690 Coasts they make Salt. Corn, Rice, and GoKokf will hardly grow
here, but it abounds with woods and forests, which aford plenty of mushrooms.
It is divided into 8. districts, Numada, Takatta, Tojoda, Sada, Cammo, Sabaku,
Aki, Takamija, and IkuKussima, which last is the name of a place particularly
famous in this Province. 7. Suwo or SeOsju, is three day's Journeys long, going
from East to West, a middling good Country, abounding chiefly in pIants and
good pasture ground. The Coasts aSord as much fish, Crabs, shells and other
submarine substances as any other Province whatever. It is divided into six
districts OOsimaX Kuka, Kunlade, Tsino, Sawa, and Jooski. 8. Nagata, otherwise
TsiOsju, is two day's Journeys, and a half, long, from East to West, a middling
good Country limited to the South and West by the Sea, to the North by a ridge
of mountains. It produces GoKokf, Fish, Crabs, and other necessaries twice as
much as there is requisite for the maintenance of the Inhabitants. It is
divided into six districts, Atsa, Tojora, Mine, Ootz, Amu, and Misijma. The
whole yearly revenue of these eight provinces amounts to a70. Mangokf.
Alt the several tracts of Land, Provinces
antl districts, hitherto mention'd, belong to the great Island Nipon. I proceed
now to the second Island, which is next to Nipon in Iargeness, and which is by
the Japanese call'd Kiusju, the Western Country, and SaiKokf the Country of
nine. This-oSers to our view the
VI. great tract of Land call'd, Saikaido,
that is, the Western Coast Tract. It is compos'd of nine large Provinces. I.
Tsikudsen, otherwise Tsikusiu, is from South to North four day's Journeys long,
a middIing good Country, producing both Corn and Rice. It hath several
Chinaware manufactures, and is divided into 2^$ districts, Sima, Kama,
Jassijka, NOsima, Mikasa, Monagatta, Onka, Musiroda, Fonami, Sara, Naka,
Cassija, Siaka, Musima, Ito, Musijro, Vutz, Kurande, NokOsima, Sinotz,
Kasakura, Kamitzkasakura, Kokuf, and TAssai. 2. Tsikungo, [126-122]
crabs. It hath several Iron-mines, but not
much good ground, and the GoKokf ripen considerably later, than in other
Provinces. It is two day's Journeys, and a half, Iong, going from East to West,
and is divided into four districts Bagui, Noto, Fukeesund, and Ssus. 5.
Jeetsju, otherwise Jaessju, hath three day's Journeys in circumference, a
tolerable good Country, pretty well supplied with GoKokf. A particular sort of
earthen pots is made here. It affords also some wood, which is made use of
particularlLy for bridges. It is divided into four districts, Tonami, Imidsu,
Mebu, and Nijkawa. 6. Jetsingo, otherwise Jeesju, a large Province, having six
day's Jour neys in circumference. It is very mountainous to the South,
otherwise tolerably fruitful, producing Silk, Cannib, and the GoKokf, though
not of the best sort. It is divided into seven districts, KabIki, Kof, Missima,
Iwoodsi, Cambara, Nutari, and Iwafilne. 7. Sado, or Sasju, a pretty large
Island of three day's Journeys and a half in circumference, situate to the
North of Japan, just over against the two Provinces Jeetsju and Jetsingo. It is
a very fruitful Island, plentifully supplied with Corn, Rice, and GoKokf. It
hath also some Woods and good Pasture-ground. The Sea affords Fish, and Crabs.
It is divided into three districts, Umo, Soota, and Camo. The yearly revenue of
these seven Provinces amounts to 243 Mangokf.
IV. Sanindo,
that is, the Northern mountainous, or .cold Tract, consists of eight Provinces.
1. Tanba, other wise Tansju, is two day's Journeys
long, a middling good Country, producing plenty of Rice, besides several sorts
of Pease and Pulse. It affords also some Fire-wood, and is divided into six
districts, Kuwada, Funaji, Taki, Amada, Fingami, and Ikarunga. 2. Tango, otherwise Tansju, is one day's Journey and a half broad,
going from South to North, likewise a middling good Country, where Silk and
Cannib may be had at a very easy rate. It is plentifully supplied by the Sea
with fish, crabs and the like. It is divided into five districts, Kaki, Joki, ;Tango, Katano, and Kumano. 3. Tasima,
otherwise Tansju, is two day's Journeys long, going from East to West, a
middling good Country, much like the two former, and divided into eight
districts, Asami, Jabu, Idsu, Ketta, Kinnosaki, Flangaka, Sitzumi, and Mikummi.
4. Imaba, otherwise Insju, is much of the same
length and degree of fruitfuiness with Tasima. It is limited to the North by
the Sea, and on the South by a ridge of Moun- . tains. It hath several
Manufactures of coarse Silk Stus, and is [076] divided into seven Provinces, Togomi, Jagami, Tsidsu, Oomi,
Takaguso, Ketta, and Konno. 5. Fooki, otherwise
Fakusju, is two day's Journeys, and a half, tong, going from South to North, a
middling good Country, producing plenty of GoKokf, Cannib, and Silk, of which
last there are several good Manufactures carried on here. It is divided into
six districts, Kawamura, Kume, Jawata, Aneri, Oomi and Fino. 6. Idsumo, Otherwise Unsju, is two day's Journeys, and a half, broad,
going from East to West, almost wholly encompass'd by the Corean Sea, after the
manner of a Peninsula. It is a very fruitful Country, producing variety of
Trees, Grass, and Plants. It hath also some Manufactures of coarse silk stuSs.
It is divided into ten districts, IJu, Nomi, Semane, Akisika, Tattenni, Jadsumo,
Kanto, Ijis, Ninda and Oofara. 7. Iwami,
otherwise Sekisju, is two day's Journeys long going from South to North, a
middling good Country, producing plenty of Cannib, and aSording some Salt. The
Inhabitants give twice as much a year to their Prince, as they do in other
Provinces. It is divided into five districts, Tsikama, Naka, Oots, Mino and
Canoab. 8. Oki otherwise Insju, an Island
erected into a Province, and situate in the Corean Sea, opposite to the Coasts
of that Peninsula. It is a very barren Country, producing a few GoKokf. It hath
two day's Journeys in circumf~erence, and is divided into five districts. All
the yearly Revenues of these eight Provinces amount to Mangokf.
V. Sanjodo, that is, the Southern
mountainous, or warm, Tract, is compos'd of eight Provinces, which are. I. Farima, otherwise
Bansju, hath three days Journey's and a half in circumference, a very fruitful
Country, producing in plenty all manner of necessaries. It hath several
manufactures of Silk-stuSs, Paper and Cloth. It is divided into fourteen
districts, Akas, Kata, Kamo, Inami, Sikama, Iwo, Akato, Saijo, Sitz, Kansaki,
Taka, Mitzubo, Issai, and Itto. 2. MimaSaka, otherwise Sakusju, is three day's
Xourneys long, going from East to West, a middling good Country,afording as
much Fruits, Plants, Victuals, and Cloth as is necessary for the support of its
Inhabitants. It is observ'd, as somewhat remark able, that this Province is
less subject to Winds, than any other in the Empire. It is divided into seven
districts, Aida, Katzunda, Tomanisi, Tomafigasi, Khume, Ooba, and Masuma. 3.
Bidsen, or Bisju, hath three day's Journeys in circumference, a middling good
Country, producing plenty of Silk. Its Soil is pretty warm, and the produce of
the fields and gardens are observ'd to ripen earlier, than in other Provinces.
It is divided into ll districts Kosuma, Waki, Iwanasi, Ooku, AkoSaka, Kan datz,
Minne, Ooas, Tsitaka, TsingOsima, and KamOsima 4. Bitsju, otherwise Fisin, is
one day's Journey, and a half, long, going from East to West, a very good Coun
-try, plentifulRy supply'd with all the necessaries of life. The GoKokf and
Cannib in particlllar are extreamly cheap here. It is divided into 9 districts,
Utz, Kaboja,; Kaija, Simomitz, Assanguts, [077] Oda, Sitzuki, Teta and Fanga, to which are added two Islands
SaburOsima, and Jorisima. 5. Bingo, otherwise
Fisju, is somewhat more than two day's Journeys long, going from South to
North, a middling good Country, plentifully supplied with Rice and GoKokf,
which are likewise observ'd to ripen here: much earlier, than they do
elsewhere. It is divided into districts, Abe, Futsitz, Kamijsi, Asuka,
Numasimi,; Bonitz, Asijda, Kooni, Mikami, Camidami, Mitsuki, Jesso, Sirra, and
Mijwara. 6. Aki, otherwise Gesju, is two day's lourneys, and a half, long,
going from South ;
[125] to
North, a mountainous and barren Country. Upon the Coasts they make Salt. Corn,
Rice, and GoKokf will hardly grow here, but it abounds with woods and forests,
which aford plenty of mushrooms. It is divided into 8. districts, Numada,
Takatta, Tojoda, Sada, Cammo, Sabaku, Aki, Takamija, and IkuKussima, which last
is the name of a place particularly famous in this Province. 7. Suwo or SeOsju, is three day's Journeys long, going from East to
West, a middling good Country, abounding chiefly in pIants and good pasture
ground. The Coasts aSord as much fish, Crabs, shells and other submarine
substances as any other Province whatever. It is divided into six districts
OOsimaX Kuka, Kunlade, Tsino, Sawa, and Jooski. 8. Nagata, otherwise TsiOsju,
is two day's Journeys, and a half, long, from East to West, a middling good
Country limited to the South and West by the Sea, to the North by a ridge of
mountains. It produces GoKokf, Fish, Crabs, and other necessaries twice as much
as there is requisite for the maintenance of the Inhabitants. It is divided
into six districts, Atsa, Tojora, Mine, Ootz, Amu, and Misijma. The whole
yearly revenue of these eight provinces amounts to a70. Mangokf.
Alt the several tracts of Land, Provinces
antl districts, hitherto mention'd, belong to the great Island Nipon. I proceed
now to the second Island, which is next to Nipon in Iargeness, and which is by
the Japanese call'd Kiusju, the Western Country, and SaiKokf the Country of
nine. This-oSers to our view the
VI. great
tract of Land call'd, Saikaido, that is, the Western Coast Tract. It is
compos'd of nine large Provinces. Tsikudsen, otherwise Tsikusiu, is from South
to North four day's Journeys long, a middIing good Country, producing both Corn
and Rice. It hath several Chinaware manufactures, and is divided into 2^$
districts, Sima, Kama, Jassijka, NOsima, Mikasa, Monagatta, Onka, Musiroda,
Fonami, Sara, Naka, Cassija, Siaka, Musima, Ito, Musijro, Vutz, Kurande,
NokOsima, Sinotz, Kasakura, Kamitzka sakura, Kokuf, and TAssai. ~~. Tsikungo, otherwise Tsikusju, is from South to Morth five day's Journeys long,
a tolerable good Country producing corn, rice and pease in great plenty; The
Coasts aflTord fish, crabs and shelis. A great deal of sweetmeat is made here
and exported into other Provinces. It is divided into IO districts, Mijwara,
Mij, Ikwa, Mi, Mike, Kandsima, SimodLsima, Jammacando, Jammaseta, and Takeno.
3. Budsen, or FoOsju, is four day's Journeys
long [078] from South to North, a tolerable good Country, particularly famous
for producing extraordinary good medicinal plants. Great numbers of Silk
manufactures are carried on in this Province, some of which the Prince takes in
part of payment for his Revenue. It is divided into 8 districts, Tanpwa, Sakku,
Mijako, Nakatz, TsuIki, Kamitzki, Simotzkl, and Usa'. 4. Bungo, otherwise
FoOsju, is three day's Journeys long middling fruitil. It affords silk from its
Mulberry-trees, cloth, hemp, GoKokf, and some scarce medicinal plants. It is
divided into 8. districts, Fita, Kees, Nawori, Oono, Amabe, Ookata, Faijami and
Kunisaki. 5. Fidsen, otherwise Fisju, is from South to North full five day's
Journeys long, a good, and middling fruitful, Country, besides the produce of
corn and rice, pIentifully stored with fish and fowls. It hath also some Cloth
manufactures, and is divided into 11. districts, Kickij, Jabu, Mine, Ooki,
Kansoki, Saaga, Maatsura, Kissima, Fusitz, Kadsuraki and Takaku. 6. Figo
otherwise Fisju hath about five day's Journeys in circumference, a middling
fruitful Country, aSording pIenty of firewood, and wood for building, as also
corn, pease, fish, crabs, and other necessaries, as much as will supply the
want of the Inhabitants. It is divided into fourteen districts, Tamana, Jamaga,
Jamamatto, Kikutz, Aso, Takuma, Kuma, Aida MasIki, Udo, Jaadsiro, Koos,
Amakusa, and Asskita. 7. Fiugo, otherwise NisJu,
is about three day's Journeys long, a poor Country, mountainous, and producing
hardly what corn, rice, and fruits are necessary for the sustenance of its
Inhabitants; some few Mulberry trees grow there. It is divided into five
districts, Uski, Koiju, Saka, MijaSaka, and Morokata. 8. Oosumi, otherwise
GusJu, is from East to West two day's Journeys long, a smal0, but fruitful
province, plentifully supplied with all the necessaries of life, partlcuIarIy
such as the Sea aSords. There is a great quantity of Paper made here, and some
few silk stuITs. It divided into eight districts, Oosumi, FiSingari, Kuwabara,
Soo, Sijra Kimodsuki, Komadsij, and Kumagge, to which is added the neighbouring
Island Tanegasima. 9. Satzuma, or Satsju, is
much of the same length with the former, middling fruitful, producing chiefly
MuIberrytrees and hemp. It hath a I^ew cloth manufactures, but the cloth is
very good. It can filrnish other Provinces with Hemp. It is divided into
fourteen districts, Idsumi Takaki, Satzuma, Feki, Isa, Ala, Kawanobe, Jene,
Juumaki, Fire, Fani, Jamma, OkinokOsima, and Kosskisima. The yearly revenue of
these nine Provinces amounts to 344 Mangokf.
An Island of the third magnitude, which
lies between the two former, and is by the Japanese call'd SiKokf, that 1S, the
Country of four, viz. Provinces, together with the neighbouring Island Awadsi,
situate to the N. E. of SiKokf, and the great Province Kijnokuni, which stands
out from the Continent of Nipon, make up the seventh large Tract of Land, which
is by the Japanese call'd [079]
Vll.
Nankaido, that is, the Tract of the Southern Coasts.
It is compos'd of the six following Provinces. 1. Kijnokuni, otherwise Kisju,
is four day's Journeys, and a half, long, going from South to lforth, a flat
and barren Country, wash'd by the Sea, on three sides and producing neither
corn and rice, nor pease and pulse. It is divided into seven districts, Ito, Naka,
Nagusa, Amabe, Arida, Fitaka, and Muro. 2. Awadsi, an Island of about a day's
Journey in length, in the main very barren, aSording however cloth, fish, and
salt, as much as there is necessary for the maintenance of the Inhabitants. It
hath but two districts, Tsina and Mijwara, to which are added two of the chief
neighbouring Islands Mussima and Jesima. q. Awa? otherwise Asju, is two day's
Journeys long, a
[128] middling good Country, somewhat mountainous, and plentifully stor'd
with cattle, fowl, fish, crabs and shells. It is divided into nine districts,
Miosi, Ojen, Nafingasi, Nanisi, Katsura, Naka, Itano, Awa, and Mima. 4. Sanuki,
otherwise Jamasijro, is three day's Journeys Iong, going from East to West, a
middling good and fruitffil Country, with variety of rivers, mountains and
fields, producing rice, corn, pease and pulse. The Sea affords plenty of fish
and crabs. This Province is famous for having given birth to several great and
eminent Men. It is divided into eleven districts, Owutsi, Samin awa, MIki,
Mino, Jamada, Kanda, Ano, Utari, Naka, Tado, and Kako. 5. Ijo, otherwise JOsju,
is two day's Journeys long, a middling good Country, mountainous in some parts,
flat in others, some of the fields being sandy, others producing rice, hemp,
mulberrytrees, grass and plants. Some salt is made upon the Coasts. It is
divided into fourteen districts, Nij Sucli, Kuwamira, Ootz, Kasafaja, Nooma,
Tsike, Otsumi, Kume, Fuke, Jio, Kita, Uwa, and Uma. 6. Tosa, otherwise TOsju,
is two day's Journeys long going from East to West, a middling good Country,
supplied with plenq of pease and pulse, wood, fruits, and several other
necessaries of Life. It is divided into seven Provinces, Tosa, Agawa, Taka,
Oka, Fata, Nanaoka, Katasima and Kami. The yearly Revenue of these six Provinces
amounts to I40 Mangokf.
There remain still two other Islands not
hitherto mention'd, which were conquer'd, and annex'd to the Empire of Japan,
in the late War with the Inhabitants of Corea. They are call'd IkiTsussima,
both their names being put together, and have now a Prince of their own, having
been {ormerly subject to the Prince, or petty King, of Satzuma. The first of
these two Islands is Iki, otherwise Isju; it is a day's Journey long, and hath
two districts, Iki, and Isijda. The second Island is Tsussima, otherwise
Taisju; this is somewhat larger than the former, and likewise divided into two
districts, Akata, and Simoakata, that is, upper and lower Akata. The
fruitfulness >of these Islands is said not to be very
considerabIe, but they say, that some foreign Curiosites are to be seen there [080] and
the number of Idols worship'd by the Inhabitants is much talk'd of. The yearly
revenue of these two Islands amounts to 3 Man, and 5000 Kokf
The whole Revenue of all the Islands and
Provinces belonging to the great Empire of Japan, makes up in all a yearly Sum
of Man, and 6200 Kokf, according to the account above given. My Japanese Author
however puts it only at Mangokf.
Tho' it be not a proper pIace here to enter
into particuIars concerning the Government of the Japanese Empire, its
provinces, and districts, yet for the better understanding of my History it
seems necessary, that before I proceed any filrther, somewhat should be said on
this Head. The whole Empire, in general, is govern'd by the Emperor, with an
absolute and monarchical Power and so is every Province in particular, by the
Prince who under the Emperor enjoys the government thereof. The present Kubo,
or secular Monarch, is Tsinajos, fourth Successor, and Great Grandson of Jejassama,
first Emperor of the now reigning Family, who usurp'd the Throneupon the lawful Heir, and reign'd about the
beginnin of the t6th Century. Tsinajos hath the character of a severe, but just
and prudent Monarch. He inherited from his ancestors along with the Crown, an
absolute and unlimited Power over all his Subjects, fFom the meanest extraction
up to the highest rank. Even the greatest Princes, and Lords of the Empire, are
so far his vassals that he can disgrace, exile and deprive them of their lives and
dominions, as he pleases, or as he thinks, the peace and welfare of the Empire
requires, or their crimes deserve.
ParticuIar Provinces are govern'd by
hereditary Princes, call'd Daimio, which signifies High-named, that is, Princesand Lords of the highest rank. Some of these
have found means by force of Arms to enlarge their dominions Thus the Prince of
Satzuma made himself master of ttie two neighbouring Provinces, Oosumi and
FEugo, and the Prince of Canga of the neighbouring
Province Noto, on which account these two Princes are said to be the most
powerfill in the E:mpire.
The Lords of smaller districts are call'd
Siomio, well named, Lords of an inferior rank. Their dominions whether they be
Islands, as Goto, Firando, Amakusav Matsaki, and several others, or situate
upon the continent of the three chief Islands, composing the Empire of Japan,
are mention'd in the list of the 66 great Provinces, each under that Province
whereto they belong, or in which they lie A11 the Siomio are so far subject to
the Emperor, that they are allow'd but six Months stay in their hereditary
dominions. The other half year they must spend in the Imperial Capital Jedo,
where their wives and families are kept all the year round, as Hostages of
their Fidelity. [081]
Some of these smaller districts are
Imperial demesns, or Crown Lands, either, because they have been appropriated
of old for the support of the Gown, or because in success of time, as occasion
ofFer'd, they were taken from their hereditary possessors by way of punishment,
and annexed thereunto, it having been always one of the chief political maxims
follow'd by the Emperors of Japan, to maintain themselves in peaceable
possession of the Throne, by splitting large dominions into several small ones,
and by endeavouring, by all possible means, to weaken the power and authority
of the Princes of the Empire. The largest of these Crown Lands are govern'd by
what they call, Bugios, acting in the nature of Lieutenants, the smaller ones
by Daiquans, as they are call'd, or Stewards. All the revenues must be brought
into the Emperor's Excheouer.
Chap. VI. The Author's opinion of the true Origin and Descent of the
Japanese.
IT hath been the constant opinion of most
European Geographers, that the Japanese are originally of Chinese Extraction,
descended from the Inhabitants of that mighty Empire. This opinion isgroundedupon the following two Stories, which were
brought out of the East by European travellers. The first is: It once happen'd
in China, that several Families conspired against the Emperor. Upon discovery
of the Plot, it was order~~d, that all those, who had any hand in it, should be
put to death without mercy. But the number of accomplices being so extensive,
that at Iast the Executioners themselves grew weary of shedding so much bIood,
the aSairwas againlaid before the Emperor who thereupon resolv'd, that their
sentence of death should be converted into transportation and banishment into
the neighbouring, then rude and uninhabited, Islands of Japan, which they
peopled, and thereby became the Progenitors of that numerous and powerfilI
Nation, they are now inhabited by. The second Story hath been reported as
follows. One of the Emperors of China unwilIing to part with his Empire, and
all that grandeur and Power he was possess'd of, within the short term human
tife is limited to, endeavour'd to find out, if possibIe, some universal
Medicine, which couId make him immortal; on this account he sent expert and
able Men into all parts of the World. Among the rest, one of his chief
Physicians persuaded him, that the proper Ingredients for such a Mediane were,
to his knowledge to be met with in the [082] neighbouring IsIands of Japan, but that they were of so tender and
singuIar a Structure, that they wouId wither, and lose their Virtues, if
touch'd by any other, but chast and pure, hands. And the better to execute this design, he propos'd that 300 young Men, and so many
young Women, all of a strong and healthful constitution, shou'd be carried over
thither, which accordingly he did himself, though far from having any real
intention to satisfy his Sovereign, but rather out of a desire to escape his
Tyranny, to settle in happier climes, and to people these then uninhabited
Islands. As to the first of these two Stories, Linschoot is the author of it;
but he not acquainting his Reader what authority he had for it, or how he came
by it, and there being not the least mention made, neither in Chinese, nor
Japanese Histories, of any such Conspiracy, it deserves no credit, but ought to
be entirely rejected, as forged and fabulous.- But as to the second, the coming
over of a Chinese Physician with so many young FeMen, and young NVomen, the
same is not at all denied by the Japanese; nay, far from it, they still shew a
place upon Khumano (So they call the Southern Coasts of the Pro vinces)
Kiinokuni, and some neighbouring Provinces, where he landed, and afterwards
settled with his gallant Collony, and the remains of a temple, which was there
erected to his memory, for having brought over to them from China good manners,
and useful arts and sciences. As to the occasion of his coming over, it is
recorded in Japanese Histories, that there was great search made after an
universal Medicine, during the reign of the Emperor Si, or Sikwo, or as the
vulgar pronounce it, Sino Sikwo. This Emperor was one of the three Chinese
Nero's, Sinosko, Ketzuwo, and Thuwo, whose memory will be for ever abhor'd. He
not only govern'd his Empire with unpanllel'd Tyranny, but liv'd with the
greatest pride, and most profuse magnificence imaginable, of which there are
several remarkable instances mentioned in the History of his Life. He caus'd
once a large Spot of Ground to be dug up for a Lake, and having order'd it to
be fill'd with Chinese Beer, he sail'd over it in stately Barges. He caused a
stately Palace, nam'd Kojaku, to be built for his residence, the floors whereof
were pav'd with Gold and Silver, and the whole Building of such an extent, that
the Emperor Kooll, who usurp'd the throne upon
his Grandson whom he put to death,with all the Imperial Family, having set it
on fire, it burnt in the ashes for the space of three Months, which memorable
event gave birth to a Proverb wherebytheJapanese express the sudden
changes,andshort duration, human grandeur and happiness are liable to. 'Twas
this Emperor, who out of a strong desire for ever to enjoy the Empire, order'd
that great search should be made after a Medicine, which could render him
immortal. If it be therefore under his Reign, the abovesaid Physician went over
into Japan with his Colony, it must be granted to the Japanese, that they came
by much too late to be the [083] Progenitors of their Nation, which was then already govern'd by
Koken, their eighth Monarch; for the arrival of the Chinese was in the 7th year
of the reign of Koken, 453 years after Synmu, first Emperor of Japan, and
before the birth of our Saviour, the very same year in which Sinosikwo died in
the 50th year of his age. Since therefore these two Stories are by no means a
sufficient proof, that the Japanese Nation is descended from the Chinese, it
will not be amiss to enquire, whether it be not possible to assign it another
more probable origin.
It is unquestionably true, that languages,
and their proprieties, are as sure and certain marks, as perhaps it is possible
to produce, whereby to discern, and trace out, not only the true origin of a
Nation, but likewise to find out, how in success of time it increased, by
being, as it were, incorporated with other Nations. Of this most Buropean
Nations afford us evident proofs. Thus, for Instance, we may easily find by the
language alone, that the Polanders, Bohemians and Muscovites are of Slavonian
extraction; that the Italians, French and Spaniards descend from the Romans;
that the Germans, low Dutch, Danes and Swedes, are the ospring of the ancient
Goths. Nay, we may go still filrther, and assert, that the languages alone of
several nations, and proper considerations thereupon, will qualify and enable
us to form probable conjectures, what revolutions happen'd among them, whether,
and what neighbouring nations they were
conquer'd by, as also, whether, and how from time to time they increas'd b)
fresh supplies and colonies from foreign parts: For it may be laid down as a constant
rule, that in proportion to the number of strangers, who come to settle and
live in a Country, words of the tongue spoke by them will be brought into the
language of that Country, and by degrees, as it were, naturaliz'd, and become
so familiar to the Natives, as if they had been of their own growth. The number
of German, French, and Danish words, in the English language, doth it not
evidently prove, that England was successively conquer'd by the Danes, lower
Saxons and French. Not even the Latin Tonzue was abIe to preserve its purity,
but Greek words were Seely, and in great number, adopted into it, after the
Romans became Master of that Country, then the seat of learning and politeness.
The language now spoke in Transilvania hath a considerable mixture both of the
Latin and neighbouring Hungarian. The language of the Inhabitants of
Semigallia, (a small Country near Russia) is compos'd of the Lettish,Slavonian
andLatin. The same observation holds true in other parts of the World, as well
as in Europe. John de Barros in his Decades, and Flaccourt in his History of
Madagascar assure us, that the language spoke by the Inhabitants of that large
African Island, is filll of Javan and Malagan words, as remaining-proofs of the
trade and commerce, which these two Nations, about aooo years ago the richest
and most powerful of Asia, had [084] carried on with Madagascar, where they settled in great numbers.
The language spoke in the Peninsula Crimea, or Taurica Chersonesus, in Asia,
still retains many German words, brought thither, as is suppos'd by a colony of
Goths, who went to settle there about 850 years after the Deluge. The late Mr.
Busbeq, who had been Imperial Ambassador at the Ottoman Port, collected and
publish'd a great number of these words in his fourth letter; and in my own
travels through that Country I took notice of many more. If we were better
acquainted with the languages of the Javans, Ceylonese, Malabarians, Siamites,
and other Indian Nations, they would doubtless enable us, to trace out their
origin, mixture with their neighbours and the revolutio1ls that happen'd among
them. But to apply, what hath been said, nearer to our purpose, I may venture
to affirm, that if the Japanese language was to be throughly, and most
rigorously examin d into, we would find it entirely pure, and free from all
mixture with the languages of their neighbours, at least to such a degree, as
would give room to conjecture an original descent from them. By their
neighbours I mean chiefly the Chinese, who inhabit the gu gtEastern maritime
provinces of that Empire, and carry on a commerce to Japan. They speak three
diferent languages, according to the three chief Provinces they belong to,
which are Nanking, Tsiaktsju, and Foktsju. Now a native of Japan doth not understand
one word of either of these languages, excepting the names of a few things,
which were brought by the Chinese into Japan along with the things themselves,
and which conclude no more for an originaldescent of the Japanese from China,
than some few Portuguese words, as Pan, palma, botan, Cappa, frasco, bidou,
tante, and a few more, still left there, would be allow'd a sufficient proof,
of the Japanese being originally descended from the Portuguese. Nor was the
number of Chinese, who came from time to time to settIe in Japan, ever
considerable enough to occasion any remarkable alteration in the Mother-tongue
of the Japanese, tho' they could, and actually did communicate and introduce
among them the arts and sciences, which had long before flourished in China,
nay even the knowIedge of the learned and significant Character language of
that Country, which 1S likewise receiv'd in Corea, Tunquin and other
neighbouring Kingdoms, much after the same manner as the Latin is in most
European Countries. But besides, there are two other essential proprieties of a
language, I mean the construction and pronunciation, in the 3apanese language
so entirely difFerent from that of the Chinese, that there is no room left to
think that these two Nations gave birth to each other. And
first as to the construction and way of writing, the Chinese set their
characters one below another in a row, without any intermediate particles to
connect them: The Japanese indeed do the same, but the genius of their language
requires besides, that the words and characters shoul~~ be sometimes
transpos'd, sometimes joined together by [085] other words and particles, particularly invented for this purpose,
and which are so absolutely necessary, that even in reprinting the books of the
Chinese, they must be added, to enable their people to read and to understand
them. And as to the pronunciation, that also is vastly different in both
languages, whether we consider it in generat, or with regard to particular
letterss and this diference is so remarkable, that it seems the very
instruments of voice are diferently form'd in the Japanese, than they are in
the Chinese. The pronunciation of the Japanese language, s in general, is pure,
articulate and distinct, there being seldom more than two or three letters
(according to our Alphabet) combin'd together in one syllable; that of the
Chinese on the contrary, is nothing but a confilsed noise of many consonants
pronounc'd with a sort of a singing accent, very disagreeable to the Ear. The
same diference appears with regard to particular letters. Thus the Chinese
pronounce our letter H. very distinctly, but the Japanese can give it no other
sound, but that of an F. Again the Japanese pronounce the letters R and D, very
distinctly, of which the Chinese, particularly those of Nanking, always make an
L, even such as are otherwise well t skUl'd in the European languages. I could
give several other instances of this kind, anj further shew, that, what hath
been observ'd of the diference between the Chinese and Japanese languages,
holds equally true with regard to the languages spoken in Corea and Jedso,
compared with that ot the Natives of Japan, but it is needless to give the
Reader, and myself, so much trouble, the rather since no body ever pretended to
draw the original descent of the Japanese from either of these two Nations.
Another argument against the descent of the
Japanese from the Chinese, I could draw from the difference Of the Religion of
both Nations. If the Japanese were a Colony of
the Chinese, they would have doubtless brought over from thence, into the
uninhabited Islands of Japan, the Religion and Worship of their ancestors, and
propagated the same upon their posterity. But this appears qulte otherwise. The
old, and probab1y, original Religion of the Japanese, which is by them call'd
Sintos, and the Gods and Idols, worship'd by its adherents, Sin, and Came, is
peculiar only to this Empire, nor hath it ever been admitted of, nor their Gods
acknowledged and worship'd, nor the religious way of life of the Japanese
followed by the Chinese, or indeed any other heathen Nation. It was besides the
only one establish'd in Japan during a succession of many ages. For the foreign
pagan doctrine of Siaka, which the Japanese now call Bupo, or Budsdo, and the
Gods which it commands to worship, Buds and Fotoge, tho' ever since its early
beginnings it met with uncommon success, and speedily spread over the best part
of Asia, yet it was not introduc'd into Japan till sixty six years afzter our
Saviour's nativity under the reign of the Emperor Synnin, when it was brought
over from Corea. And although [086] afterwards, through the connivance of the Japanese monarchs, it
was successfully propagated by several missionaries, who came over from China,
and the neighbouring Kingdoms, and speedily spread all over the Empire, yet it
never could prevail so far, as to banish the respect and veneration for the old
religion of their ancestors out of the minds of a constant and stedfast Nation.
On the contrary, the more the Bupo doctrine got ground, the more pains were
taken for the preservation of the Sintos worship, by embellishing the same with
new Gods, Temples, festivals and fables.
What hath been infer'd from the diference
of religion against the original descent of the Japanese from China, could be
filrther supported by the wide diference there isbetween the Characters anciently used by both Nations, I mean the gross and rude Common Characters,
as they call them, of the Japanese, and the simple and plain Images of the
Chinese. But this being an argument of less moment, I will not insist upon it,
and only mention in a few words two other remarkable diferences.
And first I could plainly shew, that the
Japanese greatly difFer from the Chinese, in their civil customs and way of
life, as to eating, drinking, sleeping, dressing, shaving of the head,
saluting, sitting, and many more. Secondly the very inclinations of the mind
are remarkably different in both Nations. The Chinese are peaceable, modest,
great lovers of a sedate, speculative and philosophical way oflife, but wlthal very much glven to rraud and
usury. The Japanese on the contrary are war-like, inclin'd to rebellions and a
dissolute life, mistrustful, ambitious, and always bent on high designs.
By what hath been hitherto observ'd, it
appears plainly, that the Japanese are an original Nation, at least that they
are not descended of the Chinese. The difficulty now remaining to be clear'd
up, is' how, and from what parts of the world, to trace out their true original
descent. In order to this we must go up higher, and perhaps it is not
inconsistent with reason, and the nature of things, to assert, that they are
descended of the first Inhabitants of Babylon, and that the Japanese language
is one of those, which Sacred Writs mention, that the all-wise Providence hath
thought fit, by way of punishment and confusion, to infuse into the minds of
the vain builders of the Baby lonian Tower. This at least seems to me the most
probable conjecture, whatever way they went into Japan, or whatever time they
spent upon this their first peregrination. Nay considering the purity of the
Japanese language, I'- may pursue my conjectures, and further affirm, that they
cannot have spent much time on their first Journey to Japan, for as much as we
cannot suppose, that they made any considerable stay in any one Country, or
with any one people then existing, without granting at the same time, that in
all probability they would have adopted some words of the
language of that nation into their own, of which yet it would be found upon [087] examination to be entirely free, contrary to what we find in all
European and most Eastern languages, known to us, which seem to have been from
their very bevinning so throughly mix'd and confounded, that there is scarce
any, but what hath some words of another though never so remote. If then our
Japanese Colony did reach that part of the World, which Divine providence
assign'd for their future abode, as soon as the Chinese, Tunquinese, and other
neighbouring Nations did theirs, it must be suppos'd that they fortunately fell
in with such a road, as couId with safety and speed bring them to the Eastern
extremities of Asia, from whence there is liut a short W passage over to Japan.
In order therefore to trace out what road it is probable they took, we must
consider the first Babylonians in the condition, they were in, after that
dreadful confusion of Languages, wholly disappointed from going on with their
vain design, and brought to the fatal necessity to part with each other, and to
be dispers'd all-over the world. And in order to this let us suppose. That
among the diferent parties there arose in all likelyhood a strong emulation to
chuse for their filture abode such Countries, as were not only fruitfill and
delightful, but thought to be less exposed to the invasion of other parties,
elther because of their commodious situation towards the Sea, or between large
Rivers, and high mountains, or by reason of their great distance. And in this
regard it is highly probable, that such Countries, as were very remote, but
situate under a temperate CIimate, became not the last inhabited. This seems to
be the case of the Empire of Japan, whose remoteness, as well as its
fruitfillness, and pleasant situation, between 30 and 40 degrees of Northern
latitude, could fully answer all the ex pecta ti o ns of a first Colo ny . B u
t seco n dly let us suppose that the chief care of these first colonies, in
their search for a Country fit for their habitation, must needs have been to
follow such roads, and tracts of land, where [140-142]
whom the great Conqueror Sinchis Cham (a
Prince, who well deserved a Plutarch, or Quintus Curtius, to write the History
of his Life, Conquests and heroic Actions) sent out upon an expedition into
Poland, and who, not meeting with all the expected success, chose rather to
stay, and to people the then as yet uninhabited Pontus, than to return without
honour and victory. I must silently pass over many other branches of the same
race, which fell by degrees under the dominion of some neighbouring, chiefly
Northern, Nations, with whom they were in success of time so thoroughly mix'd
and incorporated, that even the very foot-steps of their original descent would
have been lost, were it not for some few remains of their former Language. I
will only add, that the famous Tamerlan was an Usbekian Scythe, and that the
Ottoman Emperor, the great Mogul, and the King of Sopra are all of Turco man
extraction. Thus much of the Turks and Usbecks. In order now to come nearer to
our purpose, I will avoid speaking of those Companies, which went along the
River Inike, or from the source of the River Obij down the same towards the
Tartarian Ocean, and became the first Progenitors of the Tartarian Nations
living in those parts. Nor will I pretend at present to determine, what way the
Chinese Colony took in their Journey to China. It is only six months travelling
from the coasts of the Caspian Sea to the boarders of China. Jagen Andasen in
his voyage to China in I 647, did not stay longer. Two Tartarian Merchants,
whom I convers'd with at Astracan, and who had been several times in China,
gave me the following account of their Journey thither. They went from Astracan
over the Caspian Sea, (which they took to be aoo miles long, and 150 broad) to
Seratsijk in t5Sdays, from thence by Land to Urgentz, the Residence of an
Usbeskian Prince in 5 days, from thence to Bochau in days, travelling through a
wild large desart: From Bochau there are two different ways, whereof Travellers
may chuse which they please. The one going over Casger was then infested with
Rovers, so they took to the other, which awross a well inhabited Country
brought them to Taaskend in days, thence to Oxiend in 7 days, thence to Kaasker
the Capital of Turkistaan, and the chief Town between Buchara and Katai, in
(this number was omitted in the original) days, thence to Tsutsijk the first
frontier Town of Kattai in 30 days, thence to Hamtsijk in 5 days, thence to the
great wall of Kattai, Chatai, or China, in 60 days, travelSng through a
well-inhabited Country, and lastly from the great wall to Cambalu, or Peking,
the Capital of China, and Residence of the Chinese Emperor, in 10 days,
compleating the whole Journey within six months time. A Calmuckian Merchant of
the retinue of a Calmuckian Prince's Ambassador to the King of Persia, whom I
knew at Ispahan, where he otfer'd me to sale the root Taichuun,that is great
yellow root,or Rhubarb,which he had brought himselt out of China, gave me the
journal of his voyage from Mienkisilaag to the great wall of China thus. He
went from MienkisiIaag to Dsiem in 20 days, from thence to Gilgaas, where they
cross a large river, in 15 days, from thence to Torkai in a few days, thence to
Milantsij in 10 days, thence to Toktan in 10 days, thence to Tsienrehsu in 5
days, thence to Isijel in 10 days, thence to Kalah in 4 days, thence to Balane
in 6 days thence to Karbokatai in 10 days, thence to the great vvati of China
in 9 days, travelling through a desart and uninhabited Country, where he met
only a few Tartarian Shepherds dwelling under black Tents. Mienkisilaag
signifies, in the country language, hundred winter-quarters, or resting places.
It is an Island situate on the Eastern Coasts of the Caspian Sea, near 45
degrees of Northern Latitude, and the residence of Ajukeh, the Prince of the
Calmuckian Tartars living in those parts, who expell'd the Turks, or Turcomans,
out of their Country, and forc'd them to depart even Som the Caspian Shores.
After all I think it no ways probable, that the first Chinese went into China
through such desart and barren Countries, where travellers are oftentimes
necessitated to carry the necessary provisions of water and victuals along with
them. [144-140] in the mean time, they could be
provided with the neces saries of Iife. This intention could scarce be answer'd
more eSectually, than by travelling, either along the Sea Coasts, or, and with
more probabUity, along great rivers and lakes, where they could be supplied
with fish for their own nourishment, with sweet water to quench their thirst,
and where thev were like to meet with good pasture ground their Cattle, till at
last they alighted at a Country, where they thought they could settle with
safety and convenience.
If therefore the dreadful confusion of
Tongues at Babylon, brought its Inhabitants, as
indeed it must have done, to an lndispensable necessity to part one with
another, and to be dispers'd all-over the world, such parties as spoke the same
language, keeping together, and settling in what country they best lik'd, we
may take it for granted, that not a few went towards the neighbouring Black and
Caspian Seas, and that by this means the country of Hircania, tvhich is situate
between the Caucasus and Caspian Shores, as the best and most [088] delightful spot of Persia, became first inhabited, as did soon
after the neighbouring fruitfial Countries, situate between the Black and
Caspian Seas. Such as intended, or thought it expedient, to pursue their journey
further, met here with two different ways, one up the Rivers Tanais, and Wolga
to the North, the other along the Eastern Shores of the Caspian Sea into Asia.
It is foreign to my present purpose to shew what became of the former. And as
to those that went along the Eastern Caspian Coasts, they must have at last
reach'd to the mouth of the great river Oxus, or Dsiehuun, where it discharges
it self into the Caspian Sea, and if we suppose that they follow'd that river
up to its source, it was then no very difficult matter for them to penetrate
into the very midst of India, where they must have soon met with the source of
the rivers Indus and G3nges, and going down the difFerent branches of it, got
into Indostan, Bengala, Pegu, Siam and other neighbour ing Kingdomss much
easier and safer, than if they had been obIig'd to travel over the barren,and
still uninhabited, Maharounian mountains, or to cross the large desarts of
Siftuun and SaabIestuun. Even to this day, travellers going from Ispahan to
Candahar chuse rather to go through Mesihed, a fourney of 375 miles, than to
take the shortest road, which is but 250 miles, a-cross these wild and
dangerous desarts. But to return to the Caspian Sea, before I carry off our
Japanese Colony from thence on their Journey to Japan, I must beg leave to make
a short digression in favour of a famous and valiant Nation of the 1 urks, or
Turcomans and Usbeks, as they are now call'd, which settled upon its Eastern
and North Eastern Coasts. Turk signifies a Shepherd, and Turkestaan, a
Shepherd's Country. Jusbeek is as much as to say, Hundred Lords, which seems to
imply, that the Country of Usbeck was once govern'd by so many Princes. Both
Nations have the same language, the same religion, the same manners and
customs, and must therefore be Iook'd upon as originally one, on which we may
deservedly bestow the gIorious epithets of being a mother of many Nations, a
nurse of illustrious Heroes, and a stem of mighty lMonarchs. They spread from
the North Eastern coasts of the Caspian Sea, between 40 and 50 degrees of
Northern latitude, as far as the borders of Kitaija. Their way of life answered
to their name, for during many Centuries they Iiv'd together in hoords, and
small commonwealths, wandering from pIace to pIace with their cattIe wherein
their chief riches consisted. Of these Turks, or Turcomans are descended the
Dagestaan and Nagajan Tartars, the Tartarian Inhabitants of the Kingdom of
Casan, the Boscarian Tartars, the Inhabitants of the Province of Mogestan in
Persia, and some other Tartars which dwell in that Kingdom under Tents. The
KisiIbacs, or Noblemen, and great FamiIies, in Persia value themselves mightily
upon their being of Turcoman extraction. There are likewise descended of them
the Crim Tartars, which Iive between the Dniper and Danube, upon the coasts [089] of
the BIack Sea, as also those Tartars, [142-144]
I am more inclin'd to believe, that their
Journey was more to the South, and perhaps along the North-side of the Imaasian
Mountains, where the Country is very fruit ful, with rich pastures, and plenty
of sweet water, and fish, and other necessaries of life, and where they were
like to meet either the source, or else some of the branches of the large river
Croceus, which could con veniently and safely bring them into the very heart of
China.
But now at last it is high time to make a
step backwards, and to fetch the first Japanese
Colony from the Caspian Shores, where we left
them above, on their Journey to Japan. If we
suppose, that for some time they travell'd along the East, and North Eastern,
Coasts of the Caspian Sea till they came to the Island Mienkisilaag, and that
thence they follow'd up some of the Rivers, which there discharge themselves
into the said Sea, we will find, that by this means they got into a large and
fruitful Country, extending itself far E:astwards, and very proper, by reason
of its happy situation and great fertility, for the leisurely and easily
pursuing of their Journey. Considering this it will not appear improbable
further to suppose, that having once met with so good and pleasant a Country,
where there was no want of provision for them and their cattle, they resolv'd
to keep to it, avoiding to enter the hot, desart and barren Provinces, now
inhabited by the Turkesteaans, on one, or on the other side to go down the rivers
Istisi, Jenesi, Silinga and others, which arise thereabouts, and would have
brought them to the less agreeable and cold Northern Countries. Thus moving on
insensibly East ward, they perha'ps discover'd in time the Lake of Arguun,
whence arises a large river of that name, andL continuing their Journey along
the said river, for very near an [091] hundred German Miles, they must have necessarily met there another
much more considerabIe river, call'd Amuur, which runs E. S. E. and could, in a
Journey of about 200 German Miles, bring them to the Eastern coasts of Asia
into the then uninhabited Peninsula Corea, where the said River Ioses itself to the Eastern
Ocean. Perha s also if our TravelIers went down the river Jenisi fCr about 150
German Miles, to 55 degrees of Northern Latitude? they might have there
discover'd a much more commodlous and pieasant way to the River Amuur, which
hath been of late very advantageously folElow'd by the Muscovites in their
Journeys to China. But as to the whole plan of this Journey, I must refer the
Reader to the accurate and excellent map of Russia, and the great Tartary,
which the late illustrious Nicholaus Witzen, L. L. D. Burgher-master at
Amsterdam, and sometimes the States Ambassador to the Russian Court, publish'd
in and thereby so highly oblig'd the curious, that he Justly deserves the
honours due to discoverers of unknown worlds. This Map was afterwards corrected
in some places, and abridg'd by Mr. Isbrand Ydes, who prefix'd it to the
account he imparted to the worId of his Journey through Tartary into China.
Having once brought our Japanese Colony as
far asthe PeninsuIa Corea, it will be no
difficult matter, considering the nearness of Nagatto, the furthermost
province, lying Westwards on the continent of the great Island Nipon, to bring
them over thither, and this the rather because of the several Islands, which
lie between Corea and Nagatto in an aimost continued row, particularly the two
larger ones, Iki, and Tsussima: For it is but 8 reasonable to suppose, that a
Colony, which had had courage enough to venture so far upon their first Pere
grination, and which had been often necessitated not only to have recourse to
lakes and rivers, but frequently to cross the same, had natural curiosity
enough left, in still and fair weather, to go out in Canes or Boats, such as
then probably they made use of, upon discovery of the state and extent of the
Corean Sea, and the neighbouring Islands; and that having by this means
discover'd the continent of Nipon, they resolv'd to go over thither, which they
might easily do, even in ordinary Fisher-boats, and to chuse that Country for
their future abode. Nowif any body knows how to bring them hither thro' the Eastern Tartary
and the Coulltry of Jeso, (which way perhaps the American Colonies went) safer
and speedIer, I am very willing to submit. Mean while I do not think it
probable, that our Japanese Colony made any considerable stay upon these
Western Coasts of Nipon. Their innate curiosity and travelling humour, and perhaps
also the fearN of being follow'd and disturb'd by other parties, must needs
have prompted them to travel up the Country, till
they came to its Southern extremities, and particularly into the province Isje,
which by reason of its fruitfulness, good air, and remoteness from the Western
Coasts, fullv answer'd all the expectations of a [092] secure and pleasant abode. I am the more inclined to believe, that
they first settled in this Province, since their posterity still look upon it,
as the place where their ancestors dwell'd, and as such honour it with fiequent
pilgrimages and other acts of devotion. Thus far my conjectures, for as such
only I deliver them, concerning the true original descent of the Japanese
Nation.
Before I put an end to this Chapter, it
will not be amiss to say something of the increase of this first Japanese
Colony, after they had once taken the resolution to stay, and to people the
Country, where doubtless for several ages, before any considerable improvements
were made in - agriculture, and other arts and sciences, they led a simple and
indigent life, living on their Cattle, on what the earth produced of plants,
roots and fruits, and the Sea aflTorded of fish and crabs. It was
unquestionably and chiefly owing to themselves, that in success of time they
became so numerous and powerfill a Nation, and the present Inhabi tants of
Japan must be look'd upon in general, as descendants of those, who, after the
confusion of languages at Babel, came over and
settled in these Islands. But on the other hand
it cannot be denied, but that from time to time new Colonies were sent over
thither, chielRy from China and Corea, and perhaps also from some other neigh
bouring Countries. The Japanese themselves make frequent mention in their Histories of
learned Chillese, who brought over illtO Japan their books, and the knowledge
of usefill arts alld sciences, though not till the latter Ages, when the
Japanese Monarchy was already become a powerful Empire. And indeed since so few
foreign words have been brought into the Japanese language, that it is hardly
visible, that there hath been anv alteration at alI made in it, and since the
religion and oid customs subsist tiII now, it appears pIainly, that whatever
foreign Colonies did from time to time voluntarily, or by chance, come over
into Japan, their number must have been very inconsiderabIe with regard to the
bulk of the Japanese Nation.
Considering further, that the Islands of
Japan areencompass'd with a dangerous and stormy Sea, it is highly probable,
that from time to time Ships coming from foreign Countries stranded upon the
Japanese coasts, and that, if any of the Ships company were fortunate enough to
save their lives, they chose rather to stay in Japan, and to settle among the
Natives, than to trust themselves again to the mercy of the Sea, and to run the
hazard of a perillous return Into their own Country. Though navigation by this
time be highly improved, yet the like accidents still happen very frequently,
and there is hardly a vear, but some Ships are forc'd upon the Coasts of Japan,
coming sometimes from Countries either so remote, or so entirely unknown, that
scarce any conjectures can be made about them' neither by the Shape, nor the
language and customs of the Ships company. Several remarkable instances of such
accidents are recorded in Japanese Histories. [093] The
Japanese having some Centuries ago accidentally discover'dthe Island Genkaisima, situate to the North of
Japan found it inhabited, as their Histories relate, by Oni, that is, Black
Devils, which they prosecuted with War, and having purg'd the Island from this
Vermin, as they call it, they peopled it with a Colony of their own. It is
highly probable, that these Blacks had been forc'd upon the coasts of this then
uninhabited Island in a storm. It is further observ'd in the History of this
war, that they wore long hairs spread over their shoulders, and that
they had a strange sort of houshold goods, as among the rest high European
Hats. As to the Japanese calling them Devils, we need not in the least wonder
at it, considering either eheir black colour, or the natural pride of the
Japanese Nation, which so far despises all other Countries, as to call them
UmaKokf, that is, the Countries of Devils. Otherwise, what Countrymen these
Blacks had been, is not very difficult to conjecture, by their wearing long
hairs, by their irniture, and some other circumstances; and I don'tbelieve to impose upon any body, if I assert that they have been
Malagans. It is welI known, that the Malagans to this day are extreamly fond of
their own halr, and delighted with wearing them of a considerable length,
beyond any other of the black nations of Asia. Besides, they had in former
times by much the greatest trade in the Indies, and frequented with their
merchant-ships not only all the coasts of Asia, but ventur'd over even to the
coasts of Africa, particularly to the great Island of Madagascar. The title,
which the King of the Malagans assumed to himself, of Lord of the Winds and
Seas to the East and to the West, is an evident proof of this, but much more
the Malagan language, which spread most all over the East, much after the same
manner, as formerly the Latin, and of late the French, did all over Europe. The
high Hats, which were found among the Housholdgoods of these Blacks, must have
been brought out of Europe, they having never been fabricated any where else.
It was an ancient custom of most Eastern Princes (which subsists till now in
the Kingdoms of Cambodia, Siam, Pegu, and some others) to present their prime
ministers of statey and chief favourites with such hats, as tokens of their
particular favour, and they alone had the privilege of wearing them, as
singular badges of honour. They were formerly brought out of Europe by Land to
Ormus, and from thence exported all over the East by the Malagans, Armenians,
and other trading nations; but after the Portuguese had discover'd a new way to
the Indies, round the Cape of Good-hope, they exported
them from Surope (where they are I1OW out of fashion) directly by Sea. Now
whether there was not alllong these black Inhabitants of Genkaisima, some great
Man, who receiv'd these hats from his Prince, or whether they fell by some
other accident into their hands, is not material to enquire. There 1S also
mention made in Japanese Histories of black Inhabstants, who were found in [094] some of the Islands lying to the South of Japan, and who in all
probability must have been, either Malagan Merchants, or else Inhabitants of
some of the Molucca Islands, who having been forced thither in a storm, and
finding them uninhabited, resolv'd to stay and to people them. Not long before
my arrival, and during my stay in Japan, several Ships stranded UpOll the
Coasts coming from remote and unknown Countries In this case all the Ships
Company, as well those, that remain alive, as the bodles of such as are
drown'd, when thrown on shore, and all the Ship's tackle, and the boat, if any,
must be brought up to Nagasaki, as the place appointed for a general inquiry into
maritime afFairs. The Governours of this place examine into all the most minute
circumstances of the unhappy accident, with that care and Zealous
circumspection, which is peculiar only to this Nation, and in order to
discover, if possible, what Country the Ship came from and what Language those,
that saved their lives, speak, this Examination is sometimes made in presence
of the Dutch Resident, who did me the favour upon these occasions, to carry me
along with him. It is a duty incumbent on every Prince of the Empire) to take
care, ln case any Ships strand upon the Coasts of his Province, that they be
sent up, as aSoresaid, to Nagasaki, which ts commonly, out of respect for the
Emperor, done with great expence. Not long ago a Jonk coming fiom Manilhas, on board
which were some Topassians, a sort of black Christians, was wreck'd upon the
Coasts of Satzuma. Most of the Ship's Company were drown'd, some died on shore,
and only three were brought up alive to Nagasaki, the last of whom died there
in prison, after halring taken some physick, order'd him by a Japanese Physitian. Of another Ship,
which stranded upon the same Coasts, only three black Sailors were saved, which
could not pronounce one distinct word, besides that of Tobacco; after having
lain for sometime in prison, they were deliver'd to us, to be transported on
board our Ships. Another Ship was brought to :Nagasaki, which had been forc'd
upon the Northern Coasts of Japan, without any body on board. The odd uncommon
structure of this vessel, and the remains of three Chinese Characters upon the
stern, made the Japanese conjecture, that it came firom the extremities of
Jeso. Not long ago another Ship perish'd upon the Coasts of the Island Rluku,
and only two of the company were sav'd, which were brought first to Satzuma,
and from thence to Nagasaki, with a convoy of eight barges, which must have put
the Prince of Satzuma at the expence of some thousand Rixdollars. They were
well shap'd comely persons, and had their heads shav'd much after the manner of
the Polanders, no beards, and three holes in each Ear. They shew'd by their
decent and civil behaviour, and free, but modest, appearance, a tolerable
education, and a good clear understanding, by endeavouring to give the Japanese
some notions of the number, situation and largeness of the Islands, from whence
they came, which they did by [095] putting stones of difFerent sizes upon a Table, calling each by
its name; among the rest, that Island, where they liv'd themselves, was by them
call'd Patan. We had reason to apprehend, that the good understanding and quick
apprehension they shew'd, when under examination, would be the occasion of
their imprisonment for life at Nangasaki If we believe thet Japanese, there is
another unknown nation, and very different from theirs, as to their customs,
shape and language, which inhabits the IsIand Kubitesima, one the most Northern
Islands belonging to Japan. They describe them as PJrgmies, and from thence
call the whole Island the Pygmey-Island. What extraction they be of, and how
they came to inhabit this Island, I will leave to themselves to determine. I will only add on this head, that the first European
Ship, which came into Japan, was a Portugueze Merchant-ship, forc'd thither
accidentally in a storm.
Upon the whole, the wide diflierence which
is still observ'd between the Japanese Inhabitants of several Provinces, as to
their shape, seems to argue strongly, that from time to time, diferent and new
branches were grafted 0 into the original Tree of this Nation. For although the
Japanese in the main, particularly the common People of Nlpon, be of a very
ugly appearance, short siz'd, strong thick-legg'd, tawny, with flattish noses,
and thick eye-lids, (tho' the eyes stand not so deep in the forehead, as in the
Chi nese,) ye t the descendan ts of the elde st an d noble st families, of the
Princes and Lords of the Empire, have somewhat more majestick in their shape
and countenance, being more like the Europeans. The Inhabitants of the
Provinces Satzuma, Oosijmi, and Fiuga, are of a middle size, strong,
couragious, and manly, otherwise civil and polite. The same is observ'd of the
Inhabitants of some of the Northern Provinces in the great Island Nipon,
excepting those of the great Province Osju, who are said to be beyond others
cruel and unmerciful. The Inhabi tants of some Provinces of SaiKokf,
particularly of Fisen, are short, slender, but well shap'd, of a good handsome
appearance, and extreamly polite. The InEabitants of the great Island Nipon,
parhcularly of its Eastern Provinces are known from others by their big heads,
flat noses, and musculous fleshy compIexion.
Now to close this Chapter, and to sum up in
a few words, what hath been therein largely dwelt on, it appears; that in the
first Ages of the World, not long atter the Deluge, when the confusion of
languages at Babel oblig'd the Babylonians to drop their design of building a
Tower of uncommon height, and occasion'd their being dispers'd all over the
World, when the Greeks, Goths and Slavonians departed for Europe, others for
Asia and Africa, others for America, that then the Japanese also set out on
their Journey: That in all probability after many years travelling, and many incommodities endur'd, they alighted at this remote
part of the World; that, being welI pleas'd with its situation and
fruitfulness, they resolv'd to chuse it for the place of their [096] abode; that in all likelihood they spent many Centuries in a
polyarchical way of Life, such as is led to this day by the Tartars, living in
hoords, and wandering with their Cattle and Families up and down the Country;
that being insensibly, and by degrees, grown to be a numerous and powerfill
Nation, they thought it expedient for the good of the Country, and for their
own safety, to deliver up the Government into the hands of one Prince, and
chuse for their first Monarch the valiant Dsin Mu Ten Oo; that consequently
they are an original Nation, no ways indebted to the Chinese for their descent
and existence, and that, tho' they receiv'd Som them several usefill Arts and
Sciences, as the Latins did fiom the Greeks, yet they were never made subject,
and conquer'd, neither by them, nor by any other neighbouring Nation.
Chap. Vll. Of the Origine of the Japanese, according to their own
fabulous Opinion.
The Japanese trave their Origine from their
Deitics.
He Japanese fancy themselves highly
afronted by the endeavours of some, who busy themselves to draw the original
descent of their Nation from the Chinese, or others of their Neighbours. They
pretend, that they arose within the compass of their own lS:mpire, tho' not out
of the Earth, like Mice and Worms, as the proud Athenians, for that same
reason, were upbraided with, by that Cynic Diogenes. They claim a birth much
higher and nobler, and esteem themselves no less than OMsprings of their very
Deities, whom otherwise they don't look upon as eternal, but suppose, that in
the first motion of the Chaos, out of which aK things were form'd, their Gods
also were brought forth by its invisible Power. They
have tWo I tgo. dilTering Genealogies of their
Deities. The first is a succession of Celestial Spirits, of Beings absolutely
free firom all manner of mixture with corporeal Substances, who rul'd the
Japanese World during an undetermin'd and incomprehensible Series of Centuries.
The second is a race of Terrestrial Spirits, or Godmen, who were not possess'd
of that pure Being peculiar only to their Predecessors. They govern'd the
Japanese Empire by a Iineal succession, each a long, but limited, number of
years, till at last they begot tlut third race of Men, which Japan is now
inhabited by, and who have nothing left of the purity and perfiections of their
divine Progenitors. It will not be amiss, as a filrther proof of what I
advance, here to insert the names of these two successions of Deities, taken
out of their own Writings. The names of the first succession are purely
metaphorical, and the only thing mention'd of it in their Historical Books, for
there is no account given, neither of their [097] Lives and Actions nor of their Government. They succeeded each
other in the following Order.
Ten d Sin Sitzi Dai, that is, the
Succession of the seven great Spiritual Gods.
1 Kuni toko
Dat sij no Mikotto.
2. Kuni Satsu Tsij no Mikotto.
3. Tojo Kun Nan no Mikotto.
These three Gods had no Wives; but the four
following of the same Succession were married, and begot each his Successor by
his Wife, tho' in a manner far beyond the reach of human understanding. These
were,
4. Utsij Nino Mikotto, and his Wife Sufitsi
Nino Mikotto.
5. Oo Tono Tsino Mikotto, Oo Toma fe no
Mikotto
6. Oo mo Tarno Mikotto, Oo si Wote no
Mikotto.
7. Isanagi no Mikotto, Jsanami no Mikotto.
These seven Gods are by them represented as
Beings purely Spiritual, and the Histories of their Lives asid Governments as
Dreams. The real existence of such a time, when such spiritual Beings governed
the Japanese World, is what they religiously beSeve, tho' at the same time they
own, that it is far above their understanding to conceive how it happen'd, and
entirely out of their power to determine how long their Government Iasted.
The last of the first succession Isanagi
Mikotto, and his Wife Isanami Mikotto, are held in peculiar veneration by the
Japanese, as being the progenitors of the second succession of God-men, of whom
issued the third race of the now existing Inhabitants of Nipon. tMikotto is an
Epithet peculiar only to the first succession of Spiritual Gods, and signifies
the incomprehensible bliss and happi ness of these first Monarchs of Japan:
Sometimes however they will bestow it on such of the inferior Gods, for whom
they have a peculiar veneration.) Those of the Japanese, who turn'd Christians,
call'd them their Adam and Eve. They are said to have liv'd in the province
Isje, thouch it is not known in what particular part of that Province they were
born, liv'd or died. They observe only, that this - preadamitical Adam, (if I
may have leave thus to call him) was the first, who, taught by the Example of
the 13ird Sekire, or according to the vulgar, Isitataki, lay with his Wife in a
carnal manner and begot by her sons and daughters of a nature excellent indeed,
and far superior to ours, but greatly below that of the divine Beings, of which
they sprung. Isanami's first-born Son, and the first of the second succession
of God-men, is supposed by the very law of primogeniture, to have been entitled
to a superiority [098] over his Brothers and Sisters, upon which, and a lineal descent
from him, is grounded the right, the Dairi's or Ecclesiastical Hereditary
Emperor's eldest Sons claim to the Crown of Japan, upon their Father's demise.
This second Succession is call'd,
Dsi Sin Go Dai; that is, the Succession of
five Terrestrial Gods, or God-men, who are
I. Tensio
Dai Dsin, in the language of the learned, and Ama Teru Oon Gami in that of the
vulear. The characters, whereby this name is express'd, signiry, a great Splrlt
streaming out celestial Rays. He is the first-born Son of Isanagi, and the only
one that left Children behind him. For 'twas his posterity, Creatures not of a
mean extraction, but of an excellent and almost divine nature who inhabited the
Country for many millions of years, tili they begot the third race of its
present short living Inhabitants. All the Japanese, without exception, look
upon themselves as immediate descendants of Tensio Dai Dsin, because they say,
that all his younger Brothers left the world without issue. But particularly
the Ecclesiastical hereditary Emperor grounds his right to the Empire, (which
is of late gone over into SecuSar hands, he himself having preserved nothing
but his title, and a shadow of his former power and grandeur) upon a lineal
descent from Tensio Dal-Dsin's first-born Son, and so down. Tensio Dai Dsin
committed not only during his reign many noble and heroick actions, but e+ren
after he left this world, as is recorded in Japanese Histories, he sufficiently
prov'd by many miracles, and manifested himself to be the most powerfill of all
the Gods of the Country, the very life soul, light, and supreme Monarch of
nature. For this reason he is devoutly worship'd by all the faithfill adherents
of the old Japanese Religion, as it was of old establish'd in Japan. And the
adherents of all other Sects, even their greatest Philosophers, and Atheists,
shew a particular regard and veneration for his name and memory, as that of
their first Parent. Devout pilgrimages are made yearly, by the Japanese of all
ranks and quallties, to the Province where he lived, and where there is a
Temple erected to his memory. Nor is there any province, or town, throughout
the Empire, but what has at least one TempIe, where TenS10 Dal DS111 1S
worshipp'd, and in hopes of obtaining by his power and assistance great
temporal blessings, worship'd with much more assiduity and devotion, than any
other of their Gods. There is otherwise no mention made in Japanese Histories of his Wife, nor of the Wives of his
successors, and their names are entirely lost to Posterity. After some hundred
thousands of years Tensio Dai Dsin was succeeded by his eldest Son
2. Oosiwo ni no Mikotto, or with his full
title, MAssai Ja su Katz Katz fai ja fi Amani Oosi woni no Mikotto. His
successor was [099]
3. NinIkino Mikotto, or with his full
title, Amatsu fiko fiko Fono ni NinIki no Mikotto. He was succeeded by
4. De mi no
Mikotto, or with his full title, Fikofoo foo De mi no Mikotto. He was succeeded
by
5. Awase Dsu no Mikotto, or with his full title, Tuki Magisa Take Ugei
Jakussa fuki awadsi Dsuno Mikotto. With him ends tliis Second, or Silver-age as
one might call it, of the Japanese world. Something more shall ie said on this
head in the first Chapter of the second Book. The names of the five terrestrial
Gods of this second succession are express'd in Fig. 73.
These are the two Successions of divine and
half divine Beings, from whence the Japanese draw the original descent of their
nation. The account they give how these Gods were created, and how they begot
each other, is no less chimerical and fabulous. The first of the seven great
Celestial Spirits, they say, was the very first thing that arose out of the
Chaos, being its purest and invisibSe part and power. His Son and Meir went out
of him in a manner beyond the reach of human understanding, or as some pretend
to explain it, and to make it intelliglble, by - the motion and active power of
the Heavens, and sub - celestial Elements. Thus were begot the seven great
Celestial Spirits of the first succession. 'Twas the last of them, who, knowing
his Wife in a carnal manner, begot the second succession of God-men, of Beings
half divine, and half human. These, though they fell far short of the
perfection of their progenitors, yet by virtue of those divine qualities, they
had still left them, they preserv'd their lives, and continued the succession
of their Govern ment upon their Posterity, which they begot in a more comprehensible manner, for an immemorial time, far exceeding the
term human life is llO+V limited to. At last all expired in the Person of Awase
Dsuno, the last of this second race, who himself became the first parent of the
third, the now living Inhabitants of Japan. To those cf this third Race, who
descend lineally trom the first-born Son of Awase Dsuno Mikotto, from his
first-born, and so down, or their Issue wanting to their next Heirs, is by the
Japanese attributed a supernatural, almost divine, Power, and an unlimited
authority over their Fellowcreatures. This is in some measure express'd by the
great titles and high sounded epithets, they give to this whole Family, but particularly
to its Head, and Prince. Such are Oodai, the great generation: Mikaddo,
Emperor, (Mikotto beint peculiar only to the first and second succession of
Gods and Godmen:) Tenoo heavenly Prince, Tensin, Son of Heaven, Tee, Prince,
and Dairi, by which last name is frequently denoted the whole Court of the
Ecclesiastical hereditary Emperor. (See Fig. 73.) [100]
Thus far the common tradition of the
Japanese about the original descent of their nation, which is esteem'd as
sacred among them, as the authority of holy Scriptures is among Christians. It
were needless to refute it, it being of itself of so weak a nature, that it
will not bear the enquiry of even the most common understanding. Some people
perhaps will think it not unlikely, that under these two successions of Gods
and God-men is allegorically couch'd an obscure account of the Gold and Silver
Age of Greek Writers, or of the first ages of the world before and after the
Deluge. But then how will they reconcile that infinite time, during which the Japanese
pretend, that these two successions of Spiritual Beings govern'd the world, to
that short number of years, which pass'd since the Creation, according to the
divine account deliver'd to us in holy writs. The Japanese, it seems, would not
be behind hand with the Egyptians, Chaldeans, Bramines, and others of their
neighbours in the East; who all, pursuant to that pride and vanity, which is
natural to Eastern Nations, dated their origin as high as they could, and
esteem'd it glorious to shew a lo1lfr series of Monarchs, that ruled over them.
But what they seem to have more particularly aim'd at, is to out-do their
neighbours the Chinese; for they make Tensio Dai Dsin, the first Progenitor of
the Japanese Nation, in their historical writings, many thousand years anterior
to the first and fictitious, as they call him, founder of the Chinese Nation,
Sinkwosi, or according to the Chinese prononciation Tien Hoamtsij. And lest
even this should not be sufficient to clear them of all suspicion of being any
ways descended from the Chinese, they prefix the Succession of the first great
celestial Spirits, which they derive from the very beginning of the Creation.
They are however at a loss, what to answer, when ask'd how it came about, that
Awase Dsuno, the last of their terrestrial Gods, a Beillg endow'd with r SO
many excellent and supernatural qualities, as they ascribe to him, begot so
poor and miserable a race, as that of the present Inhabitants of Japan. They
have as little to say concerning the state of their Country, and the history of
their Ancestors before the time of Sinmu their first Monarch. For this reason
several of their own NVriters have ventur'd to call Japan Atarasikoks, and
SinKokf, that is, New Country, as if it had been newly found out and peopled
under the reign of their first Emperor. Thus much is true, that the genuine
Japanese EIistory begins but with the reign of thls first Monarch, who liv'd
about 660 Years before Christ. And herein the Chinese are gone far beyond them,
for they begun to write the History of their Country at least 2000 years
before, and they can shew, what I believe no other nation can boast of, a
succession of Monarchs, with an account of their lives, government, and
remarkable actions down to this time, Cor now upwards of 4000 Tears. It must be
own'd [101] however, that the Japanese Nation must needs have existed, and
liv'd in the Country, a considerable time before their first Odai, Mikaddo, or
Emperor, since when he was rais'd to the throne, they were then already grown
very numerous, and since not long after, as is recorded in their
Histories, great \RTars arose among them, and ma1ly thousands perish'd by
placue and famine, unless one erould bring them over at onze from another
Coulltry, or out of the Earth like Mushrooms, which is either impertinent or
improbable. I am more inclined to believe, that from the time of their
ancestors coming into the Country, they led for many ages a wandring life,
erring from place to place? with their families and cattle, which the very
disposihon of the Country, divided by mountains, seas and rlvers, seems to have
requir'd, till the happy Ninus Dsin Mu Ten Oo, civiliz'd and brought them into
better order and became himself, whether by force or choice, their first
Monarch Since that time they have been accurate, and faithfuI, ln writing the
History of their Country, and the lives and reigns of their Monarchs. To
conclude, as Dadsijno Mikotto is by them believed to have been the greatest of
the first succession of Celestial Spirits, and Ten sio Dai Dsin, that of the
second of Cod-men, so they look ufpon Sin Mu Ten Oo, as the greatest of the
third race o the now living Inhabitants, in whose family the hereditary right
to the crown with a more than human authority was continued down to Kinsan
Kiwotei, the present It4th Mikaddo, that is 2360 years, computing to the year
of Christ, 1700. I say, the hereditary right to the Crown, for the government
of the Empire itself is of late gone over into SecuIar hands, as will be shewn
more particularly in another place.
Chap. Vlll. Of the Climate of Japan, and its Produce as to Minerals.
Japan boasts of a happy and healthful
Climate. The Air is very inconstant and subject to frequent changes, in the
Winter loaded with Snow, and liable to sharp Frosts, in the Summer on the
contrary, particularly during the Dog-days, intolerably hot. It rains
frequently throughout the whole Year, but with the greatest profusion in the
Months of June and July, which are for this reason call'd Sawtsuki, that is,
Water-months. However the rainy Season in Japan is far from coming up to that
regularity, which is observ'd in other and hotter parts of the East Indies.
Thunders and Lightning happen very frequently. The Sea, which encompasses the Islands
of Japan, is very rough and stormy, which with the many rocks, clifs and
shoaJs, above and under water, make its navigation f very dangerous. It hath
two remarkable and dangerous Whirlpools. The one is call'd Faisaki, and lies
near Simabara below Amakusa. It is dangerous, chiefly when the Tide turns; for
in high water it becomes even with the surface of the Sea, but as soon as the
Tide begins to go out, it also after some violent turnings falls in of a
sudden, as I was inform'd, to the depth of fifteen fathom, swallowing up with
great force, what ships, boats, and other things happen at that fatal juncture
to come within its reach, which are dash'd to pieceSs against the rocks at the
bottom. The shatter'd pieces sometimes remain under water, sometimes they are
thrown out again at some German Miles distance. The other Whirlpool lies near
the Coasts of the Province Kijnokuni. It is call'd Narrotto, and from the
neighbourhood of the Province Awa, Awano Narrotto, which signifies, the rushing
of Aua, because it rushes with a great boistering noise about a small rocky
Island, which is by the violence of the motion kept in perpetual trembling. This,
tho' of a formidable aspect, is yet esteem'd less dangerous than the other,
because its noise being heard at a considerable distance, it may be easily
avoided. Japanese Avuthors, especially Poets, frequently allude in their
Writings to the wonderful nature and motion of this Narrotto, as do also the
Priests in the Pulpit.
Water-spouts also are frequently observ'd
to rise in the Japanese Seas, and to turn towards the Coasts. The Japanese
fancy, that they are a kind Water Dragons with a long watry Tail, flying up
into [103] the
Air with a swift and violent motion, for which reason they are by them call'd
Tatsmaki, that is, spouting Dragons.
The Soil of Japan, in itself, is for the
major part mountainous, rocky and barren, but through the indefatigable care
and industry of the Natives, it hath been made fruitfill enough to supply them
with all manner of necessaries, besides what the neighbouring Sea aSords of
fish, crabs and shells. Even the most rocky and uncultivated places yield their
plants, firuits and roots, for the sustenance of the Inhabitants, which their
indigent Ancestors by experience learnt to dress and to prepare, so as not only
to make them fit for food, but likewise pleasing and agreeabIe to the taste.
Considering this and the frugal way of living of the Japanese in general, we
need not wonder, that this vast and populous Empire is so abundantly provided
with all the necessaries of human Life, that as a particular World, which
Nature seems purposely to have separated from the rest of the Globe, by
encompassing it with a rocky and tempestuous Sea, it easily can subsist of it
self without any assistance from foreign Countries, as long as Arts and
Agriculture are follow'd and improv'd by the Natives.
The Country besides is plentifully supplied
with fresh water, there being very many Fountains, Lakes and Rivers up and down
the Empire. Some of the Rivers in particular are so large and rapid, by reason
either of the steep high Mountains and Rocks, where they arise, or because of the
profuse showers of Rain, which fall frequently, that they are not to be pass'd
over without danger, the rather since some are so impetuous as to bear no
bridges. Some of the most famous Rivers are, I Ujingava,
that is, the River Ujin. It is about a quarter of a German Mile (or an English
Mile and a half) broad, and there being no bridge laid over it, it must be
forded through. The force and rapidity, with which this River falls down from
the Mountains, is such, that even when the water is low, and scarce kneedeep
five strong Men, well acquainted with the bed of it, must be employ'd to ford a
Horse through, which with the many large Stones lying at the bottom, makes the
passage equally diiRicuIt and danger . ^ ous. The people, whose business it is
to ford passengers through this and other such like Rivers, lest they should
not take due care, are by the laws of the Country made answerable for their
lives. This is the reason, why there are but few unlucky accidents happen. 2.
The River Oomi, is famous for its surprising beginning; for it is recorded in
Japanese Histories, that it sprung up of a sudden in one night in the year
before Christ 285. It borrow'd its name from the Province where it arises. 3.
The River Askagava is remarkable, for that the depth of its bed alters
perpetually, on which account it is frequently alluded to by Japanese Authors,
chiefly Poets. [104]
Japan is very much subject to Earthquakes,
whlch happen so frequently, that the Natives dread them no more, than we
Europeans do an ordinary storm of thunder and lightning. They are of opinion,
that the cause of Earthquakes is a huge large whale's creeping under ground,
and that thq- signify nothing. Sometimes however the shakes are so violent, and
last so long, that whole Cities are thereby destroy'd, and many thousand of the
Inhabitants buried under the ruins. Such a dreadful accident happen'd, as
Father Lewis de Froes relateth (in opere de Rebus Japonicis collecto a Joh.
EIayo) in the year 1586, he himself being then in Japan. The like accidents
happen'd frequently since that time. In 1704, I had a Ietter from Batavia, from
a friend of mine, then Iately arrived from Japan, wherein among other things he
gave me an account of such a violent shock, which happen'd there in 1703,
whereby, and by a great fire, which broke out at the same time, almost the
whole City of Jedo, and the Imperial PaRace itself, were destroy'd and laid in
ashes, and upwards of 200,000 Inhabitants buried under the ruins. It 1S
remarkable, that some particuIar places in Japan are observd to be free from
alI manner of suc- ussions. The Japanese reason variousIy upon this * The effects
of this Earthquake were so stupendious and dreadful, that I could not forbear,
with the Reader's leave, to insert at length, the account, w. hich F. Lewis de
Froes giveg of it in a letter dgated thaet Slmonosekl ln the Province Nagatta
October 15. 1586. His words are:
In the year of Christ 1586 Japan was shook
by such dreadful Earthqua es, that the like was never known before. From the
Province Saca)a as far as Miaco the Earth trembled for forty days successively.
n le own of SacaJa sixty Houseswerc thrown down. At Nagasama, a sman Town of
about a thousand houses in the Kingdom Oomi the Earth gaped and swallowed up
one half of that place, the other,'had been violently lhkek is called Nagasama
bythe swallowed up by the Sea, the waters rising so high, that they overflow'd
t e Coasts, washed away the houses, and what ever they met with drown d the
Inhabitants, and left no foot step of that once rich and populous Town, but the
place on which the Castle stood, and even that under water. A strong Castle in
the Kingdom of Mino, built at t e top of a high hil1, after several violent
shocks sunk down and disappeared of a sudden, the earth gaping, that not the
least footstep remained, a lake quickly filling the place, where the
foundations of the ast e ad been. Another accident of this kind happened in the
Province IkeJa. Many more gaps and openings were observed up and own the
Empire, some of which were so wide and deep, that Guns belng fired Into them,
the balls could not be heard to reach the other end, and such a stench and
smoke issued out of them, that people would not venture to travel that way.
Quabacundono (who was afterwards called Taicosama) resided at Sacomot, in the
Castle Achec, when these Earthquakes begun, but they growing too thick and
violent he retired astily to Osacca. His palaces were strongly shook, but not
thrown
[164] Phaenomenon. Some attribute it to the holiness and sanctity of the
place, and to the powerfill protection of its Genius, or tutetar God. Others
are of opinion, that these places are not shook, because they immediately
repose upon the unmov'd Center of the Earth. The fact itself is not call'd in
question, and there are noted for having this singular Privilege, the Islands
of Gotho, the small Island Sikubusima, on which stands a most stately Temple of
Bonzes, being one of the first that was built in the Country, the Warge
mountain Kojasan near Miaco, famous for the number of its Convents, Monasteries
and Monks, besides some few others.
The greatest Riches of the Japanese soil, and
those, wherein this Empire exceeds most known Countries, consist in all sorts
of Minerals and Metals, particularly in gold, silver and copper. The many hot
Wells in several parts of the Empire, and the several smoking and burning
Mountains, shew what a stock of Sulphur, which is the mother and main
ingredient of Mineral and Metallical Bodies, is hid in the bowels of the Earth,
besides the vast quantities of this substance dug up in several places. Not fg
from Firando, where we had our factories and ware houses, before we remov'd to
Nagasaki, lies a small rocky Island, (one of those, which by reason of their
great number are call'd by the Japanese Kiukiu Sima, that is, the Ninety-nine
Islands,) which, though never so small, and encompass'd by the Sea, hath been
burning and trembling for many Centuries. Another small Island opposite to
Satzuma, which is by the Japanese call'd Fuogo, which name they borrow'd from
the Portuguese, and retain'd ever since, and which is mark'd in our Maps by the
name of Vulcanus, hath an ignivomous mountain, which hath been likewise
burning, at different intervals, for many ages. At the top of a mountain in the
Province Figo is to be seen a large cavern, formerly the mouth of a Vulcano,
but the Flame ceas'd of late, probably for wawnt of combustible matter' In the
same Province there is another place call'd - Asos famous for a Temple call'd
Asa no Gongen, or the Temple of the jealous God of Aso, not far
from which there is an almost perpetual flame issuing out of the top of a
mountain, and more visible in the night, than it is in the day-time. Another
burning Mountain lies in the Province Tsikusen, not far from a Place call'd
Kujanosse. It was formerly a Coal-mine, which thro' the carelessness of the
Miners accidentally took fire, and continued burning ever since. Sometimes a
black stench and smoke is observ'd to issue out of the top of the famous
mountain Fest, in the Province Suruga, which in height is surpass'd by only the
Pic of TeneriS, but in shape and beauty hath I think, not its equal: The top of
it is cover'd with everlasting Snow, whlch, being, as it frequently is, blown
up into flocks by the violence of the wind, and dispers'd about, represents, as
it were, a smoking hat. The Japanese Histories mention, that formerly the top
of it burnt, but that upon a new opening which was made by the violence of the
fire at the side of the mountain, the flame ceas'd soon after. Unsen is a
deform'd, large, but not very high mountain near Simabara. At all times the top
of it is bare, whitish from the colour of the sulphur, and withal resembling a
Caput Mortuum, or burnt out Massa. It smokes little, however, I could discern
the smoke arising from it at three miles distance. Its soil is burning hot in
several places, and besides so loose and spongious, that a few spots of ground
excepted, on which stanJ some trees one cannot walk over it without continual
fear, for the cracking, hollow noise perceived under foot. Its [106] suIphurous smell 1S S0 strong, that for many miles round there is
not a Bird to be seen; when it rains, the water bubbles up, and the whole
mountain seems then, as it were boiling. Many cold Springs and hot Baths arrise
on and about it Among others there is a famous hot Bath, which they believe to
be an infallible cure for the Venereal Disease, if the Patient for several days
together goes in but a few moments a day and washes himself in it. He must
begin the cure with another hot bath, not quite so strong, call'd Obamma,
situate a few leagues of, and all the while he uses the Waters, he must keep to a hot warming Diet, and as soon as
he comes out of the Bath, go to bed, and covering himself very well, endeavour
to sweat. Not far from this hot Bath is a Monastery of the Sect of Tendai. The
Monks of this place have given peculiar names to each of the hot Springs
arising in the neighbourhood, borrow'd from their quality, from the nature of
the froth a-top, or the sediment at bottom, and from the noise they make as
they come out of the ground, and they have assign'd them as Purgatories for
several sorts of Tradesmen and Handicrafts-men, whose professions seem to bear
some relation to any of the qualities above-mention'd. Thus for Instance, they
lodge the deceitfi'l Beer and Sackibrewers at the bottom of a deep muddy
Spring, the Cooks and Pastry-cook's in another, which is remarkable for its
white froth, wranglers and quarrelsom People in another, which rushes out of
the ground with a frightfill murmuring noise, and so on. After this manner
imposing upon the blind and superstitious Vulgar, they squeeze large Sums of
Money out of them, making them believe that by their Prayers and Intercession
they may be deliver'd from these places of torment after death. In that
dreadful persecution, which was rais'd in Japan against the Christian Religion,
and which hath not its equal in History; amongst innumerable other Torments
inflicted on the new Converts to make them abandon their newly embrac'd Faith,
and return to the Paganism of their Fathers, they were brought hither and tortur'd
with the hot Waters of this place. Of other hot Baths in Japan, that call'd
Obamma, is one of the most eminent, and most efficacious. It lies to the West
of the mountain Usen, about 3 Miles ofX and is said to have extraordinary
Vertues in curing several external and internal distempers, as among others, by
bathing and sweating, the Pox, which however is observ'd frequently to return,
probably because they are not skilful enough to manage this distemper, or by
reason of their not understanding the right use of baths in general. The
Province Figo hath several hot springs, about which grow, as I was inform'd, Camphire trees of an unconlmoll size, hollow and
full of water. The chief and most emillent for its virtues is a hot bath not
far from the abovemention'd temple Asano Gongen. There are also several hot
Springs in the Province Ltzisen, one for instance in the village Takijo,
another in the village Urisino. Both would prove very beneficial in curing
several [107] distempers, if the Natives did but know how to use them. I
observ'd it in all Asiatick Countries which I pass'd through in my travels,
that the Natives use the hot baths seldom more than three, or at furthest eight
days, by which, probably enough, they will find some benefit and relief, which
they are too apt to mistake for an actual cure, and in case of a relapse to lay
all the fault on the waters.
Sulphur
The greatest quantity of Sulphur is brought
from the Province Satzuma. It is dug up in a
small neighbouring Island, which from the great plenty it afforEs of this
substance is call'd Iwogasima, or the Sulphur Island. It is not above a hundred
years since they first ventur'd thither. It was thought before thawt time to be
wholly inaccessible, and by reason of the thick smoke, which was observed
continually to arise from it, and of the several spectres, and other frightfill
uncommon apparitions, people fancied to see there chiefly in the night, it was
believ'd to be a dwelling place of Devils, till at last a resolute and
couragious man oflTer'd himself, and obtain'd leave accordingly, to go and to
examine the state and situation of it. He chose fifty resolute fellows for this
expedition, who upon going on shore found neither Hell nor Devils, but a large
flat spot of ground at the top, which was so throughly cover'd with Sulphur,
that wherever they walk'd, a thick smoke issued from under their feet. Ever
since that time this Island brings in to the Prince of Satzuma about 20 chests
of silver per annum, arising only from the Sulphur dug up there, besides what
he gets by the trees and timber growing along the shore. The Country of
Simabara, particularly about the hot baths abovemention'd, aSords also a fine
pure native Sulphur, which however the Inhabitants dare not venture to dig up, for fear of oSending the
tutelar genius of the place, they having found upon trial that he was not
willing to spare it. I pass over in silence several other places, for want of a
thorough information.
Gold
Gold, the richest of all Metals, is dug up
in several Provinces of the Japanese Empire. The greatest quantity of it is
melted out of its own oar. Some they wash out of Gold sand. Some small quantity
also is contain'd in the Copper. The Emperor claims the supreme Jurisdiction of
all the gold mines, and indeed all other mines in the Empire, none of which may
be open'd, and work'd, without his express leave and consent. Of the produce of
all the Mines, which are work'd, he claims two thirds, and one third is left to
the Lord of the Province, in which the Mine lies, the latter however' as they
reude upon the spot, know how to improve their third parts so as to share
pretty equally with the Emperor. The richest Gold Oar and which yields the
finest Gold, is dug up in Sado, one of the Northern Provinces in the great
Island Nipon. Some of the veins there were formerly so rich, that one Catti of
the Oar yielded one, and sometimes two thails of Gold. But of late as I was
inform'd the veins there, and in most - other Mines, not only run scarcer, but
yield not [108] near the quantity of Gold they did formerly, which we were told,
was the occasion, amongst other reasons of the late strict orders relating to
the trade and commerce with us, and the Chinese. There is also a very rich Gold
sand in the same Province, which the Prince causes to be wash'd fonr his own
benefit, without so much as giving notice of it, much less part of the profit,
to the Court at Jedo. After the Gold Mines of Sado, those of Surunga were
always esteem'd the richesCt, for besides that this Province yielded at all
times a great quantity of Gold-Oar, there is some Gold contain'd even m the
CoFper dug up there. Among the Gold-mines of the Provlnce Satzuma, there was
one so rich, that a Catti of the Oar was found upon trial to yield from four to
six thails of Gold, for which reason the Emperor hath given strict orders, not to work it, for fear so great
a treasure should be exhausted too soon A mountain on the Gulf Ookus, in the
district of Omura which had lean'd on one side for a considerable time happen'd
some years ago to fall over into the Sea, anl there was found at the bottom of
the place where it stood, so rich a Gold sand, that, as I was credibly
informad, it yielded one half of pure gold. It lay somewhat deep and was to be
fetch'd up by Divers. But this rich harvest lasted not long, for a few years
after, in a great storm and extraordinary high tide, the Sea overflow'd all
that spot of ground, and cover'd at once these inestimable riches with mud and
clay to the depth of some fathom. The poor people in the neighbourhood still
busy themselves washing the sand about this mountain, which contains some Gold
but in so inconsiderable a quantity, that they can hardlj get a livelyhood by
it. There is another Goldmine in the Province Tsikungo, not far from a village
call'd Tossino, but so full of water, that they can not go on with working it.
However the situation of the mine is such, that by cutting the rock, and making
an opening beneath the mouth of the Mine, the water might be easily drawn of. This
was attempted accordingly, but as they went to work, there arose of a sudden
such a violent Storm of thunder and lightning, that the workmen were obliged to
desist and to fly for shelter, which made the superstitious vulgar believe,
that the Tutelar God and Protector of the place, unwilling to have the bowels
of the earth committed to his trust thus riffled, rais'd this Storm purposely
to make them sensible how much he was displeas'd at this undertaking. Nor was
there any further attempt made since for fear of provoking his anger and wrath
stin more. Such another accident, and which had the same eSect, happen'd at the
opening of a Gold-mine in the Island Amakusa, for it was so suddenly fill'd
with water, which broke out of the mountain, and destroy'd all the works, that
the Miners had scarce time to escape and to save their lives.
Silver.
There are some Silver Mines in the Province
Bingo. Others, and these much richer, at a place call'd Kattami, in one of the
Northern Provinces: Others in other places, which I forbear mentioning, for
want of sufficient informa tion. The two Istands Ginsima and Kinsima, that is,
Gold and Silver Islands, which lie to the East of fiapan, and which I had
occasion to speak of in the fourth Chapter of this Book, deserve a place here,
if it be true, what the Japanese boast, and what their very Names and
Characters seem to imply, of their Wealth and Riches.
Copper, is the most common of all Metals
dug up in Japan, and the produce of Copper-mines enriches several Provinces of
this Empire. It is at present dug up chiefly in the Provinces of Suruga,
Atsingo and Kijnokuni. That of Kijnokuni is the finest, most malleable and
fittest for work of any in the World. That of Atsingo is course, and seventy
Catti's of it must be mix'd with thirty Catti's of the Kijnese to make it
malleable and fit for use. That of Suruga is not only exceedingly fine and
without faults, but charg'd with a considerable quantity of Gold, which the
Japanese at present separate and refine, much better than they did formerly,
which occasions great complaints among the Refiners and Brahmines upon the
Coasts of Cormandel There are also some Copper-mines in the Pro vince of
Satzuma,which the Emperorvery lately gave leave to work. All the Copper is
brought to Saccai, one of the five Imperial Towns, where it is refin'd and cast
into small Cylinders, about a span and a half long, and a finger thick. As many
of these Cylinders, as amount to one pickel, or • 125 1. weight, are
pack'd up into square wooden boxes, and sold to the Dutch from twelve to
thirteen Maas the pickel It is one of the chiefest Commodities the Dutch buy in
Japan, and they carry on a great Trade with it. There is besides a sort of
courser Copper, which is cast into large flat roundish lumps, or cakes, and is
bought a great deal cheaper than the other, as it is also much inferior in
goodness and beauty. Brass is very scarce in Japan, and much dearer than
Copper, the Calaminestone being imported from Tunquin in flat cakes, and sold at a very good price.
The Province of Bungo aSords a small
quantity of Till, which is so exceedingly fine and white, that it almost comes
up to Silver. There is but little use made of this Metal in the Country.
Iron is dug up only upon the confines of
the three Provinces MimaSaka, Bitsju and Bisen. But it is found there in very
large quantitles. It is refin'd upon the spot, and cast into Staffs or
Cylinders, two spans long. Japanese Merchants buy it at the place, and export
it all over the Empire. It is much of a price with Copper, Iron tools being
full as dear, or rather dearer than those of Copper and Brass. Such
Houshold-goods, Hooks, Cramp-irons in Buildings and Ships, and other
Instruments, as are in other Countries made of Iron, are made in [110] Japan of Copper or Brass. They do not dress their Victuals in
brass pans, but have a particular sort of kettles or pans which are made of a
composition of Iron, and are pretty thin. The old ones of this sort are very
much esteem'd, and bought at a great rate, they having somewhat particular in
their shape and make, which at present they have lost the art to imitate.
They have no want of Coals in Japan, they
being dug up in great quantity in the Province Tsikusen about Kujanisse, and in
most Northern Provinces.
Salt is made of Sea-water in several
maritime Provinces. They make it thus. They close in a spot of Ground, and fill
it with fine loose Sand, then they pour the Sea-water upon it, and let it dry.
This they repeat several times, till they think the Sand is sufficiently
saturated with Salt. Then they take it out and put it into a large Trough, with
holes at the bottom, and putting fresh Sea-water upon it, let it filtrate
through the Sand. The Lye is boil'd to a good consistence, and the Salt thus
obtain'd is calcin'd in earthen Pots, till it becomes white, and fit for use
and sale.
Agats, of several sorts, some extraordinary
fine, of a bluish colour not unlike Saphires, as also some Cornelians and
Jaspers, are brought from the mountain TSugaar, upon the Northern extremities
of the great Province Osju, opposite to the Country of Jedo.
Pearls
Pearls, by the Japanese call'd Kainotamma,
which is as much as to say, Shell Jewels, or Jewels taken out of Shells, are
found almost every where about SaiKokf in Oysters and several other Sea-shells.
Every body is at liberty to fish them. Formerly the Natives had little or no
value for them, till they were apprizsd of it by the Chinese, who would pay
good prices Gor them, the Chinese Women being very proud of wearing Necklaces,
and other Ornaments of Pearls. The largest and finest Pearls are found in a
small sort of Oyster, call'd Akoia, which is not unlike the Persian
Pearl-shell, much oft the same shape, both valves shutting close, about a hand
broad, exceeding thin and brittle, black, smooth and shining on the out slde,
within pretty rough and unequal, of a whitish colour and glitter inz like
Mother of Pearl. These Pearl-shells are found only in the Seas about Satzuma,
and in the Gulf of Omura. Some of the Pearls weigh from four to five Condonins,
and these are sold for a hundred Colans a piece. The Inhabitants of the Riuku
Islands buy most of those, which are found about Satzuma, they trading to that
Province. Those on the contrary which are found in the Gulf of Omura, are sold
chiefly to the Chinese and Tunquinese, and it is computed that they buy for
about 3000 Thails a year. This great profit occasion'd the strict orders, which
were made not long ago by the Princes both of Satzuma ' and Omura, importing,
that for the future there should be no more of these Oysters sold in the Market
with other Oysters, as had been done formerly. [111] I
procurnd some in private from Omura, not without great difficulty. I was told a
very extraordinary thing of this sort of Pearls, and strongly assurJd of the
truth or the fact, which is, that they have somevrhat of a prolifick quality,
by virtue of which, when some of the largest are put into a box full of a
peculiar Japanese cheek varnish, made of another shell call'd Takaragai (which I shall describe in another place) one or
two young Pearls will grow on the sides, and who come to maturity, which they
do in about three years time, drop of. These Pearls, by reason of their
scarcity, are kept in private Families, and the possessors seldom part with
them, unless upon urgent necessity. All this however I deliver only upon
hearsay, having my self seen none of this sort of PearI. There is another
Shell, which sometimes yields PearIs, found plentifillly upon all the Japanese
Coasts, and call'd by the Natives Awabi. It is an Univalve, in shape almost
oval, pretty deep, open on one side, where it sticks to the Rocks and to the
bottom of the Sea, with a row of holes, which grow bigger, the nearer they come
to the circumference of the Shelt, rough and limy on its outward surface,
frequently with Corals Sea-plants and other ShelIs sticking to it, on the
inside of an exquisite Mother of Pearl's glimmering, sometimes rais'd into
whitish pearly excrescencies, which are likewise observ'd in the common Persian
Pearl-shell. A great lump of flesh fills the cavity of this ShelI, for which
sole reason they are look'd for by Fishermen, being a very good commodity for
the market. They have an Instrument made on purpose to pull them ofF from the
sides of the Rocks, to which they stick close. Another Shell, the name of which
I could not learn, yields a very large Pearl, which sometimes weighs from five
to six Condonins, but they are of a dirty'yellow colour, ilI shap'd, and worth
but little. A pretty good sort of Pearl, is sometimes observ'd to grow in the
very Flesh of a Shell, which is calI'd by the Natives Tairaggi, and is found in
the Gulf of Arima, between Janagava and Isafaje. It is a flat sort of a ShelI
oblong, almost trianguIar, a little crooked on each side, about a span and a
half long, and a span broad, where broadest, thin, transparent, smooth, and
polish'd like Horn, but very brittle.
Naphta, of a reddish colour, by the
Japanese calI'd Tsutsono Abra, which signifies red Earth, is found in a River
of the Province Jetsingo. It is taken up in such
[174] places, where the water hath little or no run, and the Natives burn it in Lamps, instead of Oyl.
Ambergreese
Some Ambergreese
is found upon the Coasts of Satzuma, and of the Riuku Islands. A much greater
quantity comes from the Coasts of Khumano, as they call them, whereby must be
understood the Southern Coasts of Kiinokuni, Isje, and some neighbouring
Provinces. It is ftound chiefly in the Intestins of a Whale, which is caught
frequently upon the Japanese Coasts, and is by the Natives call'd Fiakfiro,
that is, the hundred fathom Fish, because of the length of its Intestins, which
is suppos'd to equal that number of fathoms. it
is found, as i observ'd, in the intestins of this whale, particullarly in the
lower guts, mix'd with chalky limy excrements, almost as hard as stone, and
'tis from the hardness of these excrements, they conjecture upon dissecting,
whether or no they are like to meet with ambergreese. the natives have given a
very despicable name to this precious com modity, a name however becoming the
meanness of its origine, for they call it kusurano fu, that is, the excrement
of whales. the ambergreese, as it is tore olf by the waves from the bottom of
the sea, and thrown upon the coasts, before it is swallow'd by the whales is a
deform'd, flat, slimy substance, not unlike a cow-turd, and withal of a very
disagreeable ungratefull smell. people that find it thus floating on the
surface of the water, or lying upon the coasts, take several small pieces,
squeeze and press them close together, into the form of a round ball, which as
it grows dry, becomes also more solid and weighty. others mix and knead it with
meal, or flower of ricehusks, by which means they not only encrease the
quantity, but heighten and better the colour. however, the ambergreese thus
adulterated is easity known, for if you take any quantity and burn it, there
will remain a coal, proportionable to the quantity of the stuff mix'd with it.
it is observ'd besides that the worms get quickly into this spurious sort of
ambergreese. others adulterate it, by mixing it with a certain powder'd rosin
of a very agreeable scent, but this cheat also is easily discover'd, for upon burning a
piece of it, the mixture of Rosin will evidently appear by the very colour,
smell and quality of the smoke. The Chlnese have another way of trying whether
it be genuine, they scrape some of it very fine upon hot boiling Tea-water, if
genuine, it will dissolve and difuse equally, which the adulterated sort doth
not. The Natives use it no otherwise but as an ingredient of other well scented
species, in order, as they say, to fix their volatile smell. In the main they
value it but little, and 'tis owing entirely to the Dutch and Chinese, who
would buy it up at any rate, that they haare now learnt to prize it. And yet
every body is at liberty to take it up, where he finds it, and to sell it as
his own property. During my stay in Japan, there was a piece to be sold of I40 Catti's weight, and of a greyish colour. It was too
Iarge for any single person to purchase, for which reason they sold it by
retail, from sixty to seventy Thails a Catti. I bought my self for about thirty
ThaiEs of that which was blackest. (A more particular Account of the Ambergreese
is inserted in the Appendix)
All sorts of
Submarine Plants, Shrubs, Corals, Stones,
Submarint SubsZanrel.
Mushrooms,
Sea-fans, Corallines, Fuci, Algae, and the like, as also Shells o f all ki nd
s, are fo und pren ti fu lly in the Japanese Seas, no ways inferior in beauty
to those found about Amboina and the Spice Islands. But the Natives value them
so little, that they won't be at the trouble of looking for
them, and if by chance they happen to fish
them up amongst other things, their way is to carry them to the next tempie, or
chapel of jebus, who is the neptune of the country, thinking that it is not an
unpleasing offerint to this god, whom they look upon, and worship, as the
protector of sea-faring people.
Minerals not found Japan. Antimony. Salarmoniac,
Quick-silver
It remains to say
something of the Minerals and Mineral substances, which have not as yet been
found in Japan, and are imported from beyond Sea. Antimony and Salarmoniac are
absolutely wanted, nor are their qualitiesand
uses in the Ieast known to the natives.
Borax
Quicksilver and Borax are imported by the Chinese. I met
however with two sorts of Borax, growing naturally in Japan, but they are so
throughly mix'd with heterogeneous substances, that the Inhabitants don't
Sublimate
think it worth their while topick them up. Sublimate Mercury is very much ask'd for by some
private People, who will give an extravagant price for it. They use it as the
chief Ingredient of a Mercurial water, which is in great vogue among them for
the cure of ulcers, cancers, and other cutaneous diseases. CinnabarNative Cinnabar is by them given inwardly, in several distempers.
The artificial Cinnabar they make use of for a colour. Both are imported from
China. The buying and selling of this Commodity is in the hands of private
Merchants, who monopolize it by virtue of Letters Patents from the Emperor. The
native Cinnabar in general, is of a beautiful red colour, but some of it is so
exquisitely fine, that it is sold for more than its weight in Silver.
Chap. IX. Of the Fertility of the Country, as to Plants.
Fruitfulness of Japan.
It is not in the least surprising,
considering either the peculiar happiness of the Japanese Climate, or the
industry of its laborious Inhabitants, that the Country affords so large a
stock, and such an infinite variety of plants and fruits, both wild and
cultivated. as it may deservedly boast of. Most of these their Forefathers,
indigent and frugal as they were, used for their food and sustenance. In
succeeding ages, as wealth and riches encreas'd, the taste also became more
refined, and their tables more sumptuous and magnificent. In this present
Chapter, I will take notice only of such Plants as are of a more extensive use,
and as to the rest refer the more curious Reader to my Amoenitates Exoticae,
wherein I have given a Catalogue, and begun a more accurate and botanical
Description of them.
Mulberry-trees
Among the Trees the deservedly claims the
first Place. For although its fruits, both black and white, be altogether
insipid, and not fit for eating, yet this defect is sufficiently made good by
the extensive usefulness of its leaves, which are the common Food of Silk-worms
It grows in most parts of Japan, but in great plenty in the Northern Provinces,
where many Cities and Villages subsist almost wholly upon the Silk
Manufactures, tho' the Silk wove there be not of the finest. The best and most
curious Stuff are made by the banish'd Grandees in the Island Fatsinsio,
weaving being their chief amusement, but they make them of fine foreign Silk.
The Kadsi, or Paper-tree, is of the Mulberry Kind. Tho' it
Paper-tree
grows wild in
the Country, yet they transplant and cultivate it in several places, by reason
of its great usefulness. It is observed to grow with surprizing quickness, and
to spread its branches very far. It affords a great quantity of bark, out of
which they make Paper, as also ropes, matches, stuffs, cloth, and several other
Things. This Tree also, and the way of making Paper out of its Bark, which is
very laborious and tedious, I have more fully describ'd in my Amoenitates
Exoticae. (The Account which the Author here mentions hath been inserted in the
Appendix.)
Varnish-Tree
The Urusi or Varnish-Tree, is another of
the noblest and most useful Trees of this
Country. It affords a milky Juice, which the Japanese make use of to varnish,
and as we call it, to japan all their Houshold-goods, dishes, and plates of
Wood, and this from the Emperor down to the meanest Peasant. For even at Court,
and at the Imperial Table, services of lacker'd ware are preferr'd to those of
gold and Silver. Another kind of Varnish-tree with narrow leaves, is call'd
Faasi: It grows wild on hills and mountains. It affords a small quantity of
Milk, and that too of a very bad sort, and therefore the Natives think it
hardly worth their while to gather it. The true Urusi is of a kind peculiar to
this Country. It grows in the Provinces Figo and Tsikoku. But that which grows
in Jamatto is reckon'd the fittest for use, and to yield a better sort of Varnish, than it doth any where else out of this Province.
The Indian Varnish-tree, which I take to be the true Anacardinus, is a Tree
quite different from the Urusi of the Japanese. At Siam it is call'd Rack-tree.
It grows and bears fruits in most Eastern Countries, but is observ'd to afford
none of its milky juice to the West of the River Ganges, whether because of the
barrenness of the SoiI, or thro' the carelessness and ignorance of the Natives,
who do not know how to manage its culture. The greatest quantity of the Milk of
this Indian Varnish tree is brought from the Kingdoms of Siam and Cambodia, and
sold very cheap all over the East-Indies. It is imported even into Japan, where
the Natives use it to lacker things of little value, and also as an ingredient
of their scarcer and better sort of Varnish. (The Japanese Varnish-tree is
describ'd and figur'd in the Amoenitates, pag. 792.) [115]
Bay-tree.
Lauri; or Bay-trees of several kinds grow
in Japan. That which bears red berries is a Cannelifera spuria, or rather, by
reason of its viscosity, a Cassia lignea. It
Spurious Cinnamon-Tree
resembles exactly the Cinnamon-tree, both
in its shape, and in the figure and substance of its leaves. But the bark falls
far short of that agreeable sweetness, which is peculiar only to the bark of
the true Cinnamon, and it hath more of the aromatick sharpness of a Costus. T
his Imperfection I take to be owing entirely to the quality of the Soil,
wherein it grows. For I observ'd also, that the bark of the Malabarian,
Sumatran, and Javan Cinnamon-trees, (which latter is wholly neglected) hath not
near that eminent degree of sharpness and agreeableness to the taste, which the
true Ceylonese Cinnamon is so much and so deservedly esteem'd for; that besides
it is apt either to lose its aromatick quality in a short time, or that its
sharp pungent Particles are so wrapt up in a viscous substance, as to make it
altogether unworthy of bearing the very Name of Cinnamon, a substance, which is
suppos'd to yield a fine, pleasant, fragrant Oyl, which no Cassia lignea ever
will. (v. Amoenit. Exot. p. 772.)
Camphire-tree
The Kus, or Camphire-tree, is also of the
Laurel-kind. It bears black and purple Berries. The Camphire is prepar'd by the
Country-people in the Province Satzuma,and the Islands Gotho, by a simple
decoction of the roots and wood cut into small pieces. It is extremely cheap
and 80 to 100 Catti's of the Japanese boil'd Camphire may be had for one single
Catti of the true Bornean Camphire, which is said to be a Natural substance
gather'd on the stumps of old Camphire-trees in the island of Borneo, upon
incisions made between the Bark and Wood. (The Japanese Camphire-tree is
describ'd and figur'd p. 770. & seq. of the Amoenitates.)
Tea
Tsianoki, that is the Tea-shrub, is one of
the most useful Plants growing in Japan, and yet it is allow'd no other room
but round the borders of Rice and Cornfields, and in other barren Places) unfit
for the culture of other things. The common drink of the Japanese is brew'd of
the larger leaves of this Shrub; but the young and tender leaves dried,
powder'd and mix'd in a Cup of hot water into a sort of Soup, are drank in
houses of people of quality before and after their meals: And it is the custom
of the Country to present friends that come to visit them, with one or more
dishes of Tea, both when they come and go. (A complete Description of this
Shrub, of its culture, growth, &c. hath been inserted in the Appendix.)
Sansio
Sansio, is a middle-sized Tree with
prickles. They make use of its bark and husks instead of pepper or ginger, and
they eat the leaves by reason of their pleasant aromatick taste, as they do
also the Riches, which grow in the Country. (v. Amoen. Ex. p. 892, where this
Tree is describ'd and figur'd.)
Fig-trees
There are three different sorts of
Fig-trees growing in Japan. One is call'd Kaki,
if otherwise it may be call'd a Fig-tree, it differing from it in several
particulars. It grows very plentifully in all parts of the Empire. It is a very
ugly deform'd sort of a Tree to look at, much like a short old Apple-tree. It
hath long oval leaves, without
[180] notches. The fruit resembles a reddish Apple both in shape and
colour, and its fleshy part hath the taste of a delicate Fig. The seed is of a
hard, and almost stony Substance, and not unlike Gourd-seeds. It is no less
commendable for its great fruitfulness, than it is for its extensive use, for
the fruits of it dried afford a pleasant and agreeable food for rich and poor.
The Chinese preserve them with Sugar. The second sort of Figs is not unlike
that which grows with us in Europe, only it grows on a Tree, with broad,
oblong, rough leaves without 4 notches. Our European Fig-tree makes up the
third sort. It was brought into the Country, and planted there by the
Portuguese. It bears a very large fruit, bigger than ours, and I think better
tasted. But it is very scarce. I need not mention here any thing of the
Sycamores, or
Wild-fig-tree
Wild-fig-tree, because its fruits are not
eat in the Country, tho' it grows there very plentifully. (The two first sorts
of the Fig-tree are describ'd and figur'd, p. 803, & seq. of the Amoen.
Exoticae)
Chesnut-trees
Chesnut-trees grow in great plenty in
Japan, particularly in the Province Tsikusen, and they bear Chesnuts much
larger and better than ours. Apple-trees, such as we have them in Europe, they
know nothing of. Nor have they more than one
sort of Pears, of that kind, which we call
Pears
Winter-pears. They grow in great plenty,
and come to an extraordinary bigness, the least weighing seldom less than a
pound: But they are not fit to be eat raw.
Wallnut-trees
Wallnut-trees grow chiefly in the Northern
Provinces. In the same Provinces grows a certain tall kind of Taxus,
Kaja
calI'd by the Japanese Kaja, with oblong
nuts, inclos'd in a fleshy pulp, and not unlike, in bigness and shape, to the
Arrack-nut. These Nuts are not very agreeable to z the taste, when fresh, tho'
taken-out of their pulp, for they have something astringent in them: They taste
better when dried. they have a gentle purging quality, which is owing to their
sweet Oyl, and are for their many medicinal vertues serv'd at table along with
the desert. The Oyls express'd out of these Nuts is very sweet and agreeable, and tastes not unlike the Oyl of sweet Almonds. It is
much commended for its medicinal vertues, and also made use of to dress
victuals. The smoke of the kernels of these Nuts is the chief ingredient of the
best and dearest Japanese Ink. (This kind of Taxus is describ'd and figur'd, p.
814 of the Amoenit.)
Pistaches
Another sort of Nuts, call'd Ginan, as big
as large Pistaches grow very plentifully almost every where in Japan, on a fine
tall tree, the leaves of which are not unlike the large leaves of an Adianthum.
The Japanese call it Itsionoki. The Nuts affort plenty of Oyl, which is
also much commended for several uses. As to a more accurate description of this
Tree, I refer the Reader to the Amoenitates Exotic. p. 812. There are two sorts
of Oaks grow in the Country, both different from ours.
Oakl.
The Acorns of the larger sort are boil'd
and eat by the common People. The fruit of the Naatsme, or PaliurusNaatsme
Of Prosp. Alpinus, as it grows in the
Country, is extraordinary good, and I think much larger than I saw it any where
else.
Pome Citron-trees. Oranges. Lemons.
Pome Citron-trees are to be seen only in
the Gardens of the curious. Oranges and Lemons grow very plentifully, and of
different sorts. That sort of Lemons, which is reckon'd the best, is call'd
Mican. It resembles a Peach, both in shape and bigness, and hath an excellent
aromatick flavour, but tastes somewhat sower. Another sort they call Kinkan. It
is much scarcer, in shape and bigness not unlike a Nutmeg, and exceedingly
sower. It grows on a shrub, rather than a Tree, and is much used n dressing
their victuals, and in what they call Atsiaer. (v. Am. Exot. p. 801.)
Vines. Brambleberries. Rasberries.
Strawberries. Plums.
They plant but few Vines, because they
observe, that the Grapes won't easily ripen.
Brambleberries and Rasberries, are not very agreeable to the taste.
Strawberries are entirely insipid and not eat. With Peaches, Apricocksand Plums they are plentifully supplied. Of Plums particularly they
have two sorts, both different from ours, one white, the other purple, both
granulated like Mulberries, and ingredients of what they call Atsiaer. Cherry trees, and the like, are kept only for the sake of the flowers, as
are also by some the Apricock and Plumtrees which they improve much by culture,
so that the flowers become as big as roses, and in the Spring, when they are in
full blossom, afford a most delightful sight about their temples, in their
gardens and walks, the trees being thick cover'd with the Flowers, as with
Snow.
Firs
Firs and Cypress-trees are the most common
Trees in their woods and forests. There are several different sorts of both.
Houses and Ships are built of the wood, of which are made also all sorts of
Houshold-goods, as cabinets, trunks, boxes, tubs and the like. The branches, and
what falls down, serve for fewel and fire-wood. - The common people burn also
the nuts and leaves, which fall down from the trees, and gathering the same
daily they keep the ground and roads neat and clean. For ornament's sake, they
are planted in rows along the roads, and over the ridges of hins and mountains,
which makes travelling very pleasant. The natives, as they improve every inch
of ground, take care to plant them in sandy and barren places, which are good
for nothing else. No Firs nor Cypress-trees may be cut down, without leave from
the Magistrate of the place; and lest the felling of them should in time too
much prejudice their growth they must always plant young ones instead of those
they cut down.
Bambous
Bambous are very common, and of great use
here, as every where in the Indies. Several sorts of Houshold goods, baskets,
matches, and other things are made of them, as are also gutters and spouts, and the
walls of houses. A particular sort of 13ambous grows in the Province Oomi,
which the Dutch export by the name of Rottang, and sell for walking-canes. I
shall explain else where, how they are fitter for sale. Both Firs and Bambous
are in great esteem among the Japanese, for their constant verdure; and the
superstitious believe, that they have no small influence over the happy
occurrences of human life. The Temple-walks, and other holy places, are adorn'd with them, chiefly upon their
festivals and other solemn days: And they make frequent allusions to them in
their emblematical and poetical writings, particularly in congratulatory Poems;
for they are of opinion, that they will subsist a long while, that common
Bambous will stand several hundred years, and that the common Fir, which they
call MatznokiX will come to the age of a thousand, that then it will bend down
its branches towards the ground, as not being able to support itself any
longer. And lest the truth of this assertion should be call'd in question, they
shew up and down the Country some Firs and Bambous of an uncommon size indeed,
and pretended long standing. I have seen some extraordinary large ones my self.
Cypress-trees
Finoki, and Suggi are two sorts of
Cypress-trees, yielding a beautiful light whitish wood, but nevertheless of a
good substance, and remarkable for this singular quality, that it sucks in no
water, and might well pass for Cedar-wood. It hath been sometimes forbid by the
Emperor to fell these trees for any use whatsoever. But little regard is had to
orders of this kind, particularly in those provinces which are remote from
Court, unless there be a very severe punishment put upon transgression thereof.
Stinking Maki-Tree. Oak. Iron-tree.
Ksamaki, that is a stinking Maki-tree,
Ssinoki a sort of Oak, and Jusnoki, that is
Iron-tree, so call'd from the uncommon hardness
of its wood, are all very common trees. Most Houses are built of the wood of
them. Fatznoki, a tree growing about the City of Jeseri, and the root of the
Camphire-tree, afford the best and scarcest wood for cabinets, chests of
drawers, and such sort of work, by reason of the curious running of its grain.
Japan I think may vie with most, if not
all, known Countries, for a great variety of beautiful plants and flowers,
wherewith kind nature hath most liberally and curiously adorn'd its fields, hills,
woods and forests. Some of these they transplanted into gardens, and improv'd
by assiduity and culture to the utmost, and indeed to a
[184]
interr'd. Nobody may, under severe penalties, insult or abuse them,
and to kill them is a capital Crime, whatever mischief they do. In this case,
notice of their miF demeanours must be given to their keepers, who are alone
empower'd to chastise and to punish them. This extra
Fig. 31. Foo, a chimerical bird of
Paradise, according to the Chinese
ordinary care for the preservation of the
Dog-kind is the effect of a superstitious fancy of the now reigning t Emperor,
who was born in the Sign of the Dog, (The Reader is desir'd to take notice,
that the Dog is one of the
[199] twelve Celestial Signs of the Japanese, as shall be shewn hereafter
in Book II. Chap. 2.) and hath for this reason so great an esteem for this
Animal, as the great Roman Emperor Augustus Caesar is reported in Histories to
have
Fig. 32. Foo, a chimerical bird of
Paradise, as figur'd by the Japanese
had fior
Rams. The natives tell a pleasant tale on this head. A Japanese as he was
carrying up the dead carcass of a Dog to the top of a mountain, in order to its
burial, srrew impatient, grumbled and curs'd the
Emperor's birth Qiay and whimsical commands. His companion, tho'
[200]
Chap. X. Of the plenty of the Country, as to Beasts Birds, Reptiles, and Insects.
Of the Animals of this Country some are
merely Chimerical, not existing in nature nor invented by the Japanese
themselves but borrow'd from their Neighbours the Chinese. Of these it will not
be improper to give some account, before I proceed to describe those, which
really exist.
Kirin, according to the description and
figure, which the Japanese give of it, is a winged Quadruped, of incredible
swiftness, with two soft horns standing before the breast, and bent backwards,
with the body of a Horse, and claws of a Deer, and a head which comes nearest
to that of a Dragon. The good nature and holiness of this Animal are so great,
that they say, it takes special care, even in walking, not to trample over any
the least Plant, nor to injure any the most inconsiderable Worm, or Insect,
that might by chance come under its feet. Its conception and birth require a
particuIar constellation in Heaven, and the birth of a Sesin upon earth. Sesin
is a Man endow'd by nature with an incomparable understanding, and a more than
human penetration, a Man capable to dive into the Mysteries of divine and
supernatural things, and withal so full of love towards Mankind, as to reveal
his discoveries for their common benefit. There are famous, as such, the two
Chinese Emperors Gio and Siun, the memory of whose excellent Government, and
the great discoveries they made in the knowledge and virtues of Plants, will be
always dear in that Empire: Koosi and Moosi, two Chinese Philosophers: Siaka an
Indian Philosopher, and great discoverer of supernatural truths: Darma in
China, and Sotoktais in Japan, both founders d Persons of an unspotted holy
Life. of particular Sects) an of this Creature according to the 25. is the.
Figure the same according to the Japanese.) Chinese) and Fig. .26 there are two
other Chimera's of the Besides the Kirin)ne is call'd Suugu, represented in .
Quadruped kind: unlike a Leopard, as to its shape, It It before the breast,
bent back but hath two soft s call'd Kaitsu, or Kaisai. This hath 8 wards- The
other Fox in its shape, two horns before something of the I horn in the
forehead and a row the breast, another of prickles, like the Crocodile, along
the back (Se After the four-footed Chimera's, the Tats, Dria or . Dsja, as it
is call'd by the Japanese, that is, the must be mention'd. The [124] Chronicles and histories of their Gods and Heroes are full of
fabulous Stories of this Animal. They believe that it dwells at the bottom of
the Sea, as in its proper element. They represent it in their Books, as a huge,
long, four-footed Snake, scaly allover the body)
like the Crocodil, with sharp prickles, along the back, but the head is beyond
the rest monstrous and terrible The Tail of the Japanese Oragon ends, as it e)
into a two-edged sword. (Fig. 29.) Some of the Japanese Emperor's cloth, his
arms, Scimeters, knives, and the like, as also the furniture and hangings of
the Imperial Palace) are adorn'd with figures of this Dragon, holding a round
jewel, or pearl in the right fore-claw. The Japanese Dragon hath but three
claws on each foot, whereby it is distinguish'd from the Chinese I i Dragon,
which is represented with five. Tatsmak;erial another Dragon, with a long watry
tail. It is believ,ds that this also lives at the bottom of the Sea, and b'. fi
in' up from thence into the Air, occasions by its viOlentt turnings, what we
call a Water-spout, which Phtnomenon is very common on the Japanese Seas, and observ'd
frequently to break towards the Coasts (See Fig. 30 )
Foo is a Chimerical, but beautiful, large
Bird, of Paradise, of a near kin to the Phinix of the ancients It dwells in the
high regions of the air, and it hath this common with the Kirin, that it never
comes down from thence) as the Japanese religiously believe, to honour the
Earth with its blessed presence, but upon the birth of a Sesin, or that of a
great Emperor, or upon some such other extraordinary occasion. The Foo of the
Chinese is represented in Fig 3I. and that of the Japanese in Fig. 32. Thus far
the Chimerical Animals. I proceed now to give an account of such as do really
exist.
Considering the largeness and extent of the
Japanese Empire, it is but sparingly supply'd with four-footed Beasts, wild or
tame. The former find but few desart places, where they could increase and
multiply, and follow their usual shy way of life. The latter are bred up only
for carriage and agriculture. Pythagoras's doctrine of the transmigration of
the Soul being receiv'd almost universally, the natives eat no Flesh-meat, and
living, as they do, chiefly upon Vegetables, they know how to improve the
ground to much better advantage, than by turning it into meadows and pastures
for breeding of Cattle. l'o begin with the tame Beasts. There are Horses in the
Country: They are indeed little in the main, but some of them not inferior in
shape, swiftness and dexterity to the Persian Breed. They serve for state, for
riding, for carriage and ploughing. The best Horses come from the Provinces
Satzuma and Osju. And a certain breed of nd little Horses from Kai is very much
esteem'd. Oxen and Cows serve only for ploughing and carriage. Of milk and
butter they know nothing. They have a sort of large gudless of a monstrous
size, with bunches on the back, like Carnels, which serve for carriage and
transport of goods only, < [125] in large Cities. They know nothing of Asses, Mules, Camels, and Elephants. Sheep and
Goats were ffi kept formerly by the Dutch and Portuguese at Firando, where the
kind still subsists. They might be bred in the Country to great advantage, if
the natives were permitted to eat the flesh, or knew how to manage and
manufacture the Wool. They have but few Swine, which we brought over from
China, and are bred by the COuntrye people in Fisen, not indeed for their own
Use, wh;ch would be contrary to their superstitious Notions) but to sell them
to the Chinese, who come over for trade every year, and are great admirers of
Pork, tho' otherwise the doctrine of Pythagoras, about the transmigration of
Soulsa hath found place likewise in China. Since the now reigning Emperor came
to the throne, there are more Dogs bred in Japan, than petrhaps in any one
Country hateverX and than there were before even in this Empire. They have
their Masters indeed, but lie about the Streets, and are very troublesome to
passengers and travellers. Every street must, by special command of the
Emperor, keep a certain number of these Animals, and provide them with
victuals. There are Huts built in every street, where they are taken care of
when they fall sick. Those that die, must be carried up to the tops of
mountains and hills, as the usual burying-places, and very decently interr'd.
Nobody may, under severe penaltie abuse them, and to kill them is a capital
Crime, whatev mischief they do. In this case, notice of their er demeanours
must be given to their keepers, who are al s empower'd to chastise and to
punish them. This extraordinary care for the preservation of the Dog-kind is
the effect of a superstitious fancy of the now reigning Emperor, who was born
in the Sign of the Dog, (The Reader is desir'd to take notice, that the Dog is
one of the 198 twelve Celestial Signs of the Japanese, as shall be shewn
reafter in Book II. Chap. 2.) and hath for this reason so eat an esteem for
this Animal, as the great Roman Emperor Augustus Caesar is reported in
Histories to have had for Rams. The natives tell a pleasant tale on this head.
A Japanese, as he was carrying up the dead carcass of a Dog to the top of a
mountain, in order to its burial, grew impatient, grumbled and curs'd the
Emperor's birth day and whimsical commands. His companion, tho' 199 sensible of
the justice of his complaints, bid him ho1 w tongue and be quiet, and instead
of swearing and d his return thanks to the Gods, that the Emperor was no ng) in
the Sign of the Horse, because in that case th n wou'd have been much heavier.
Greyhounds and Spanle1 are wanting. They hunt but little, and only with
conlmOll Dogs, this kind of diversion being not very proper fo populous a
Country, and where there is so little ga They have a particular beautiful kind
of Cats, which is a domestick Animal with them, as with us. They are of a
whitlsh colour, with large yellow and black spots, and a very short Tail, as if
it [126] had
been purposely cut oi They don't care for mousing, but love mightily to be
carried about, and caress'd chiefly, by Women. Of four footed wild Beasts the
Country produces Deer, Hares and Boars, all which the adherents of some Sects
are permitted to eat at certain times of the year. The Island MijOsima, or
Akino MijOsima, so call'd from the neighbourhood of the Province Aki, is famous
for a particular breed of Deer, which they say are very tame and familiar with
the Inhabitants. It is contrary to the Laws of the Country to chase and to kill
them. The Country People take care to remove their dead Carcases from their
Houses and Fields, forasmuch as the Governor of the Island is empower'd by
virtue of another Law, to sentence those, before whose doors, or upon whose
ground such Carcases are found, to some days work, either at the Temples, or
for the Publick. They have some few Monkeys of a docile kind, with short tails,
of a brownish dark colour, with naked red faces and backs. A Mounte bank shew'd
one about the Country, which he pretended was 106 years old, and which play'd
several artful tricks with great dexterity. They have some few Bears in the
Northern Provinces, but of a small kind. Tanuki is a very singular kind of an
Animal, of a brownish dark colour, with a snout not unlike a Fox's snout, and
pretty small: It seems otherwise to be of the Wolf's kind. They have likewise a
sort of wild Dogs, with large gaping
Itutz is a small Animal of a redish colour.
It 3nother larger sort of it is call'd Tin: They both live in 1: hOuseS) and
lodge themselves under the roofs, they are so tame) that they might be rank'd
among the domestick Animals. They are very dextrous at catching of Fowl,
chiefly Chickens, and Fish. The whole Country swarms With Rats and Mice. The
Rats are tam'd by the Natives, R. and taught to perform several tricks. Rats
thus taught M are the common diversion of some poor People. The best of the
kind, and which play with most dexterity are to be seen at Osacca, as the place
which Mountebanks, Jugglers and Raryshow-people resort to from all parts of the
Empire. Foxes also are very common. The Natives Fe believe that they are
animated by the Devil, and their Historical and Sacred Writings are full of
strange accounts of several odd accidents, which happen'd with, and with regard
to Foxes. The Fox-hunters however are very expert in conjuring and stripping
this animated Devil, the Hair and Wool being very much coveted for their
writing and painting Pencils. They make the same distinction between the Kis,
or Fox, and Oni or Devil, as they do in Sweden between Faan, and Dieblen. Of
Tygers, Panthers, Lyons, and such other voracious Animals Japan is entirely
free.
Thus much of the four footed wild and tame
Beasts, which are to be met with in Japan. The Insects of the Reptile kind are
next to be taken into consideration. R, Among these a mischievous small
Creature, [127] known all over the East-Indies by the name of white Ants, claims g
the first place. It is a small slender Worm, perfectly white like Snow. They
live together in commonalty, as our European Ants do, from whom they do not
much differ in shape and bigness. Their head and breast, are of a brownish dark
colour and hard to the touch. The Japanese call them Do Toos, which is as much as
to say, Piercers, an Epithet, which they very well deserve, for they pierce and
perforate whatever they meet with, Stones only and Ores excepted, and when once
they get into a Merchant's Ware-house, they are able within a very sh compass
of time to ruin and to destroy his best Good Nothing hath been as yet found
out, that will keep them off, but Salt laid under the Goods and spread about
theln Our common European Ants are their mortal Enemies and whatever place the
one sort takes possession of, the others must necessarily quit it. They are no
more able than Moles to support the open air, and whenever they go out upon an
expedition, they defend themselves by building arches or trenches all along
their march, which they know how to tie fast to the ground. These arches are
much of the same substance with that of wasp's-nests I was told surprizing and
melancholly Stories of their quick and mischievous marches and expeditions. But
I will only relate what I was an Eye-witness of my self. During my stay at Coylang,
a Dutch Fort upon the Coasts of Malabar, I had an apartment assign'd me in the
Governor's own House. One Night I did not go to bed till about mid-night,
having been very busy. The next Morning, when I rose, I took notice of the
marks of such arches upon my table, which were about the bigness of mJ little
finger, and upon a more accurate inspection I found, that these Animals had
pierc'd a passage of that thickness up one foot of the table, then across the
table (tho' as good luck would have it, without any damage done to the papers
and things I had left there) and so down again through the middle of the other
foot into the floor. All this was perform'd within a few hours time. Some
attribute the cause of so quick and surprizing a corrosion to the sharpness of
their excrements, but wrongly as I found upon examination, for I took notice,
that their snouts were arm'd with four sharp crooked pinchers, which in m)
opinion, are Instruments far more proper to do such quick execution, than any
excrements how sharp and corrosive soever.
Mukadde, according to the common Japanese
dialect) and Goko in their significant or Character language, are not what we
call Aselli or Wood-lice, but the Indian Millepedes, Palmer-worms, or
Forty-legs, a worm of about two or three inches in length, slender, of a brown
colour, having a great number of legs on both sides, from whence it hath
borrow'd its name. The Indian Forty-legs are very venomous, and their bites are
reckon'd more dangerous and painful, than
those of the Scorpion. There are but few in Japan, and those not very [128] mischievous. The part which is stung, or bit, is dress'd with
spittle, and the bite seldom observ'd to be attended with ill consequences.
(See Fig. 33.)
The Lizards of this Country do not differ
from our common European Lizards.
There are but few Snakes in the Country. o
most famous is call'd Fitakutz, and Fibakari. It is the green colour, with a
flat head and sharp teethv It h a borrow'd its name from the length of the day,
or the time the Sun stays upon the Horizon, because People bit by it, are said
to die before Sun-set. Soldsers are very fond of its flesh, which they eat,
firmly believing, that Yt hath the virtue of making them bold and couragious
This Snake calcin'd in an earthen-pot, hermetically seal'd gives that powder,
which they call Gawatsio, and which is very famous for its vertues in curing
several internal distempers. This same Powder, put under the gutters of a
house, is said in a short time to produce young Snakes of the same kind. I met with
this sort of Snake no where else but upon the Coasts of Malabar, where I was
shewad some by the Bramines. Another sort of Snakes of a monstrous size, call'd
Jamakagats, or according to the common Dialect Uwabami, and sometimes Dsja,
that is Dragon, is found in waters and upon mountains. It is very scarce, and
when taken, shew'd about for money. (See Fig. 34.) From the Reptiles I proceed
to the Birds.
Of tame Fowl they keep Chickens and
sometimes Ducks, but being as I took notice above, imbued with the superstitious
notions of Pythagoras, the generality will not eat them, and they are kill'd
and sold to such as do venture to eat them, only by Persons of a mean
extraction When a Man lies at the point of death, as also upon those days which
are sacred to the memory of deceas'd Persons, none of their relations and
friends may kill any bird or beast whatever. In the mourning years for the
death of an Emperor, and at any other time, when the Emperor thinks fit to
order it, no living creature whatever mae be kill'd or brought to market in any
part of his dominions
The Cocks oftner find pardon than Hens, and
are kept alive with great care, because they are held in great estetm' chiefly
among the religious Orders, by reason of their measuring the time, and
foretelling future changes of the weather. Wild Fowl, tho' naturally shy, are
in this opulous Country grown so familiar, that many kinds of tPhem might be
rank'd among the tame. The Tsuri, or Crane, is the chief of the wild Birds of
the Country, and Cranc. hath this particular Imperial Privilege, that nobody
may shoot him without an express order from the Emperor, and only for the
Emperor's own pleasure or use. In SaiKokf however, and in other Provinces
remote from Court) a less strict regard is had to the like Imperial Commands.
The Cranes and Tortoises are reckon'd very happy Animals in themselves, and
thought to portend good luck to others, and this by reason of their pretended
long and fabulous life, of which there are several remarkable instances
recorded [129] in
their Historical Writings. For this reason the Imperial Apartments, walls of
Temples, and other happy places are commonly adorn'd with Figures of them, as
also with Figures of Firs and Bambous for the like reason. I never heard
Country people, and Carriers, call this Bird otherwise than, O Tsurisama, that
is, My great Lord Crane. There are two different kinds of them, one white as
Snow, the other grey or ash-colour'd There are several kinds of Saggi, or
Herons, which differ in colour and size. The chief are Sijro Saggi, the white
Heron, Goi Saggi, the grey Heron, both very common, and Awoi Saggi, a Heron of
a bluish colour and almost as big as a Crane. There are two different sorts of
wild Geese, which couple each with their kind. One sort is as white as Snow,
only the extremities of the wings are black; the other is grey or ash-colour'd.
Both are very common in this Country, particularly the grey ones, and so
familiar, that they might be taken for tame, for they will not fly up, nor get
out of the way at any body's approach. They do a great deal of mischief in the
Fields, and yet no body may disturb, or kill them, under pain of death, except
those who have bought the privilege to shoot them in some tracts of ground. The
Country-people, to keep them off, surround their Fields with nets, tho' to very
little purpose, for they will fly over the nets, as I have seen my self, to get
at their Food.
Of Ducks also there are several differing
kinds, and as tame as the Geese. One kind particularly I cannot forbear mentioning,
because of the surprizing beauty of its male, call'd Kinmodsui, which is so
great, that being shew'd its
picture in colours, I could hardly believe
my own Eyes, till I saw the Bird it self, it being a very common one (See Fig.
35.) Its feathers are wonderfully diversify'd with the finest colours
imaginable, about the Neck and breast chiefly they are red. The head is crown'd
with a most magnificent topping. The Tail rising obliquely, and the wings
standing up over the back in a very singular manner, afford to the Eye a sight
as curious, as it is uncommon. There are also Pheasants of uncommon beauty. One
kind particularly is remarkable for the various colours and lustre of its
feathers, and for the beauty of its tail, which equals half a Man's length, and
in a curious variety and mixture of the finest colours, chiefly blue and gold,
is no ways inferior to that of a Peacock.
Woodcocks are a very common Bird; they are
eat by th adherents of some Sects, as are also the pheasants, Geese and Ducks.
There is a sort of wild Pigeons with black and blue feathers, tho' otherwise
they are no great beauties The Natives won't suffer them to nest in their
Houses because they found by experience, that their dung upon removal is very
apt to take fire, and they say that many an unlucky accident happen'd thereby.
Storks stay in the Country all the year
round. [130]
The best Falcons are caught in the Northern
Provinces and are kept more for State than Sport.
Hawks are common here, as they are every
where in the East-Indies, and a very proud Bird, as is also a kind of Ravens,
of a middling size, which was first brought over fiom China, as a Present to
the Emperor.
Another scarce Bird was sent over from
Corea, by way of Present to the Emperor, and is thence call'd Coreigaras, that
is, a Corean Raven.
Our common European Crows, as also Parrots,
and some other Indian Birds, are not to be met with in Japan.
Foken, or according to the common Dialect
Fototenis, is a scarce Night Bird, of an excellent and delicious taste, and a
dish only for the tables of people of quality upon extraordinary occasions. The
ashes of this Bird calcin'd, and put into old sower Sacki, are said to restore
it to its former taste and goodness. (See Fig. 36.)
Misago, or Bisago, is a voracious Sea Bird of
the Hawkkind. It preys chiefly upon Fish. It makes a hole in some Rock, upon
the Coasts, where it lays up its prey and provision, which is observ'd to keep
as well as pickel'd Fish, or Atsiaar, and is thence call'd, Bisagonosusi, or
the Bisago's Atsiaar. It tastes very salt, and is sold dear Whoever knows such
a Cave can make a good deal of Money of it, provided he doth not take out too
much at a time. (See Fig. 37.)
Mews, Sea Ravens, Snipes, Sea-pies,
Sparrows,
Swallows, and some other small Birds are as
common
here, as in Europe.
tarks sing much better here, than they do
in Europe. The Nightingales, if they have a good voice, are sold cometimes to
curious People for twenty Cobangs a piece. thus far, what I had to observe
concerning the Birds of this Country.
Of flying Insects the Country hath Bees,
consequently g Some Honey and Wax, tho' but in a small quantity. I Humble-Bees,
Wasps, common Flies, Gnats, Fire-flies, several sorts of Beetles and Bugs, as
also Locusts, and a great variety of other Insects of this Tribe, it hath
common with Europe, besides some other particular and remarkable sorts, the
chief of whlch I will here giva a short account of.
Among the Butterflies there is one very
large sort call'd Jamma Tsio, or the Mountain Butterfly. It is either entirely
black, or party colour'd, and curiously diversified with white, black and other
spots, chiefly upon its forke,d wings. Komuri is a large, spotted, party
colour'd, hairy, beautiful Nightfly. The same name is given also to Bats Of
Beetles, they have several scarce and beautiful kinds One in particular is very
large, in shape not unlike the Dung-fly, shining, black, with two crooked and
branched Horns, one larger standing over [131] the
Nose, after the manner of a Rhinoceros's Horn, the other smaller, standing out
on one side from the Shoulder. This Animal cannot walk easily. It lives chiefly
under ground. It is scarce, and the Natives have as yet given it no name.
A certain kind of brown Beetles call'd
Sebi, and sometimes Semi, affords several curious and remarkable things to the
attentive Eye of an inquisitive Naturalist. They are of three different kinds.
The largest is call'd Kuma Sebi. (See Fig. 38. A. B.) It resembles in shape and
bigness that sort of Flies, which with us in Europe are generally observ'd to
fly about in the Evening, but it hath no Wings. In the Spring they creep out of
the Ground, (where they have lain in Winter-quarters) in the nighttime, and
fasten themselves with their sharp hoary legs to Trees, their branches, or leaves,
or whatever in their march they can lay hold of. A little while after they
burst, and split their back lengthways, to give room to another Fly not
unlike a Beetle, which was enclos'd within it, tho' much bigger than the Prison
to which it was confin'd. Some hours after, this second Fly flies away with a
hurrying noise. This curious little Animal hath been described by Gessner by
the name of Cicada Bursting open the shell in which it lay, and at the same
time spreading out its four wings, it makes a sharp and loud noise, which they
say, may be heard (a thing almost incredible) very distinctly at full an
English Mile's distance. Woods and mountains are full of the noise these little
creatures make. They disappear gradually in the Dogdays, and 'tis said, that
they creep into the ground again in order to undergo a new Metamorphosis or
change, and to re-appear in the same state the next year. How far this agrees
with truth, I am not able to determine for
00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000
following Fable ows its origin to the
unparallel'd beauty of this little creature. They say that all other
Night-flies fall in love with it, and that to get rid of their importunities it
maliciously bids them (for a trial of their constancy) to go and to fetch fire.
The blind lovers scruple not to obey commands, and flying to the next fire or
candle, they never fail to burn themselves to death. The female is not near so
beautiful as the male, but grey, or ash-colour'd and spotted.
Chap. XI. Of Fish and Shells.
The Sea, and its Productions, contribute
full as much towards the sustenance of the Natives, as the growth of the
Country, Rice only excepted. The Sea all about Japan is plentifully stor'd with
all sorts m of Sub-marine Plants, Fish, Crabs and Shells, of all which there
are very few, but what were eat by their indigent Ancestors, and are so to this
day. There are even many which in these wealthy and refin'd Ages appear upon
the sumptuous tables of People of the highest quality. Both Fish, Crabs and
Shells, are comprehended under one general Name Kiokai, or Iwokai. In this
present chapter, which may be look'd upon as an Introduction to one of the
following, wherein I intend to treat of their tables and kitchin, I will set
down as many of them as came to my knowledge, along with their true Japanese
Names, though it must be observid in general, that several of them are found
likewise in our European and other Seas.
Of all the animal productions of the
Japanese Seas, I know none of so extensive an use, for rich and poor, as the
Kudsuri or Whale. It is caught frequently about A Japan, but particularly in
the Sea Khumano, which washes the Southern Coasts of the great Island Nipon, as
[133] also about the Islands Tsussima and Goto, and upon the Coasts of
Omura and Nomo. The common way of catch them is with darts, or harping-irons,
as they do in thg Groenland-fishery, but the Japanese Boats seem to b fitter
for this purpose than ours, being small, narrw, tapering into a sharp point at
one end, with five oarS ten Men each, who row them with incredible swiftness
About 1680, a rich Fisherman in the province Omura whose name was Gitaijo,
found out a new way of catchin Whales with Nets made of strong ropes about two
Incheg thick. This method was afterwards followid with good success by a
Countryman in the Islands of Gotho, whose name was Iwonomo. They say, that as
soon as the Whale finds his head entangled in a net, he cannot without great
difficulty swim further, and may be very easily kill'd with Harpoon-irons after
the common manner. The reason why this new Method, which seem'd to bid very
fair for success, hath not been universally receiv'd is, because it requires a
greater, and much more expensive set of proper Tackle, than common Fishermen
can afford. For whereas the expence of Whale-fishing, after the common manner,
$eldom exceeds 20 Chests of Silver, this cannot be so much as attempted with a
less Sum.
There are several sorts of Whales, which
differ in their names, shape, and bigness.. Sebio is the chief, and indeed the
largest Fish of the Whale-kind. It affords most Train-oyl, and its flesh is
very good, and wholesom, so far that Fisher-men and the common People attribute
their good state of health amidst all the injuries of cold and weather, which
they are continually expos'd to, chiefly to their eating this flesh. z. Awo
Sangi, commonly Kokadsura, that is a small Whale, is grey or ash-colour'd,
smaller than the Sebio, from which it also differs something in shape. 3.
Nagass, is commonly 20 to 30 fathom long, and hath this particular, that he can
stay under water for two or three hours, during which time he can travel a vast
way, whereas other Whales must continually come up to the surface of the water
for fresh supplies of air. 4. Sotookadsura, that is, the Whale of blind People)
50 call'd from the figure of a Bijau, or a
sort of a Lute, whiCh blind people in this Country use to play upon, whiCh is
said to be naturally represented on its back. It is not a very large sort, and
seldom exceeds ten fathom in length. It is caught frequently about Japan, but
the flesh is reckon'd unwholsome food, being, as they say, too hot, and
occasioning coughs, fevers, eruptions on the skin, and sometimes the Small-pox.
It is brought to market with other fish, and sold for the flesh of the Sebio,
but those who know it will never buy it. 5. Mako never exceeds three or four
fathom in length. This same name is given to the young ones of the other kinds.
That, which I hear speak of, is caught frequently upon the Eastern Coasts of
Japan, as also upon the Coasts of Kijnokuni and Satzuma. Ambergreese is found
in the intestins of this Whale. The head yields a small quantity of Train-oyl.
6. Iwasikura, that is, Sardin's-Eater, hath a tail and fins like common Fish.
We saw this [134] sort, when we went up to Court, between CaMinoseki, and
Simonoseki, and I took it to be that Fish which the Dutch call Noord Caper. Of
all these several kinds of Whales nothing is thrown away as useless, excepting
only the large Shoulder-bone. The skin which is black in most kinds, the Flesh
which is red and looks like Beef, the intestins, which from their remarkable
length are call'd Fiaksiro, that is, an hundred fathoms long, and all the
inward parts are eat, pickel'd, boil'd, roasted, or fry'd. The fat or blubber
is boil'd into Train-oyl, and even the sediments of the second boiling are eat.
The bones, such as are of a cartilaginous substance, are boil'd when fresh, and
eat, or scrap'd, clean'd and dried for the use of the kitchin. Out of the
nervous and tendious parts, both white and yellow, they make cords and ropes,
chiefly for their Cotton-manufactures, as also for their Musical Instruments.
Not even the garbage is thrown away, but kept for some use in the Kitchin.
Several little things are made of the jaw-bones, fins and other bones, which
are of a more solid substance; particularly their fine stilyards for weighing
Gold and Silver are made of them and have borrow'd their name from thence.
Satsifoko is a Fish two, three, and
sometimes five to six fathoms long, with two long teeth or tusks, stan
Out of the mouth upwards, which are
sometimes, by way of ornament, put at the top of castles, temples, and publick
buildings. I was inform'd by Fishermen, that this Fish is a cunning and mortal
enemy of Whales, and that he kills them by creeping into the mouth, and
devouring their tongues. He hath a way, as he creeps in, to put his head and
teeth into such a posture, that they are no hindrance to him.
Iruku is a known Fish, call'd Tenije in the
Indies, . (Fig. 39.) Furube is another Fish, not very large, (Fig. 4o.) The
Dutch call him Blazer, which signifys Blower, because he can blow and swell
himself up into the form Gf a round Ball. He is rank'd among the poisonous
Fish, and if eat whole, is said unavoidably to occasion death There are three
different sorts of it found in the JapaneSe Seas, all in great plenty. The
first sort call'd Susumebuka is small, and seldom eat. The second is callud
Mabuku
that is the true Buku. This the Japanese
reckon a very delicate Fish, and they are very fond of it. But the Head, Guts,
bones, and all the garbage must be thrown away, and the Flesh carefully wash'd
and cleanid before it is fit to eat. And yet many People die of it, for want,
as they say, of thoroughly washing and cleaning it. People that by some long
and tedious sickness are grown weary of their lives, or are otherwise under
miserable Circumstances, frequently chuse this poisonous Fish, instead of a
knife or halter, to make away with themselves. A Neighbour of my Servant at
Nangasaki being so strongly infected with the Pox, that his nose was ready to
drop off, resolv'd to take this Meal, in order to get rid at once both of his
life and distemper. Accordingly h bought a good quantity of this poisonous
Fish, cut it intO pieces, boil'd [135]
it,
and in order as he thought, to make the poison still stronger, he took soot
from the thatch'd roof of his house, and mix'd it with the rest. After dinner
he laid himself down to die, and soon falling mortally sick, he brought up not
only the poison he had taken, but a large quantity of viscid, sharp, nasty
matter, probably not the least cause of his distemper, and by this means found
life and health, in what he sought for death, for he recover'd and was well
afterwards. A few years ago fi~~~ e persons of Nagasaki having eat a dish of
this Fish, fainted soon after dinner, grew convulsive and delirious, and fell
into such a violent spitting of Blood, as made an end of their lives in a few
days. And yet the Japanese won't deprive themselves of a dish so delicate in
their opinion, for all they have so many Instances, of how fatal and dangerous
a consequence it is to eat it. Soldiers only and military men, are by special
command of the Emperor forbid to buy and to eat this fish. If any one dies of
it, his son forfeits the succession to his fatheräs post, which otherwise
he would have been entitled to. It is sold much dearer than common Fish, and
not eat, but when fresh. The third sort is call'd Kitamakura, which signifies
North Cushion. I could not learn the reason of this Appellation. The same Name
is given to a Person that sleeps with his head turn'd to the North. The poison
of this sort is absolutely mortal, no washing nor cleaning will take it off. It
is therefore never ask'd for, but by those who intend to make away with
themselves.
The Sea Horse, or Sea Dog, and, as the
Germans call him Wasserbauch, is a very singular fish, much about the length of
a Boy of ten years of age, without either staleS or fins, with a large Head,
mouth and breast, a large thin belly like a bag, which will hold a large
quantity of water He hath thin sharp teeth in the chops much like a snake
The inner parts are so minute, that they
are scarce visib]e. He hath two flat cartilaginous feet with fingers, not
unlike the hands of a child, under the belly, by the means of which, he creeps,
in all likelyhood or walks at the bottom of the Sea. All his parts are eat,
none excepted. He is caUght frequently in the Gulf of Jedo, between Kamakura
and that Capital, where I saw him brought to market.
Tai, is what the Dutch in the Indies call
Steenbrassem. 2 This is very much esteem'd by the Japanese as the King of Fish,
and a peculiar Emblem of happiness, partly because he is sacred to their Jebis,
or S5eptune, partly by reason of a beautiful variety of shining colours, which
appear on him when under Water. It is a very scarce Sish, not unlike a Carp,
and finely variegated with red and white. The Female hath some red spots It is
so scarce, that upon some great entertainment at Court, or other extraordinary
occasions, it is not to be had under a thousand Cobangs. Another sort of this
Eish is call'd Kharo Tai, or black Steenbrassem, from the colour. This is not
near so much esteem'd, and is caught frequently about SaiKokf. [136]
Susuki, is what the Germans call Kahlkopf,
that is, 2 Baldhead- (Fig. 41) Funa is a fish not unlike a Carp, I and much
commended for his Medicinal Virtues, chiefly against Worms. A larger kind of
the same is call'd Najos. Mebaar is a red colour'd fish, in bigness and shape
not unlike a Carp, or Steenbrassem, with the Eyes standing out of the head like
two balls. It is caught every where in great plenty, and is the common food of
poor People. Koi is another sort of it, which also X resembles a Carp, and is
sometimes one Sackf and a half long. This sort is caught in Rivers, chiefly
about Water falls, against which they endeavour to swim. They are so strong
that two Men can hardly hold them. They are exported all over the Empire, fresh
and pickel'd. They take some in the Lake of Saifa, or Tensiu which are four
Sakf long. (Fig. 42.) Maar, the Salmon is taken in Rivers and fresh water
Lakes. Itojori is a Salmonat, or small Salmon. Makuts, is what the Dutch call
Harder. Sawara, a King's-fish. Fiuwo is what the Dutch call Draatvish
Ewertz. Kusuna, a short nose. Kamas a Pike.
Susuki X is the Schaarvish of the Dutch, only a longer and narrower 4 sort.
Adsi is the Maasbancker of the l)utch. Of this there are several diflferent
kinds, the chief and largest whereof is call'd Ooadsi. i (Fig. 44.) Taka is
what the Dutch call a Kaye. Kame, and Takasame, (Fig. 45.) are j
Rays, of the hard skins of which they make
cases and other curious things in Japan. The skin of this fish is imported also
from Siam, where it is found much finer. Jeje is a broad flat fish with a long
tail. There is one sort of it, which hath a small horny, or bony, sting at the
end of the tail, which the Dutch in the Indies call Pijlstaart. The Japanese
believe, that this sting taken from a live fish is an infallible remedy against
the bite of Snakes, rubbing the bitten part with it- For this reasOn they carry
it along with them among other House Medicines Come, or Jel, are Soles, and
Karei, Bots or Bruts Bora is a fish much like a pike, with a white and
delicious flesh.
Some call him Songaats Fish, because he is
taken in the Songaats, or first month of the Japanese year. They pickle and
smoke them, as they do pikes at Bremen. These and all pickel'd fish in general,
are callad Karasumi. They export them from Nagasaki and Nomo, where they are
frequently caught, and carry them to Jedo, and into several other parts of the
Empire, tied to straw-ropes, ten to a rope. They are exported by the Dutch and
Chinese. Other fish made into Karassumi are valu'd but little by the Natives.
The best sort of the Katsuwo fish is caught i about Gotho. They cut this fish
into four pieces, which they dry by degrees over the damp of hot boiling water,
and bring it upon the table along with the Liquors. The Dutch export it by the
name of Comblomaas, which however is not the true name. Managatsuwo is a flat
fish, . not unlike a But, with one Eye on each side. Sake, perhaps a sort of
Cablian, is a pickel'd fish, not unlike Cod It is imported from the Country of [137] Jeso, and hath borrow'd its name from its smell, which is not
unlike the smell of their Sake Beer. Tara is a sort of Cod imported from the
Northern Provinces; the best of the kind comes from Tsiosijn, whence it is
call'd Tsiosijn Tara. Sajori, is what the Inhabitants of Nagasaki call
Susumoiwo, and the Dutch Naadelvish, (Fig. 46.) which signifies Needlefish. It
is a small fish, not above a span long, thin, with a row of sharp, long
prickles along the back. Tobiwo is what the Dutch call a Springer,
(Flying-fish) because it leaps out of the water. The Japanese one seldom
exceeds a foot in length, and is very delicious, but rarely taken. Iwas, is the
Sardin; Kissugo, the Smelt, or Sand-smelt Jeso by the Dutch call'd Sandkruper,
is a middling fish between a Smelt and an Eel. Saba are Mackrels. Ai, or Ai no
iwo, by the Dutch call'd Modevish, is a fresh-water fish, not above a span
long, swimming with surprizing swiftness. Sijroiwo, is what the Dutch call
Kleiner Stind: They also call him Weissvish, that is white fish. He is caught
in the Spring about the mouths of rivers Kono sijro, call'd by the Dutch
Sassap, is a sort of Herring not unlike the Swedish Strohmlings. Kingio, the
Gold Fish, is a small fish seldom exceeding a finger in length red? with a
beautiful shining, yellow or goldcolour'd tail, whlch in the young ones is
rather black. In China and Japan, and almost all over the Indies, this fish is
kept in ponds, and fed with flies before their wings come out. Another kind
hath a silver-colourad tail. Unagi is the common Eel. Oounagi is another sort
of Eels much larger than the common. (Fig. 47.) Jaatzme Unagi, that is an Eel
with eight Eyes, is what is call'd in Germany Neunaug, that is Nineeye, or an
Eel with nine eyes. (Fig. 48.) Doodsio is by the Dutch call'd Puyt Aal. (Fig.
49.) It is a fish about a finger long, with a very large Head in proportion to
the Body, found frequently in waty Ricefields and muddy ponds. They are of two
different Kinds, the one with, the other without a beard. They have a Notion,
that they may be brought forth artificially out of straw cut, and mix'd with
mud and dirt, and expos'd to the heat of the Sun early in the morning. Fammo,
by the Dutch call Conger Aal, is larger than a common Eel, which it resembles,
when under water, but slenderer. (Fig. 50.)
- Ika is a common Seaqualm- Both the
Chinese and Japanese esteem it a scarce and dellcate blt. Fish also are easier
caught with the flesh of this qualm, than with an~~~. Other bait. (Figs. SI,
52.) Jako or Sepia, is another Sea qualm with long tails or feet, at the end
whereof are, as it were, small hooks, wherewith the creature fastens itself to
rocks, or the bottom of the Sea. (Fig. 53.) It is a common Soccano or
Side-dish, and eat either fresh, boil'd or pickel'd. There are two sorts of
Kuragge, which is k also of the Sea-qualm kind. One is callad Midsukurage, that
is, the white qualm. (Fig. 54.) This is common in all Seas, whitish,
transparent, watry, and not fit to eat.
The other is scarcer, fleshy, and eatable
after it hath been prepar'd and [138]
depriv'd of its sharpness. It is prepar'd after the following
manner. They first macerate them in a dissolution of Alum for three days
together, then they rub, wash and clean it, till it grows transparent) which
done, it is pickel'd and preserv'd for use. Before the Infusion, the skin is
taken off, wash'd, pickelwd and ke t by itself. Some of these Sea-qualms are so
large, thPt two men can scarce lift them up. Pickel'd, as they are brought upon
the table, they are of the same substance) colour and taste with the edible
Bird's-nests (Nidi Alcyonum) brought from China, and I have been credibly
inform'd by Chinese Fishermen, that these Bird's Nests are made of the very
flesh of this Animal.
Namako, by the Dutch at Batavia call'd
KaSerkull, is i edible. (Fig55.) Imori is a small venomous Water-lizard, black,
with a red belly. (Fig. 56.) Takanomakura, which is as much as to say, the
pillow of the Sea-qualm Tako, is the common Sea-star, and is not eat.
Of all the footed animal produce of the
water, the Ki, or Came, Tortoises, are most esteem'd by the JapaneSe being
look'd upon as peculiar Emblems of happineSS, by reason of the long life which
is ascrib'd to them. That kind particularly, which hath a broad tail much like
a large round beard, and which in their learned language is call'd Mooke, and
by the cornmon people Minogame) for all it doth not exist in nature, is yet
frequently to be seen among other emblematical figures, wherewith t:hey adorn
the walls of their temples, the sides of their altars, and the apartments of
the Emperor and Princes of the Empire (Figs. 57, 58.) The most common Tortoises
are, Isicame, or Sanki, that is, the Stone,or Mountain Tortoise,which is so
call'd because found in these places, and is nothing else but the common
Land-tortoise. (Fig. 59.) Jo Game, or Doo Game, that is, Fishy. or
Water-tortoise, (Fig. 60.) because of its living in the water. They say, that
upon the Southern and Eastern Coasts of Japan there are found Tortoises large
enough to cover a Man from head to toe.
All sorts of Crabs and Shrimps both of fresh
and salt water, are call'd in general Jebi. The following particular Kinds are
come to my knowledge. Jebisako is the common small Crab, which is found in
great plenty upon the Coasts of the Baltick. Sako signifies all sorts of small
fish in general. Si Jebi differ but Wittle from the common Crabs, no more than
what they call Dakma Jebi, excepting only, that the latter are caught in fresh
water, and will within a year turn black. Kuruma Jebi, is as much as to say
Wheel-crabs; they are so call'd from the figure of their tail. Umi Jebi, that
is great Crabs or Lobsters, are commonly a foot long. they are boil'd, then cut
into small pieces, and brought upon the table, as a Soccana or Side-dish. Care
must be taken not to eat their black tail, because it hath been observ'd, that
it gives people the belly-ach, or throws them into a Cholera morbus. Siakwa, is
a Crab with a broad Tail, which is caught frequently with other small fish. It
hath but little flesh, and almost none at the time of the full moon. All the [139] testaceous and crustaceous animals, which are found in these Seas,
and indeed every where in the Indian Ocean beyond the Eastern shores of the
Ganges, are observ'd to be fleshier and fuller, at the time of the new moon,
contrary to what happens in our European Seas. Gamina, (Fig. 6I.) otherwise
Koona, is a Crab, which lives in a beautiful shell diversified with various
colours. (This is what the English call Soldier's Crab, Fresh water Soldier,
Hermit Crab, because they live in other People's quarters.) Kani, which
signifies Pocket Crab, is our common European fresh-water Crab. It bears the
name of the whole Tribe of the fresh-water Crabs. Kabutogani, or Unkiu, is a
Crab of a singular structure, with a sharp, long, serrated prickle or sword,
standing out from the head, and a roundish, smooth back. (Fig. 62.) Gadsame is
no bigger than the common Crab, with the upper shel1 tapering into a point on
both sides. It hath four claws, two large ones before, and two behind, which
are smaller. (Fig. 64.) Simagani, that is, a Striated Pocketcrab. It rnight be
call'd Wart-crab, from the great number of warts and prickles, which cover the
Shell all over, the hind Claws only excepted, which are smooth and almost
cylindrical. (Fig. 65.) They are caught frequently upon the Eastern Coasts, as
also in the Gulf of Suruga. Some of this sort are incredibly large. I bought
one of the hind Claws at Suruga in a Cook-shop, which was as long, and full as
big as a Man's Shin-bone. (Fig. 63 )
{ A11 sorts of oysters, muscles and shells,
of which there is a great plenty and surprizing variety in the Japanese seas,
are eat, none excepted, raw, pickel'd, salted, boil'd, or fryed. They are daily
gather'd on the Coasts in low water. Divers dive for them to a considerable
depth Others fish them with nets. The following sorts are the most common and
best known. Awabi, which I have already mentioned, when I spoke of the pearls
of this Countr,v, is an open Univalve, as big as a middle siz'd Persian Pearl
shell, but deeper. (Fig. 66.) They lie deep underwater, sticking fast to rocks,
or to the bottom of the Sea, from whence they are taken up by Fishermen's
wives, they being the best Divers of the Country. They go down arm'd with Darts
or long knifes, to defend themselves against Kayes and Porpesses, and when they
see an Awabi, they pull it ofl^ suddenly before the animal is aware because
otherwise it would fasten itself to the rocks, or to the bottom of the Sea, so
strongly, that no force woUld be strong enough to tear it off. This shell is fillrd
with a large piece of flesh of a yellowish, or whitish colour, and a very tough
substance, though without fibres. They say, it was the common food of their
necessitous Ancestors, in memory whereof when they entertain company at dinner
they always provide a dish of it. It is also become a custom with them, as well
among the vulgar, as among people of quality, that when they send one another
presents of money, cloth, stuflfs, fruits, or any thing else, a string, or at
least a small bit of the dried flesh of this shell is sent [140] along with them, as a good Omen, and in order to put them in mind
of the Indigency of their Forefathers. The flesh is cut into thin slices or
strings, which are extended on a board, and dried. A large Pearl is found
sometimes in this Shell, but of an ugly yellowish colour, a deformed shape and
of no Value. Tairagi is a flat, long, thin, and very large bivalve, almost
transparent, near of a triangular Figure, running from a large base tapering
intO a point. The Animal is tied fast to both sides of the shell with a strong
tendon. (Fig. 67.) The best of the kind are found in the Gulf of Arima, where
it sometimes yields Pearls. Akoja is a flat bivalve, about a hand broad, scaly,
on its outward surface, and of a very ugly appearance, within of an exquisite
Mother of Pearl's glimmering. The best of the kind, and which yield the finest
Pearls, are found in the Gulf of Omura. Mirakai is the common e or lvlaree,
oDlong Inln Dlvalves gaplng at DOLII t:llUb, black fresh water Muscle, which is
found also in our Rivers and Lakes in Germany. Famaguri, (Fig. 68.) are
bivalves much of the same shape and bigness, but thicker, smooth and white
within, without of a brown or chesnut colour. Divers curious figures are
painted on the inside and they serve as an Amusement to the Court of the Dairi,
or Ecclesiastical Hereditary Emperor, who pla) with them after the following
manner. Large heaps are thrown on the ground, and every one of the Company
having taken his Portion, he wins, that can shew the most pairs. Every pair
hath proper hooks, by the means of which they are easily known, and brought
together, tho' never so much mix'd. The best are gatherxd, and in greatest
plenty upon the Coasts of Quano. Sidsimi is a « small bivalve not unlike
the Famaguri, but thinner, and is found sticking in mud. Katsi or Utsikaki, are
Oysters. . The Oysters found about Japan are deformed, rough, stony, growing
together, and to rocks. There are chiefly two sorts, one remarkably large, the
other smaller. The best and largest are found in great plenty in the Gulf of
Kamakura. Kisa, or Akagai is also a bivalve, white without, with deep furrows
running as it were parallel to each other, within of a reddish colour. (Fig.
69.) They fix a handle to this shell, and use it in the kitchen instead of a
spoon,or pail. Nakatagai is a large,ugly,roundish, striated and black shell.
Asari, is a small thin shell, grey or ash colour'd. Te or Matee, (Fig. 69.) is
an oblong thin bivalve gaping at both ends. The Animal that live5 within it, is
reckoned very delicious. Umi Fake is another bivalve much of the same kind,
about a span long, and so big, that one can scarce grasp it between the thumb
and fore-finger. Its flesh is pickel'd and kept for use. This shell is found
only upon the Coasts of Tsikungo, where by express order of the Prince of that
Country it is forbid to fish them, till a sufficient quantity hath been
provided for the EmperorXs own Table. Takaragai call'd in the Indies Cowers,
are brought from the Maldive and other Islands, and imported into Bengala,
Pegu, and Siam, where they go for current Money. Those found about Japan are of
different [141] sorts. (Fig. 70.) The best are brought from the Riuku Islands, and
are the chief ingredient of their white Cheek varnish. Sasai (Fig.7I.) is a
large, thick, odoriferous, turbinated univalve, white and prickled. Its mouth
is shut close, with a flat, thick covering, or operculum, of a stony substance,
rough, on the outside not unlike the Lapis Judaicus, only sharper and smooth.
Nisi is an Univalve much of the same shape, but larger, and hath not near so
good a flesh. Both can fasten themselves very close to rocks, and the bottom of
the Sea, like the Awabi. Common People make use of the shell instead of Pots to
spit in. Tannisi are the common black Land Snails gather'd for Food in mudd)
Rice Fields. They have their mouth shut with an oblong, almost stony operculum.
Bai is a Snail in a common oblong, turbinated white shell. Ras or Mina is
another of the same kind, but black and smaller. Both are gather'd on the shore
in low water. Kabuto is a small, oval, not turbinated univalve. Another small
lurbinated univalve is call'd Sugai.
ooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo
Chap. XI. Of Fish and Shells.
He Sea, and its Productions, contribute full,
as much towards the sustenance of the Natives, as the growth of the Country,
Rice only excepted. The Sea all about Japan is plentifully stor'd with all
sorts of Sub-marine Plants, Fish, Crabs and Shells, of all which there are very
few, but what were eat by their indigent Ancestors, and are so to this day.
There are even many which in these wealthy and refin'd Ages appear upon the
sumptuous tables of People of the highest quality. Both Fish, Crabs and Shells,
are comprehended under one general Name Kiokai, or Iwokai. In this present
chapter, which may be look'd upon as an Introduction to one of the following,
wherein I intend to treat of their tables and kitchin, I will set down as many
of them as came to my knowledge, along with their true Japanese Names, though
it must be observxd in general, that several of them are found likewise in our
European and other Seas.
Of all the animal productions of the
Japanese Seas, I know none of so extensive an use, for rich and poor, as the
Kudsuri or Whale. It is caught frequently about Japan, but particularly in the
Sea Khumano, which washes the Southern Coasts of the great Island Nipon, as [133] also about the Islands Tsussima and Goto, and upon the Coasts of
Omura and Nomo. The common way of catching them 1s with darts, or
harping-irons, as they do in the Groenland-fishery, but the Japanese Boats seem
to te fitter for this purpose than ours, being small, narrO>. tapering into
a sharp point at one end, with five oars, or ten Men each, who row them with
incredible Swiftlless About 1680) a rich Fisherman in the province OmUra whose
name was Gitaijo, found out a new way of catching Whales with Nets made of
strong ropes about two Inches thick. This method was afterwards follow'd with
good success by a Countryman in the Islands of Gotho, whose name was Iwonomo.
They say, that as soon as the Whale finds his head entangled in a net, he
cannot without great difficulty swim filrther, and may be very easily kill'd
with Harpoon-irons after the common manner. The reason why this new Method,
which seem'd to bid very fair for success, hath not been universally receiv'd
is, because it requires a greater, and much more expensive set of proper
Tackle, than common Fishermen can afford. F or whereas the expence of
Whale-fishing, after the common manner, seldom exceeds 20 Chests of Silver,
this cannot be so much as attempted with a less Sum.
There are several sorts of Whales, which
differ in their ?S. names, shape, and bigness. r. Sebio is the chief, and
indeed the largest Fish of the Whale-kind. It affords most Train-oyl, and its
flesh is very good, and wholesom, so far that Fishermen and the common People
attribute their good state of health amidst all the injuries of cold and
weather, which they are continually expos'd to, chiefly to their eating this
flesh. 2. Awo Sangi, commonly Kokadsura, that is a small Whale, is grey or ashcolour'd,
smaller than the Sebio, from which it also differs something in shape. 3.
Nagass, is commonly 20 to 30 fathom long, and hath this particular, that he can
stay under water for two or three hours, during which time he can travel a vast
way, whereas other Whales must continually come up to the surface of the water
for fresh supplies of . air. 4. Sotookadsura, that is, the Whale of blind
Peoplen so call'd from the figure of a Bijwu, or a sort of a Lute, vvhich blind
people in this Country use to play upon, which is said to be naturally
represented on its back. It is not a very large sort, and seldom exceeds ten
fathom in length. It is caught frequently about Japan, but the flesh is
reckon'd unwholsome food, being, as they say, too hot, and occasioning coughs,
fevers, eruptions on the skin, and sometimes the Small-pox. It is brought to
market with other fish, and sold for the flesh of the Sebio, but those who know
it will never buy it. 5. Mako never exceeds three or four fathom in length.
This same name is given to the young ones of the other kinds. That, which I
hear speak of, is caught frequently upon the Eastern Coasts of Japan, as aJso
upon the Coasts of Kijnokuni and Satzuma. Ambergreese is found in the intestins
of this Whale. The head yields a small quantity of Train-oyl. 6. Iwasikura,
that is, Sardin's-Eater, hath Isaasik'w a tail and fins like common Fish. We
saw this [134] sort, when we went up to Court, between CaMinoseki, and
Simonoseki, and I took it to be that Fish which the Dutch call Noord Caper. Of
all these several kinds of Whales nothing is thrown away as useless, excepting
only the large Shoulder-bone. The skin which is black in most kinds, the Flesh
which is red and looks like Beef, the intestins, which from their remarkable
length are call'd Fiaksiro, that is, an hundred fathoms long, and all the
inward parts are eat, pickel'd, boil'd, roasted, or fry'd. The fat or blubber
is boil'd into Trainoyl, and even the sediments of the second boiling are eat.
The bones, such as are of a cartilaginous substance, are boil'd when fresh, and
eat, or scrap'd, clean'd and dried for the use of the kitchin Out of the
nervous and tendious parts, both white and yellow, they make cords and ropes,
chiefly for their Cottonmanufactures, as also for their Musical Instruments.
Not even the garbage is thrown away, but kept for some use in the Kitchin.
Several little things are made of the jaw-bones, fins and other bones, which
are of a more solid substance; particularly their fine Mako. stilyards for
weighing Gold and Silver are made of h and have borrow'd their name from
thence. t em, Satsifoko is a Fish two, three, and sometimes fi six fathoms
long, with two long teeth or tusks, standiln,, Out of the mouth upwards, which
are sometimes, by way of ornament, put at the top of castles, temples, and
publick buildings. I was inform'd by Fishermen, that this Fish is a cunning and
mortal enemy of ViThales, and that he kills them by creeping into the mouth,
and devouring their tongues. He hath a way, as he creeps in, to put his head
and teeth into such a posture, that they are no hindrance to him.
Iruku is a known Fish, call'd Tenije in the
Indies, (Fig. 39.) Furube is another Fish, not very large, (Fig. 4c.) The Dutch
call him Blazer, which signifys Blower, because he can blow and swell himself
up into the form of a round Ball. He is rank'd among the poisonous Fish, and if
eat whole, is said unavoidably to occasion death There are three different
sorts of it found in the JapaneSe Seas, all in great plenty. The first sort
callwd Susumebuka is small, and seldom eat. The second is calltd Mabuku that is
the true Buku. This the Japanese reckon a very delicate Fish, and they are very
fond of it. But the Head, Guts, bones, and all the garbage must be thrown away,
and the Flesh carefully washad and clean'd before it is fit to eat. And yet
many People die of it, for want, as they say, of thoroughly washing and
cleaning it. People that by some long and tedious sickness are grown weary of
their lives, or are otherwise under miserable Circumstances, frequently chuse
this poisonous Fish, instead of a knife or halter, to make away with themselves
A Neighbour of my Servant at Nangasaki being so strongly infected with the Pox,
that his nose was ready
00000000000000000000000000000000000000
want of proper Observations- The name
Sernmi or Seb which they bear, is borrow'd from their Musick, Thlc' begins
slowlyandupon a low tune, then increases graduallX in swiftness and loudness,
and again ends nretty 1
This Musick, I thought, was not unlike the
Noise a Buttonmaker's spxndle makes in turning. They beain to sing with the
Rising-sun, and end about Noon. The Exuviae call'd Semi no Mukigara are
preserv'd for physical uses, and sold publickly in shops both in Japan and
China (See Fig. 38. C. D. E.) Another smaller kind is from its smallness call'd
Kosebi, or the small Sebi. (See Fig. 38. F. G. H. I.) They appear later in the
year, much about the time when the others disappear. They sing from Noon to
Sun-set, and live till late in Autumn. Their musick is not near so loud as that
of the first kind, and is by the common people call'd Tsuku Tsukuboo. The third
kind difl*ers from the second neither in shape nor bigness, only they sing from
morning to night. The Females of all the three kinds are mute, and have their
breast shut: In all other respects they are like the Males. (See Fig. 38. K.
L.)
. The Cantharides, or Spanish-flies are of
the same colour with our Spanish-flies, but somewhat bigger and rounder, and
very near as big as our common [132] European Beetles. Their use is entirely unknown in Japan. Another
particular sort of Spanish-flies is called Fanmio. They are extremely caustick,
and rank'd among the Poisons. They are found upon Rice-Ears, and are long,
slender, and smaller than the Spanish-flies, blew or gold-colour'd, with
scarlet or crimson spots and lines, which makes them look very beautiful. (See
Fig. 38.) But the finest of all the flying tribe of Insects, and which by
reason of its incomparable beauty is kept by the Ladies among their
Curiosities, is a peculiar and scarce Night-fly, about a finger long, slender,
roundbodied, with four wings, two of which are transparent and hid under a pair
of others which are shining, as it were polish'd, and most curiously adorn'd
with biew and golden lines and spots. The following Fable ows its origin to the
unparallel'd beauty of this little creature. They say that all other
Night-flies fall in love with it, and that to get rid of their importunities it
maliciously bids them (for a trial of their constancy) to go and to fetch fire.
The blind lovers sauple not to obey commands, and flying to the next fire or
candIe, they never fail to burn themselves to death. The female is not near so
beautiful as the male, but grey, or ash-colour'd and spotted.